IMPREZA - Car SUBARU - Free user manual and instructions

★ ★ ★ ★ ★ 6.0/10 📄 365 pages PDF ⬇️ EN 💬 AI Question 🖨️ Print

USER MANUAL IMPREZA SUBARU

77 AI9OOBE-A book Page -2 Friday, June 17, 2005 6:37 PM Foreword Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and its operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual, such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact the dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the nearest SUBARU dealer. The information, specifications and illustrations found in this man- ual are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY INDUS- TRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and de- signs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any ob- ligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles previous- ly sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your vehicle. Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need the information found herein.

e||4… _4lle Ÿ7 AIS0OBE-A book Page -1 Friday, June 17, 2005 6:37 PM Ï

This manual describes the following vehicle types.

d di|æ KŸ7 A1900BE-A.book Page 1 Friday, June 17, 2005 6:37 PM n 41 Warranties Y WRX-STI How to use this owner’s man- . ual E Warranties for U.S.A. ÂÀCAUTION All SUBARU vehicles distributed by | [WRX-STI models are equipped with BE Using your Owner’s manual Subaru of America, Inc. and sold at retail High Intensity Discharge (HID) head- Before you operate your vehicle, carefully by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the lights that contain mercury. For that read this manual. To protect yourself and United States come with the following reason, it is necessary to remove extend the service life of your vehicle, fol- warranties: HID headlights before vehicle dis- low the instructions in this manual. Failure + SUBARU Limited Warranty posal. Once removed, please reuse, to observe these instructions may result in + Emission Control Systems Warranty recycle or dispose of the HID head- serious injury and damage to your vehicle. + Emissions Performance Warranty lights as hazardous waste. This manual is composed of fourteen Y All models except WRX-STI chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief All warranty information, including details table of contents, so you can usually tell at of coverage and exclusions, is in the rss “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. ÂÀCAUTION a glance if that chapter contains the infor- Le il mation you want. Please read these warranties carefully. = — = y This vehicle does not contain mer- Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS air- n cury devices or parts. L ” s EH Warranties for Canada y P bags All SUBARU vehicles distributed by This chapter informs you how to use the Subaru Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by seat and seatbelt and contains precau- an authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada tions for the SRS airbags. come with the following warranties: Chapter 2: Keys and doors This chapter informs you how to operate + SUBARU Limited Warranty the keys, locks and windows. + Anti-Corrosion Warranty Chapter 3: Instruments and controls + Emission Control Warranty This chapter informs you about the opera- All warranty information, including details on a netunent panel indicatos and of coverage and exclusions, is in the War- switches. ranty and Service Booklet. Please read act these warranties carefully. Chapter 4: Climate Control This chapter informs you how to operate

KT AT90OBE-A book Page 2 Friday, June 17, 2005 6:37 PM the climate control.

This chapter informs you how to operate your audio system.

Chapter 6: Interior equipment

This chapter informs you how to operate interior equipment.

Chapter 7: Starting and operating

This chapter informs you how to start and operate your SUBARU.

Chapter 8: Driving tips

This chapter informs you how to drive your SUBARU in various conditions and ex- plains some safety tips on driving.

Chapter 9: In case of emergency

This chapter informs you what to do if you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tire or engine overheating.

Chapter 10: Appearance care

This chapter informs you how to keep your SUBARU looking good.

Chapter 11: Maintenance and service

This chapter informs you when you need to take your SUBARU to the dealer for scheduled maintenance and informs you how to keep your SUBARU running prop- erly.

Chapter 12: Specifications

This chapter informs you about dimension and capacities of your SUBARU.

Chapter 13: Consumer information and

Reporting safety defects

This chapter informs you about Uniform tire quality grading standards and Report- ing safety defects.

This is an alphabetical listing of all that's in this manual. You can use it to quickly find something you want to read. H Safety warnings You will find a number of WARNINGs, CAUTIONS and NOTES in this manual. These safety warnings alert you to poten- tial hazards that could result in injury to you or others. Please read these safety warnings as well as all other portions of this manual careful- ly in order to gain a better understanding of how to use your SUBARU vehicle safe- ly. A WARNING A WARNING indicates a situation in which serious injury or death could result if the warning is ignored. [ ÂCAUTION | A CAUTION indicates a situation in which injury or damage to your vehi- cle, or both, could result if the cau- tion is ignored.

NOTE A NOTE gives information or sugges- tions how to make better use of your vehicle. H Safety symbol

You will find a circle with a slash through it in this manual. This symbol means “Do not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen”, depending upon the context.

KT AT90OBE-A book Page 3 Friday, June 17, 2005 6:37 PM Vehicle symbols There are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.

Name Engine oil Washer Door lock (transmitter) Door unlock (Transmitter) Safety precautions when driving H Seatbelt and SRS airbag [ A WARNING + All persons in the vehicle should fasten their seatbelts BEFORE the vehicle starts to move. Otherwise, the possibility of serious injury becomes greater in the event of a sudden stop or accident. To obtain maximum protection in the event of an accident, the driv- er and all passengers in the vehi- cle should always wear seatbelts when the vehicle is moving. The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys- tem) airbag does not do away with the need to fasten seatbelts. In combination with the seatbelts, it offers the best combined protec- tion in case of a serious accident. Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of severe injury or death in a crash even when the ve- hicle has the SRS airbag.

«+ The SRS airbags deploy with con- siderable speed and force. Occu- pants who are out of proper posi- tion when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deployment, the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practi- cal while still maintaining full ve- hicle control and the front passen- ger should move the seat as far back as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat. Carefully read the sections “Seatbelts” and “*SRS airbag (Supplemental Re- straint System airbag)" in chapter 1 of this owners manual for instructions and pre- cautions concerning the seatbelt system and SRS airbag system.

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page $ Friday, June 17, 2005 6:37 PM HE Child safety

A WARNING + Never hold a child on your lap or in your arms while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision, because the child will be caught between the passenger and objects inside the vehicle. e While riding in the vehicle, infants and small children should always be placed in the REAR seat in an infant or child restraint system which is appropriate for the child’s age, height and weight. If a child is too big for a child restraint system, the child should sit in the REAR seat and be restrained us- ing the seatbelts. According to ac- cident statistics, children are saf- er when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Never al- low a child to stand up or kneel on the seat. + Put children aged 12 and under in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint de- vice or in a seatbelt. The SRS air- bag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or improp- erly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk being injured from deployment is greater.

THE SRS AIRBAG. Always use the child safety locks whenever a child rides in the rear seat. Serious injury could result if a child accidentally opened the door and fell out. Refer to the “Child safety locks” section in

Always lock the passenger’s win- dows using the lock switch when ren are riding in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child op- erating the power window. Refer to the “Windows” section in chap- ter 2. Never leave unattended children in the vehicle. They could acci- dentally injure themselves or oth- ers through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot or sun- ny days, temperature in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to them. Help prevent young children from locking themselves in the trunk. When leaving the vehicle, either close all windows and lock all doors or cancel the inside trunk lid release. Also make certain that the trunk is closed. On hot or sun- ny days, the temperature in a trunk could quickly become high enough to cause death or serious heat-related injuries including brain damage to anyone locked inside, particularly for small chil- dren. — CONTINUED —

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 6 Friday, June 17, 2005 6:37 PM Carefully read the sections “Child restraint systems”, “*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)", and “Seatbelts” in chapter 1 of this owner's manual for in- structions and precautions concerning the child restraint system, seatbelt system and SRS airbag system. H Engine exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) À WARNING + Never inhale engine exhaust gas. Engine exhaust gas contains car- bon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal Always properly maintain the en- gine exhaust system to prevent engine exhaust gas from entering the vehicle. Never run the engine in a closed space, such as a garage, except for the brief time needed to drive the vehicle in or out ofit.

• Avoid remaining in a parked vehi- cle for a lengthy time while the en- gine is running. f that is unavoid- able, then use the ventilation fan to force fresh air into the vehicle. Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free from snow, leaves or other obstructions to ensure that the ventilation system always works properly. If at any time you suspect that ex- haust fumes are entering the vehi- cle, have the problem checked and corrected as soon as possi- ble. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with all win- dows fully open. Keep the trunk lid or rear gate closed while driving to prevent ex- haust gas from entering the vehi- cle. B Drinking and driving AWARNING Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Alcohol in the blood- stream delays your reaction and im- pairs your perception, judgment and attentiveness. If you drive after even if you drink just a lit- ncrease the risk of being involved in a serious or fatal acci- dent, injuring or killing yourself, your passengers and others. In ad- dition, if you are injured in the acci- dent, alcohol may increase the se- verity of that injury. Please don't drink and drive. Drunken driving is one of the most fre- quent causes of accidents. Since alcohol affects all people differently, you may have consumed too much alcohol to drive safely even if the level of alcohol in your blood is below the legal limit. The safest thing you can do is never drink and drive. However if you have no choice but to drive, stop drinking and sober up com- pletely before getting behind the wheel.

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 7 Friday, June 17, 2005 6:37 PM B Drugs and driving B Driving when tired or sleepy

HE Modification of your vehicle A WARNING | [ A WARNING | [ À CAUTION | There are some drugs (over the counter and prescription) that can delay your reaction time and impair your perception, judgment and at- tentiveness. If you drive after taking them, it may increase your, your passengers’ and other persons’ risk of being involved in a serious or fa- tal accident. If you are taking any drugs, check with your doctor or pharmacist or read the liter- ature that accompanies the medication to determine if the drug you are taking can impair your driving ability. Do not drive af- ter taking any medications that can make you drowsy or otherwise affect your ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If you have a medical condition that requires you to take drugs, please consult with your doctor. Never drive if you are under the influence of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your own health and well-being, we urge you not to take illegal drugs in the first place and to seek treatment if you are addicted to those drugs. When you are tired or sleepy, your reaction will be delayed and your perception, judgment and attentive- ness will be impaired. If you drive when tired or sleepy, your, your pas- sengers’ and other persons’ chanc- es of being involved in a serious ac- cident may increase. Your vehicle should not be modi- fied. Modification could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modification may not be cov- ered under warranties. Please do not continue to drive but in- stead find a safe place to rest if you are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you should make periodic rest stops to refresh your- self before continuing on your journey. When possible, you should share the driv- ing with others. H Car phone/cell phone and driving ACAUTION Do not use a car phone/cell phone while driving; it may distract your at- tention from driving and can lead to an accident. If you use a car phone/ cell phone, pull off the road and park in a safe place before using your phone. In some States/Provinces, only hands-free phones may legally be used while driving. B Driving with pets Unrestrained pets can interfere with your driving and distract your attention from — CONTINUED —

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 8 Friday, June 17, 2005 6:37 PM driving. In a collision or sudden stop, unre- strained pets or cages can be thrown around inside the vehicle and hurt you or your passengers. Besides, the pets can be hurt under these situations. lt is also for their own safety that pets should be prop- erly restrained in your vehicle. Restrain a pet with a special traveling harness which can be secured to the rear seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier which can be secured to the rear seat by routing a seat- belt through the carrier's handle. Never re- strain pets or pet carriers in the front pas- sengers seat. For further information, consult your veterinarian, local animal protection society or pet shop. A Tire pressures Check and, if necessary, adjust the pres- sure of each tire (including the spare) at least once a month and before any long journey. Check the tire pressure when the tires are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the values shown on the tire placard. Refer to the “Tires and wheels” section in

chapter 11 for detailed information.

ei+- À WARNING Driving at high speeds with exces- sively low tire pressures can cause the tires to deform severely and to rapidly become hot. A sharp in- crease in temperature could cause tread separation, and destruction of the tires. The resulting loss of vehi- cle control could lead to an acci- dent. H California proposition 65 warning [ A WARNING Engine exhaust, some of its constit- uents, and certain vehicle compo- nents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addi- tion, certain fluids in vehicles and certain components of product wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause can- cer and birth defects or other repro- ductive harm.

= KŸ7 AI900BE-A.book Page 9 Friday, June 17, 200$ 6:37 PM

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags Keys and doors Instruments and controls Climate control Audio Interior equipment o =

Starting and operating

Driving tips In case of emergency Appearance care

Maintenance and service

Specifications Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

1 à KP AT90OBE-A book Page 11 Friday, June 17, 2005 6:37 PM

el4 _4||e KŸ7 A1900BE-A.book Page 12 Friday, June 17, 2005 6:37 PM n Ï Fr s\ à 12 Hinterior 1) Lower anchorages for child restraint system (page 1-30)

Y Passenger compartment area Front seat (page 1-2) Rear seat (page 1-6)

5) Rear window wiper and washer

1 à KP AT90OBE-A book Page 20 Friday, June 17, 2005 6:37 PM

KP AT90OBE-A book Page 22 Friday, June 17, 2005 6:37 PM

1 à KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 23 Friday, June 17, 2005 6:37 PM

A Tire changing tools

KT AT90OBE-A.book Page 1 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM Front seats Fore and aft adjustment . Reclining the seatback Seat cushion height adjustment (driver’s seat) Head restraint adjustment (if equipped) . Active head restraint (if equipped) Seat heater (if equipped) Rear seats … Armrest (if equipped) Head restraint adjustment - Wagon Folding down the rear seat - Wagon Seatbelts Seatbelt safety tips Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) … Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (AIELR) … Seatbelt warning light and chime Fastening the seatbelt . Seatbelt maintenance Seatbelt extender … Front seatbelt pretensioners System monitors System servicing Precautions against vehicle modification . Child restraint systems . Where to place a child restraint system . Choosing a child restraint system … Installing child restraint systems with A/ELR seatbelt …

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags Installing a booster seat . Installation of child restraint systems by use o! lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) . Top tether anchorages … *SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) Vehicle driver’s and front passenger’s SR: airbags and lap/shoulder restraints Subaru advanced frontal airbag system SRS side airbag …... SRS airbag system monitors SRS airbag system servicing Precautions against vehicle modification

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 2 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

1-2 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags Front seats

À WARNING «+ Never adjust the seat while driv- ing to avoid the possibility of loss of vehicle control and of personal injury. Before adjusting the seat, make sure the hands and feet of rear seat passengers are clear of the adjusting mechanism. Seatbelts provide maximum re- straint when the occupant sits well back and upright in the seat. To reduce the risk of sliding under the seatbelt in a collision, the front seatbacks should be always used in the upright position while the vehicle is running. If the front seatbacks are not used in the up- right position in a collision, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death. ° The SRS airbags deploy with con- siderable speed and force. Occu- pants who are out of proper posi- tion when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deployment, the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practi- cal while still maintaining full ve- hicle control and the front passen- ger should move the seat as far back as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat. À WARNING

Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or improperly restrained. Because chil- dren are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater. Conse- quently, we strongly recommend that ALL children (including those in child seats and those that have out- grown child restraint devices) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is appro- priate for the child’s age, height and weight. Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward facing child seat) in the REAR seats at all times.

KT AT90OBE-A book Page 3 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly re- strained in the rear seating posi- tions than in the front seating posi- tions. For instructions and precau- tions concerning child restraint sys- tems, see the “Child restraint sys- tems” section in this chapter. H Fore and aft adjustment Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to the desired position. Then release the le- ver and move the seat back and forth to make sure that it is securely locked into place. BH Reclining the seatback

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-3

Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the seatback to the desired position. Then re- lease the lever and make sure the seat- back is securely locked into place. The seatback placed in a reclined position can spring back upward with force when released. When operating the reclining le- ver to return the seatback, hold it lightly so that it may be raised back gradually. À WARNING To prevent the passenger from slid- ing under the seatbelt in the event of a collision, always put the seatback in the upright position while the ve- hicle is in motion. Also, do not place objects such as cushions between the passenger and the seatback. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and ofthe lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will il and both can result in serious inter- nal injury or death. — CONTINUED —

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 4 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

1-4 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags H Seat cushion height adjust- ment (driver’s seat) M Head restraint adjustment (if equipped) M Active head restraint (if equipped)

1) When the lever is pushed down, the seat

2) When the lever is pulled up, the seat ris-

es. The height of the seat can be adjusted by moving the seat cushion adjustment lever up and down. To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, push the head restraint down while pressing the release button on the top of the seatback. The head restraint should be adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is clos- est to the top of the occupant's ears. A WARNING Never drive the vehicle with the head restraints removed because they are designed to reduce the risk of serious neck injury in the event that the vehicle is struck from the rear.

The front seats of your vehicle are equipped with active head restraints. They automatically tilt forward slightly in the event the vehicle is struck from the rear, decreasing the amount of rearward head movement and thus reducing the risk of whiplash. For maximum effectiveness the head restraint should be adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of the occupant's ears.

d di|æ KŸ7 A1900BE-A.book Page 5 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM n 41 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-5 À CAUTION | Seat heater (if equipped) + Each active head restraint is ef- fective only when its height is properly adjusted and driver/pas- senger sits in the correct position on the seat. + If your vehicle is involved in a rear-end collision, have an autho- rized SUBARU dealer inspect the active head restraints. + The active head restraints may & / & not operate in the event the vehi- 21 LT 1 Front passenger's side cle experiences only a slight im- 100684 1) HI- Rapid heating pact in the rear. Drivers side 2) LO - Normal heating e The active head restraints may be 1) HI- Rapid heating The seat heater operates when the igni- damaged if they are pushed hard 2) LO — Normal heating tion switch is either in the “ACC” or “ON” from behind or subjected to position. shock. As a result, they may not function if the vehicle suffers a To turn on the seat heater, push the “LO” rear impact. or “HI” position on the switch, as desired, depending on the temperature. Selecting the “HI” position will cause the seat to heat up quicker. The indicator located on the switch comes on when the seat heater is in operation. When the vehicle's interior is warmed enough or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch off.

1-6 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags À CAUTION ] | Rear seats

+ There is a possibility that people

with delicate skin may suffer slight burns even at low tempera- tures if he/she uses the seat heat- er for a long period of time. When using the heater, always be sure to warn the persons concerned. Do not put anything on the seat which insulates against heat, such as a blanket, cushion, or similar items. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. 100093 [ À WARNING & NOTE 4 Never stack luggage or other cargo Use of the seat heater for a long period A WARNING | higher than the top of the seatback of time while the engine is not running Seatbelts provide maximum re- because it could tumble forward and can cause battery discharge. straint when the occupant sits well injure passengers in the event of a back and upright in the seat. Do not sudden stop or accident. put cushions or any other materials between occupants and seatbacks or seat cushions. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the ab- domen will increase, and both can ious internal injury or et. + “til

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 7 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM BH Armrest (if equipped)

To lower the armrest, pull on the top edge ofthe armrest. A WARNING | To avoid the possibility of serious injury, passengers must never be al- lowed to sit on the center armrest while the vehicle is in motion. Y Loading long objects Folding down the armrest and opening the seatback panel affords a loading space for long objects. To open the seatback panel, pull the re- lease tab. [ A WARNING | ° Secure long objects properly to prevent them from shooting for- ward and causing serious injury during a sudden stop or sharp cornering. Tie long objects down with a rope or something equiva- lent.

—+1® Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-7 + Avoid loading objects longer than

6.6 ft (2 m) and heavier than 55 lbs

(25 kg). Such objects can interfere with the driver’s proper operation of the vehicle, possibly causing an accident and serious injury.

Æ Head restraint adjustment - Wagon [ A WARNING Never drive the vehicle with the head restraints removed because they are designed to reduce the risk of serious neck injury in the event that the vehicle is struck from the rear. — CONTINUED —

d di|æ KŸ7 A1900BE-A.book Page 8 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM n 41 1-8 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags H Folding down the rear seat — Wagon AWARNING + After returning the rear seat to its original position, be certain to place all of the seatbelts and the tab attached to the seat cushion above the seat cushion. And make certain that the shoulder belts are so00es Tartes fully visible. Never allow passengers to ride on the folded rear seatback or in the cargo area. Doing so may result in serious injury or death. To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, push the head restraint down | To lower it, push the head restraint down while pressing the release button on the | while pressing the release button on the top of the seatback. top of the seatback. . The head restraint should be adjusted so . … * Secure lengthy items properly to that the center ofthe head restraintis clos- | VVhen the rear-center seating position is prevent them from shooting for- est to the top of the occupant's ears. occupied, raise the head restraint to the ward and causing serious injury When the seats are not occupied, lower | Click position. When the rear center seat- during a sudden stop. the head restraints to improve rearward | in9 position is not occupied, lower the visibility. head restraint to improve rearward visibil- ity. Y Rear center seating position AÀCAUTION The head restraint is not intended to be used at the lowest position. Be- fore sitting on the seat, raise the head restraint to the click position. et +

1. Lower the head restraints.

2. Unlock the seatback by pulling the re-

lease knob and then fold the seatback down. To return the seatback to its original posi- tion, raise the seatback until it locks into place and make sure that it is securely locked.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-9 Seatbelts H Seatbelt safety tips À WARNING + All persons in the vehicle should fasten their seatbelts BEFORE the vehicle starts to move. Otherwise, the possibility of serious injury becomes greater in the event of a sudden stop or accident. All belts should fit snugly in order to provide full restraint. Loose fit- ting belts are not as effective in preventing or reducing injury. Each seatbelt is designed to sup- port only one person. Never use a single belt for two or more per- sons — even children. Otherwise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result. Replace all seatbelt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware worn by occupants of a vehicle that has been in a serious accident. The entire assembly should be replaced even if dam- age is not obvious. — CONTINUED —

KP AI9OOBE-A book Page 10 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 1-10 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

• Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag de- ploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or improperly re- strained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from de- ployment is greater. Consequent- ly, we strongly recommend that ALL children (including those in child seats and those that have outgrown child restraint devices) sit in the REAR seat properly re- strained at all times in a child re- straint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is appropriate for the child’s height and weight. Secure ALL types of child re- straint devices (including forward facing child seats) in the REAR seats at all times.

THE SRS AIRBAG. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly the rear seating posi- the front seating po- sitions. For instructions and pre- cautions concerning the cl re- straint system, see the “CI re- straint systems” section in this chapter. Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module, which will record the use of the seatbelt(s) by the driver and front passenger when any of the SRS frontal and side airbags deploys. Y Infants or small children Use a child restraint system that is suit- able for your vehicle. See information on “Child restraint systems” in this chapter. Y Children If a child is too big for a child restraint sys- tem, the child should sit in the rear seat and be restrained using the seatbelts. Ac-

cording to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the seat. If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses the face or neck, adjust the shoulder belt anchor height (window-side seating posi- tions only) and then if necessary move the child closer to the belt buckle to help pro- vide a good shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to securely place the lap belt as low as possible on the hips and not on the child's waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt cannot be properly positioned, a child restraint system should be used. Never place the shoulder belt under the child's arm or behind the child’s back.

1 à KP AT90OBE-A book Page 11 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

Expectant mothers also need to use the seatbelts. They should consult their doctor for specific recommendations. The lap belt should be worn securely and as low as possible over the hips, not over the waist. M Emergency Locking Retrac- tor (ELR) The driver's seatbelt has an Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR). The emergency locking retractor allows normal body movement but the retractor locks automatically during a sudden stop, impact or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor. H Automatic/Emergency Lock- ing Retractor (A/ELR) Each passenger's seatbelt has an Auto- matic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ ELR). The Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor normally functions as an Emer- gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The A/ ELR has an additional locking mode “Au- tomatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode” in- tended to secure a child restraint system. When the seatbelt is once drawn out com- pletely and is then retracted even slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in that po- sition and the seatbelt cannot be extend- ed. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indicate the retractor func- tions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is re- tracted fully, the ALR mode is released. When securing a child restraint system on the rear seats by the use of the seatbelt, the seatbelt must be changed over to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode. When the child restraint system is re- moved, make sure that the seatbelt re- tracts fully and the retractor returned to the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode. For instructions on how to convert the re- tractor to the ALR mode and restore it to the ELR mode, see the “Child restraint

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-11 systems” section in this chapter. H Seatbelt warning light À and chime A Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt warning device at the driver's seat, as re- quired by current safety standards. There is a seatbelt warning light in the combina- tion meter. If the driver has not yet fastened the seat- belt when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, the seatbelt warning light will flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the seatbelt is unfastened. If the drivers seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will also sound simultaneously. If the drivers seatbelt is still not fastened 6 seconds later, the warning light will re- main lit for 15 seconds. lf the driver's seat- belt is still not fastened even 15 seconds later (21 seconds after turning ON the ig- nition switch), the warning lights will alter- nate between flashing and steady illumi- nation at 15-second intervals, and the chime will sound while the warning light is flashing. Alternate flashing and steady illumination of the warning lights and sounding of the chime will continue until the driver fastens the seatbelt. — CONTINUED — nil

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 12 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 1-12 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags NOTE + Ifthe driver unfastens the seatbelt af- ter fastening, the seatbelt warning de- vice operates as follows according to the vehicle speed. + At speeds lower than approximate- ly 9 mph (15 km/h) The warning light will alternate be- tween flashing and steady illumina- tion at 15-second intervals. The chime will not sound. + At speeds higher than approxi- mately 9 mph (15 km/h) The warning light will alternate be- tween flashing and steady illumina- tion at 15-second intervals and the chime will sound while the warning light is flashing. + Itis possible to cancel the warning operation that follows the 6-second warning after turning ON the ignition switch by unfastening and refastening the driver’s seatbelt. When the ignition switch is turned ON next time, howev- er, the complete sequence of the warn- ing operation resumes. For further de- tails about canceling the warning oper- ation, please contact your SUBARU dealer.

H Fastening the seatbelt A WARNING Never use a belt that is twisted or reversed. In an accident, this can increase the risk or severity of in- jury. Keep the lap belt as low as possi- ble on your hips. In a collision, this spreads the force of the lap belt over stronger hip bones in- stead of across the weaker abdo- men. Seatbelts provide maximum re- straint when the occupant sits well back and upright in the seat. To reduce the risk of sliding under the seatbelt in a collision, the front seatbacks should be always used in the upright position while the vehicle is running. If the front seatbacks are not use the up- right position in a collision, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death. + Do not put cushions or any other materials between occupants and seatbacks or seat cushions. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt slidi: up over the abdomen wi crease, and both can result in se- rious internal injury or death.

A WARNING Never place the shoulder belt under the arm or behind the back. If an ac- cident occurs, this can increase the risk or severity of il

e||4… KŸ7 AI900BE-A.book Page 13 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

ÂCAUTION Metallic parts of the seatbelt can be- come very hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn an occupant. Do not touch such hot parts until they cool. Y Front seatbelts

1. Adjust the seat position:

Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the upright position. Move the seatback as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control. Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat- back to the upright position. Move the seat as far back as possible.

2. Sit well back in the seat.

3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the

belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If the belt stops before reaching the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.

4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

6. Place the lap belt as low as possible on

your hips, not on your waist.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-13 V Adjusting the front seat shoulder belt anchor height

The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best suited for the driver/front passenger. To lower the anchor height, push the re- lease button and slide the anchor down. To raise the anchor height, slide the an- chor up. Pull down on the anchor to make sure that it is locked in place. Always adjust the anchor height so that the shoulder belt passes over the middle of the shoulder without touching the neck. — CONTINUED — nil

e||4… KŸ7 AI900BE-A.book Page 14 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

1-14 seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags [ A WARNING When wearing the seatbelts, make sure the shoulder portion of the webbing does not pass over your neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt anchor to a lower position. Placing the shoulder belt over the neck may result in neck injury during sudden braking or in a collision. V Unfastening the seatbelt

Push the button on the buckle. Before closing the door, make sure that the belts are retracted properly to avoid catching the belt webbing in the door. Y Rear seatbelts (except rear center seatbelt on Wagon)

1. Sit well back in the seat.

2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the

belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If the belt stops before reaching the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after giving a strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly again.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

5. Place the lap belt as low as possible on

your hips, not on your waist.

d di|æ #7 A1900BE-A.book Page 15 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM n 41 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-15 V Adjusting the rear seat shoulder belt Y Rear center seatbelt on Wagon anchor height (window-side seating A ARNING When wearing the seatbelts, make sure the shoulder portion of the Il webbing does not pass over your il neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt | anchor to a lower position. Placing | the shoulder belt over the neck may result in neck injury during sudden braking or in a collision. V Unfastening the seatbelt

1) Center seatbelt tongue plate

4) Center seatbelt buckle

The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best suited for you. To adjust the anchor height, push the release button and slide the anchor up or down. Pull down on the anchor to make sure that it is locked in place. Always adjust the anchor height so that the shoulder belt passes over the middle of the shoulder without touching the neck.

Push the button on the buckle. Before closing the door, make sure that the belts are retracted properly to avoid catching the belt webbing in the door.

1-16 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

KP AT90OBE-A book Page 16 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM [ A WARNING [ A WARNING Fastening the seatbelt with the web- bing twisted can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. When fastening the belt after it is pulled out from the retractor, espe- cially when inserting the connec- tor's tongue plate into the mating buckle (on right-hand side), always check that the webbing is not twist- ed. Be sure to fasten both tongue plates to the respective buckles. If the seatbelt is used only as a shoulder belt (with the connector’s tongue plate not fastened to the connec- tor’s buckle on the right-hand side), it cannot properly restrain the wear- er in position in an accident, possi- bly resulting in serious injury or death.

1. Remove the tongue plate from the belt

holder located under the right rear quarter glass and pull out the seatbelt slowly.

2. After drawing out the seatbelt, pass it

through the belt guide as follows: First in- sert one edge of the belt into the open gap in the comfort guide; then slide the rest of the belt in, so that the whole belt fits in- side.

1 à KP AT90OBE-A book Page 17 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

3. After confirming that the webbing is not

twisted, insert the connector (tongue) at- tached at the webbing end into the buckle on the right-hand side until a click is heard. If the belt stops before reaching the buck- le, return the belt slightly and pull it out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be un- locked, let the belt retract slightly after giv- ing it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.

in the center seatbelt buckle marked “CENTER” on the left-hand side until it clicks.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

6. Place the lap belt as low as possible on

your hips, not on your waist. V Unfastening the seatbelt AI LT 100116

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-17 Push the release button of the center seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to unfasten the seatbelt. NOTE When the seatback is folded down for greater cargo area, it is necessary to disconnect the connector.

1 à KP AT9OOBE-A book Page 18 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 1-18 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

ject into the slot in the connector (buckle) on the right-hand side and push it in, and the connector (tongue) plate will discon- nect from the buckle.

You should hold the webbing end and guide it back into the retractor while it is rolling up. Insert the tongue plate into the belt holder.

[ Â CAUTION | + Do not allow the retractor to roll up the seatbelt too quickly. Other- wise, the metal tongue plates may hit against the trim, resulting in damaged trim. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up so that the tongue plates are neat- ly stored. A hanging tongue plate can swing and hit against the trim during driving, causing damage to the trim.

2. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt.

H Seatbelt maintenance To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap and lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye the belts because this could seriously af- fect their strength. Inspect the seatbelts and attachments in- cluding the webbing and all hardware pe- riodically for cracks, cuts, gashes, tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas. Re- place the seatbelts even if only minor damage is found. [ À CAUTION + Keep the belts free of polishes, oils, chemicals and particularly battery acid. + Never attempt to make modifica- tions or changes that will prevent the seatbelt from operating prop- erly.

KP AT90OBE-A book Page 19 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM Seatbelt extender If the front seatbelts are not long enough to permit the tongue plate to engage with the seatbelt buckle, an optional seatbelt extender is available from your SUBARU dealer. When ordering an extender, only order one particularly designed for your vehicle. Several different types of extend- ers are available to match various variet- ies of front seatbelt designs. See your SUBARU dealer for assistance. The extender adds approximately 8 inch- es (200 mm) of length and it can be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position. For the safety of others, the extender should be removed after each use, espe- cially if the next person using the seatbelt does not need one. Note that leaving the seatbelt extender's tongue plate engaged with the seatbelt buckle may prevent the Subaru advanced front airbag system from functioning cor- rectly or cause the system to fail. À WARNING Be sure to observe the following when using the seatbelt extender. Failure to follow these instructions and warnings could reduce the ef- fectiveness of the seatbelt and re- sult in more serious injury in the event of a collision. + Never use the extender when the belt itself is long enough to permit it to be buckled properly. If remov- al of heavy clothing is all that is needed to permit the seatbelt to be buckled properly, remove the heavy clothing and do not use the extender. Do not use the extender if the buckle of the extender rests over the abdomen. Do not let someone else use the extender. Use of an extender when it is not needed could re- duce the effectiveness of the seat- belt and result in more serious in- jury in the event of a collision. Use the extender only for the front seatbelts and only for the model for which it was originally provid- ed. Never use the extender for the rear seatbelts or for a different model. NOTE When the seatbelt extender is used by

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-19 a pregnant passenger, consult a doctor to get approval in advance.

To connect the extender to the seatbelt, insert the tongue plate into the seatbelt buckle so that the “PRESS” signs on the buckle-release buttons of the extender and the seatbelt are both facing outward as shown in the diagram. You will hear a click when the tongue plate locks into the buckle. When releasing the seatbelt, press on the buckle-release button on the extender, not on the seatbelt. This helps to prevent damage to the vehicle interior and extend- er itself.

KP AT90OBE-A book Page 20 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 1-20 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags Front seatbelt pretensioners

The driver's and front passenger's seat- belts have a seatbelt pretensioner. The seatbelt pretensioners are designed to be activated in the event of an accident in- volving a moderate to severe frontal colli- sion. The pretensioner sensor also serves as the frontal SRS airbag sensor. If the sen- sor detects a certain predetermined amount of force during a frontal collision, the front seatbelt is quickly drawn back in by the retractor to take up the slack so that the belt more effectively restrains the front seat occupant. When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,

an operating noise will be heard and a small amount of smoke will be released. These occurrences are normal and not harmful. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle. Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been activated, the seatbelt retractor remains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can not be pulled out and retracted and there- fore must be replaced. NOTE + Seatbelt pretensioners are not de- signed to activate in minor frontal im- pacts, in side or rear impacts or in roll- over accidents. + The driver's seat and passenger's seat pretensioners and frontal SRS air- bag operate simultaneously. + Pretensioners are designed to func- tion on a one-time-only basis. In the event that a pretensioner is activated, both the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt retractor assemblies must be replaced only by an authorized SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat- belt retractor assemblies, use only genuine SUBARU parts. + If either front seatbelt does not re- tract or cannot be pulled out due to a malfunction or activation of the preten- sioner, contact your SUBARU dealer as

Soon as possible. + If the front seatbelt retractor assem- bly or surrounding area has been dam- aged, contact your SUBARU dealer as Soon as possible. + When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to explain to the buyer that it has seatbelt pretensioners by alerting him to the contents of this section. À WARNING

• To obtain maximum protection, the occupants should sit in an up- right position with their seatbelts properly fastened. Refer to the “Seatbelts” section in this chap- ter. Do not modify, remove or strike the front seatbelt retractor assem. blies or surrounding area. This could result in accidental activa- tion of the seatbelt pretensioners or could make the system inoper- ative, possibly resulting in seri- ous injury. Seatbelt pretensioners have no user-serviceable parts. For required servicing of front seatbelt retractors equipped with seatbelt pretensioners, see your nearest SUBARU dealer.

KT AT90OBE-A book Page 21 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM + When discarding front seatbelt re- tractor assemblies or scrapping the entire vehicle due to collision damage or for other reasons, con- sult your SUBARU dealer. HE System monitors

A diagnostic system continually monitors the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner while the vehicle is being driven. The seat- belt pretensioners share the control mod- ule with the SRS airbag system. There- fore, if any malfunction occurs in a seat- belt pretensioner, the SRS airbag system warning light will iluminate. The SRS air- bag system warning light will show normal system operation by lighting for approxi- mately 6 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position. The following components are monitored by the indicator: + Front sub sensor (Right-hand side) + Front sub sensor (Left-hand side) + Airbag control module (including impact sensors) + Frontal airbag module (Driver's side) + Frontal airbag module (Front passen- ger's side) + Side airbag sensor (Center pillar right hand side) + Side airbag sensor (Center pillar left hand side) + Side airbag module (Driver's side) + Side airbag module (Front passengers side) + Seatbelt pretensioner (Driver's side) + Seatbelt pretensioner (Front passen- ger's side) + Seatbelt buckle switch (Driver's side) + Seatbelt buckle switch (Front passen- ger's side) + Driver's seat position sensor + Front passenger's seatbelt tension sen- sor e Front passenger's occupant detection system weight sensor + Front passenger's occupant detection control module + Front passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF indicator

—+1® Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-21 + All related wiring [ A WARNING | If the warning light exhibits any of the following conditions, there may be a malfunction in the seatbelt pre- tensioners and/or SRS airbag sys- tem. immediately take your vehicle to your nearest SUBARU dealer to have the system checked. Unless checked and properly repaired, the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbag will not operate properly in the event of a collision, which may increase the risk of injury. Flashing or flickering of the i cator light No illumination of the warning ht when the ignition switch is first turned to the “ON” position Continuous illumination of the warning light Illumination of the warning light while driving — CONTINUED —

1-22 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags HE System servicing

KP AT9OOBE-A book Page 22 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM [ À CAUTION [ A WARNING + When discarding a seatbelt retrac- tor assembly or scrapping the en- tire vehicle damaged by a colli- sion, consult your SUBARU deal- er. Tampering with or disconnecting the system's ng could result in accidental activation of the seat- belt pretensioner and/or SRS air- The front sub sensors are located in both front fenders and the SRS air- bag control module including the impact sensors is located under the center console. If you need service or repair in those areas or near the front seatbelt retractors, we recom- mend that you have an authorized SUBARU dealer perform the work. NOTE

• Attachment of any equipment (bush bar, winches, snow plow, skid plate, etc.) other than genu- ine SUBARU accessory parts to the front end. Modification of the suspension system or front end structure. Installation of a tire of different size and construction from the tires specified on the vehicle plac- ard attached to the driver’s door pillar or specified for individual bag or could make the system in- If the front part of the vehicle is dam- vehicle models in this Owner’s À operative, which may result in se- aged in an accident to the extent that Manual. N 72 rious injury. The wiring harnesses the seatbelt pretensioner does not op- of the seatbelt pretensioner and erate, contact your SUBARU dealer as SRS airbag systems are covered Soon as possible. with yellow insulation and the connectors of the system are yel- H Precautions against vehicle low fr say identification. Do not modification use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the seatbelt Always consult your SUBARU dealer if pretensioner and SRS airbag sys- you want to install any accessory parts to tems. For required servicing of your vehicle. the seatbelt pretensioner, see your nearest SUBARU dealer. ÂCAUTION Do not perform any of the following modifications. Such modifications can interfere with proper operation of the seatbelt pretensioners. LA SA

e||4… KŸ7 AI900BE-A.book Page 23 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

Child restraint systems

Infants and small children should always be placed in an infant or child restraint system in the rear seat while riding in the vehicle. You should use an infant or child restraint system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canada Mo- tor Vehicle Safety Standards, is compati- ble with your vehicle and is appropriate for the child's age and size. All child restraint systems are designed to be secured in ve- hicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt por- tion of a lap/shoulder belt (except those covered under the section in this manual, entitled “Installation of child restraint sys- tems by use of lower and tether anchorag- es (LATCH)"). Children could be endangered in an acci- dent if their child restraints are not proper- ly secured in the vehicle. When installing the child restraint system, carefully follow the manufacturer’s instructions. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. All U.S. states and Canadian provinces require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint system at all times while the vehicle is moving.

—+1® Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-23 A WARNING | Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap or in his or her arms while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision, because the child will be caught between the passenger and objects inside the vehicle. Additionally, holding a child in your lap or arms in the front seat exposes that child to another serious danger. Since the SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force, the child could be injured or even killed.

KP AT90OBE-A book Page 24 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

1-24 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags [ A WARNING | Children should be properly re- strained at all times. Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on any seat. Unrestrained children will be thrown forward during sudden stop or in an accident and can be injured seriously. Additionally, children standing up or kneeling on or in front of the front seat are exposed another serious danger. Since the SRS airbag de- ploys with considerable speed and force, the child could be injured or even killed. HE Where to place a child re- straint system The following are SUBARU's recommen- dations on where to place a child restraint system in your vehicle.

A: Front passenger's seat You should not install a child restraint sys- tem (including a booster seat) due to the hazard to children posed by the passen- ger's airbag. B: Rear seat, window-side seating po- sitions Recommended positions for all types of child restraint systems. In these positions, Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR) seatbelts and lower anchorages (bars) are provided for installing a child restraint system. Some types of child restraints might not be able to be secured firmly due to projec- tion of the seat cushion. In this seating position, you should use only a child restraint system that has a

bottom base that fits snugly against the contours of the seat cushion and can be securely retained using the seatbelt. C: Rear seat, center seating position Installing a child restraint system is not recommended, although the A/ELR seat- belt and an upper anchorage (tether an- chorage) are provided in this position. Some types of child restraints might not be able to be secured firmly due to projec- tion of the seat cushion. In this seating position, you should use only a child restraint system that has a bottom base that fits snugly against the contours of the seat cushion and can be securely retained using the seatbelt. If it is unavoidable to install a child re- straint system in the rear seat's center seating position, lower the center head re- straint to the lowest position and install the child restraint system by correctly passing the rear center seatbelt through the belt guide.

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 25 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM À WARNING Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or improperly restrained. Because chil- dren are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater. For that reason, be sure to secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward facing child seats) in the REAR seats at all times. You should choose a restraint de- vice which is appropriate for the child’s age, height and weight. Ac- cording to accident statistics, chil- dren are safer when properly re- strained in the rear seating posi- tions than in the front seating posi- tions.

À WARNING —+1® Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-25 Æ Choosing a child restraint system

AIRBAG. Choose a child restraint system that is ap- propriate for the child's age and size (weight and height) in order to provide the child with proper protection. The child re- straint system should meet all applicable requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards for the United States or of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- dards for Canada. It can be identified by looking for the label on the child restraint system or the manufacturer's statement of compliance in the document attached to the system. Also it is important for you to make sure that the child restraint system is compati- ble with the vehicle in which it will be used. — CONTINUED —

KT AT90OBE-A book Page 26 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 1-26 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags —+1® [1 Installing child restraint Sys- ing the instructions provided by its manu- tems with A/ELR seatbelt ACAUTION facturer. . When you install a child restraint 3. green pe ae plate into the buckle system, follow the manufacturer's until you hear a click. AWARNING instructions supplied with it. After ° Child restraint systems and seat- installing the child restraint system, belts can become hot in a vehicle check to ensure that it is held se- <e_ that has been closed up in sunny curely in position. If it is not held f weather; they could burn a small tight and secure, the danger of your child. Check the child restraint child suffering personal injury in the system before you place a child in event of an accident may be in- it. creased.

• Do not leave an unsecured child | | w Installing a rearward facing child re- restraint system in your vehicle. straint A Unsecured child restraint sys- SP tems can be thrown around inside 100609 of the vehicle in a sudden stop, - turn or accident; they can strike 4. Take up the slack in the lap belt. and injure vehicle occupants as 5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the re- well as result in serious injuries or tractor to change the retractor over from death to the child. the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, V clicks will be heard which indicate the re- + tractor functions as ALR.

1. Place the child restraint system in the

rear seating position.

2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the child restraint system follow- > PS > SA

6. Push and pull the child restraint system

forward and from side to side to check if it is firmly secured. Sometimes a child re- straint can be more firmly secured by pushing it down into the seat cushion and then tightening the seatbelt.

7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt

to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR properly functioning).

8. To remove the child restraint system,

press the release button on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt to retract com- pletely. The belt will return to the ELR mode. [ A WARNING |

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG. NOTE When the child restraint system is no longer in use, remove it and restore the

—+1® Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-27 ELR function of the retractor. That function is restored by allowing the seatbelt to retract fully. Y Installing forward facing child re- straint

1. Place the child restraint system in the

rear seating position.

2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the child restraint system follow- ing the instructions provided by its manu- facturer.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click. — CONTINUED —

e||4… KŸ7 AI900BE-A.book Page 28 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

1-28 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.

5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the re-

tractor to change the retractor over from the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indicate the re- tractor functions as ALR.

6. Before having a child sit in the child re-

straint system, move it back and forth and right and left to check ifit is firmly secured. Sometimes a child restraint can be more firmly secured by pushing it down into the seat cushion and then tightening the seat- bel.

7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt

to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR properly functioning). Wagon

8. lfthe child restraint system requires a

top tether, latch the hook onto the top teth- nil

d di|æ (#7 A1900BE-A.book Page 29 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM n 41 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-29 er anchor and tighten the top tether. See | M Installing a booster seat the “Top tether anchorages” Tor additional 9 ÂCAUTION | instructions. A WARNING | When you install a child restraint system, follow the manufacturer’s + Child restraint systems and seat- instructions supplied with it. After belts can become hot in a vehicle installing the child restraint system, that has been closed up in sunny check to ensure that it is held se- weather; they could burn a small curely in position. If it is not held child. Check the child restraint tight and secure, the danger of your system before you place a child in child suffering personal injury in the it. event of an accident may be in- Do not leave an unsecured child creased. restraint system in your vehicle. Unsecured child restraint sys- 100611 tems can be thrown around inside

NS 22 of the vehicle in a sudden stop,

9. To remove the child restraint system, turn accident; they can strike

press the release button on the seatbelt and injure vehicle occupants as buckle and allow the belt to retract com- well as result in serious injuries or pletely. The belt will return to the ELR death to the child. mode. NOTE When the child restraint system is no longer in use, remove it and restore the 400141 ELR function of the retractor. That function is restored by allowing the 1. Place the booster seat in the rear seat- seatbelt to retract fully. ing position and sit the child on it. The child should sit well back on the booster seat.

2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the booster seat and the child & — CONTINUED - À et. + “til

KT AT90OBE-A book Page 30 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 1-30 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags following the instructions provided by its manufacturer.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click. Take care not to twist the seatbelt. Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of child's shoulder and that the lap belt is positioned as low as possible on the child's hips.

release button on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt to retract. [ A WARNING + Never use a belt that is twisted or reversed. In an accident, this can increase the risk or severity of in- jury to the child.

+ Never place the shoulder belt un- der the child’s arm or behind the child’s back. lf an accident oc- curs, this can increase the risk or severity of injury to the child. The seatbelt should fit snugly in order to provide full restraint. Loose fitting belts are not as ef- fective in preventing or reducing injury. Place the lap belt as low as possi- ble on the child’s hips. A high-po- oned lap belt will increase the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen, and both can result in serious internal injury or death. Make sure the shoulder belt is po- ioned across the center of child's shoulder. Placing the shoulder belt over the neck may result in neck injury during sud- den braking or in a collision. installation of child restraint systems by use of lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) AWARNING ° Child restraint systems and seat- belts can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check the child restraint system before you place a child in it. Do not leave an unsecured child restraint system in your vehicle. Unsecured child restraint sys- tems can be thrown around inside of the vehicle in a sudden stop, turn or accident; they can strike and injure vehicle occupants as well as result in serious injuries or death to the child. —||e

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page 31 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

ÂCAUTION When you install a child restraint system, follow the manufacturer's instructions supplied with it. After installing the child restraint system, check to ensure tha held se- curely in position. If not held tight and secure, the danger of your child suffering personal injury in the event of an accident may be in- creased.

Some types of child restraint systems can be installed on the rear seat of your vehi- cle without use of the seatbelts. Such child restraint systems are secured to the des- ignated anchorages provided on the vehi- cle body. The lower and tether anchorag- es are sometimes referred to as the LATCH system (Lower Anchors and Teth- ers for Children). Your vehicle is equipped with four lower anchorages (bars) and three upper an- chorages (tether anchorages) for accom- modating such child restraint systems.

The lower anchorages (bars) are used for installing a child restraint system only on the rear seat window-side seating posi- tions. For each window-side seating posi- tion, two lower anchorages are provided. Each lower anchorage is located where the seat cushion meets the seatback.

—+1® Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-31

The tether anchorages (upper anchorag- es) are provided for all the seating posi- tions (middle and both window-side ones) ofthe rear seat.

You will find marks “ © ”’atthe bottom of the rear seat seatbacks. These marks in- — CONTINUED — nil

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page 32 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

1-32 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags dicate the positions of the lower anchorag- es (bars).

Each lower anchorage is located where the seat cushion meets the seatback.

1. Use the “ © ” marks to locate the two

lower anchorages (bars) for the position where you want to install the child restraint system.

2. While following the instructions sup-

plied by the child restraint system manu- facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the lower anchorages located at “ "marks on the bottom of the rear seatback. When the hooks are connected, make sure the adjacent seatbelts are not caught.

3. [If your child restraint system is of a

flexible attachment type (which uses teth- er belts to connect the child restraint sys- tem properly to the lower anchorages)] While pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion, pull both left and right lower tether belts up to secure the child restraint system firmly by taking up the slack in the bel.

4. Connect the top tether hook to the teth-

er anchorage and firmly tighten the tether. For information on how to set the top teth- er, read the following “Top tether anchor- ages”.

1 à KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 33 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

5. Before seating a child in the child re-

straint system, try to move seat back and forth and right and left to verify that it is held securely in position.

6. To remove the child restraint system,

follow the reverse procedures of installa- tion. If you have any question concerning this type of child restraint system, ask your SUBARU dealer. Top tether anchorages Your vehicle is equipped with three top tether anchorages so that a child restraint system having a top tether can be in- stalled in the rear seat. When installing a child restraint system using top tether, proceed as follows, while observing the in- structions by the child restraint system manufacture. Since a top tether can provide additional stability by offering another connection between a child restraint system and the vehicle, we recommend that you use a top tether whenever one is required or avail- able. —+1® Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-33 Y Anchorage location V Sedan

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page 34 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

1-34 seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags Three upper anchorages are installed on the rear shelf behind the rear seat. V Wagon

There is an anchorage for the center seat- ing position at the rear edge of the roof, and anchorages for each of the two win- dow-side seating positions on the rear wall of the cargo area. Y To hook the top tether V Sedan

1. Attach the child restraint top tether

hook to the appropriate upper anchorage.

2. Tighten the top tether securely.

Please contact your SUBARU dealer if you have any question regarding the in- stallation of a child restraint system.

1. Remove the headrest at the window-

side seating position where the child re- straint system has been installed with the lower anchorages or seatbelt; lift up the headrest while pressing the release but- ton. Store the headrest in the cargo area. Avoid placing the headrest in the passen- ger compartment to prevent it from being thrown around in the passenger compart- ment in a sudden stop or a sharp turn.

2. (For both window-side seating posi-

tions) Remove the cap from the anchor fit- ting cover by prying it with a screwdriver.

3. Attach the child restraint top tether

hook to the appropriate upper anchorage.

4. Tighten the top tether securely.

Please contact your SUBARU dealer if you have any question regarding the in- stallation of a child restraint system. À CAUTION ] Always remove the headrest when mounting a child restraint system with a top tether. Otherwise, the top tether cannot be fastened tightly.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-35 *SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) *SRS: This stands for supplemental re- straint system. This name is used be- cause the airbag system supplements the vehicle's seatbelts. Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module, which will record the use of the seatbelt(s) by the driver and front passenger when any of the SRS frontal and side airbags deploys. B Vehicle with driver’s and front passenger’s SRS air- bags and lap/shoulder re- straints Your vehicle is equipped with a supple- mental restraint system in addition to a lap/shoulder belt at each front seating po- sition. The supplemental restraint system (SRS) consists of two airbags (driver's and front passenger's frontal airbags) or four air- bags (driver's and front passenger's fron- tal airbags and driver's and front passen- ger’s side airbags). These SRS airbags are designed only as a supplement to the primary protec- tion provided by the seatbelt. — CONTINUED —

KT AT90OBE-A book Page 36 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 1-36 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags The system also controls front seatbelt pretensioners. For operation instructions and precautions concerning the seatbelt pretensioner, see the “Front seatbelt pre- tensioners” section in this chapter. A WARNING ° To obtain maximum protection in the event of an accident, the driv- er and all passengers in the vehi- cle should always wear seatbelts when the vehicle is moving. The SRS airbag is designed only as a supplement to the primary protec- Le) tion provided by the seatbelt. It | does not do away with the need to fasten seatbelts. In combination with the seatbelts, it offers the best combined protection in case of a serious accident. Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of severe injury or death in a crash even when the ve- hicle has the SRS airbag. For instructions and precautions concerning the seatbelt system, see the “Seatbelts” section in this chapter. + Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the SRS airbag. Because the SRS airbag deploys with con- siderable speed -— faster than the blink of an eye -— and force to pro- tect in high speed collisions, the force of an airbag can injure an occupant whose body is too close to SRS airbag. It is also important to wear your seatbelt to help avoid injuries that can result when the SRS airbag contacts an occupant not in prop- er position such as one thrown forward during pre-accident brak- ing. Even when properly positioned, there remains a possil occupant may suffer minor injury such as abrasions and bruises to the face or arms because of the SRS airbag deployment force. «+ The SRS airbags deploy with con- siderable speed and force. Occu- pants who are out of proper posi- tion when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deployment, the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practi- cal while still maintaining full ve- hicle control and the front passen- ger should move the seat as far back as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat. Do not place any objects over or near the SRS airbag cover or be- tween you and the SRS airbag. If the SRS airbag deploys, those ob- jects could interfere with its prop- er operation and could be pro- pelled inside the vehicle and

—+1® Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-37

À WARNING + Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag de- ploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or improperly re- strained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from de- ployment is greater. For that reason, we strongly rec- ommend that ALL children (in- cluding those in child seats and those that have outgrown child re- straint devices) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is appro- priate for the child’s age, height and weight. Secure ALL types of child re- straint devices (including forward facing child seats) in the REAR seats at all times. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating posi- tions than in the front seating po- sitions. For instructions and precautions concerning the child restraint sys- tem, see the “Child restraint sys- tems” section in this chapter.

+ Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on the front passenger’'s seat, or never hold a child on your lap or in your arms. The SRS air- bag deploys with considerable force and can injure or even kill the child. ACAUTION When the SRS airbag deploys, some smoke will be released. This smoke could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trou- ble. If you or your passengers have breathing problems after SRS airbag deploys, get fresh air promptly. A deploying SRS airbag releases hot gas. Occupants could get burned if they come into direct contact with the hot gas. NOTE When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to explain to the buyer that it is equipped with SRS airbags by alerting him or her to the applicable section in this owner’s manual. — CONTINUED —

e||4… _4lle KŸ7 AI900BE-A.book Page 38 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM ÿ Ï 1-38 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags Y Components 1) Airbag control module (including impact sensors)

5) Front sub sensor (right-hand side)

1 à KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 39 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

EH Subaru advanced frontal ai bag system Your vehicle is equipped with a Subaru advanced frontal airbag system that com- plies with the new advanced frontal airbag requirements in the amended Federal Mo- tor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) No. The Subaru advanced frontal airbag sys- tem automatically determines the deploy- ment force of the driver's SRS frontal air- bag at the time of deployment as well as whether or not to activate the front pas- senger's SRS frontal airbag and, if activat- ed, the deployment force of the SRS fron- tal airbag at the time of deployment. Your vehicle has warning labels on the driver's and front passenger's sun visors beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag at- tached to the glove box lid beginning with the phrase “Even with Advanced Air Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read the instructions on the warning labels and tag. Always wear your seatbelt. The subaru advanced frontal airbag system is a sup- plemental restraint system and must be used in combination with a seatbelt. AIl occupants should wear a seatbelt or be seated in an appropriate child restraint system. The drivers SRS frontal airbag is stowed in the center portion of the steering wheel. The front passenger's SRS frontal airbag is stowed near the top of the dashboard under an “SRS AIRBAG” mark. In a moderate to severe frontal collision, the driver's and front passengers SRS frontal airbags deploy and supplement the seatbelts by reducing the impact on the driver's and front passengers head and chest. —+1® Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-39 A WARNING |

A WARNING Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on the front passenger’s seat. The SRS airbag deploys with con- siderable force and can injure or even kill the child. — CONTINUED — nil

dr CA KŸ7 AI900BE-A.book Page 40 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM Ï

1-40 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

It is also important to wear your seatbelt to help avoid injuries that can result when the SRS airbag con- tacts an occupant not in proper po- sition such as one thrown toward the front of the vehicle during pre- accident braking. À WARNING À WARNING Never hold a child on your lap or in your arms. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable force and can in- jure or even kill the child. The SRS airbag deploys with con- siderable speed and force. Occu- pants who are out of proper position when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Be- cause the SRS airbag needs enough space for deployment, the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control and the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possi- ble and sit upright and well back in the seat. A WARNING Do not put any objects over the steering wheel pad and dashboard. If the SRS frontal airbag deploys, those objects could interfere with its proper operation and could be pro- pelled inside the vehicle and cause injury.

1 à KP AT9OOBE-A book Page 41 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

[ A WARNING | Do not attach accessories to the windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir- ror over the rear view mirror. If the SRS airbag deploys, those objects could become projectiles that could seriously injure vehicle occupants. Y Driver’s SRS frontal airbag The drivers SRS frontal airbag uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in different ways depending on the severity of impact, backward-forward adjustment ofthe driver's seat position and whether or not he/she is wearing the seatbelt. The backward-forward adjustment of the driver's seat position is monitored by the drivers seat position sensor under the driver's seat. Whether or not the driver is wearing the seatbelt is monitored by the seatbelt buck- le switch. Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause the seatbelt buckle switch and/or the seat position sensor to malfunction, preventing the Subaru ad- vanced frontal airbag system from func- tioning correctly or causing the system to fail. + Do not place articles/metal objects or in- stall any accessory other than a genuine SUBARU accessory under the drivers seat. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to kick the driver's seat or push up its bot- tom surface with his/her feet. + Do not place a magnet near the seatbelt buckle or under the driver's seat. If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or the drivers seat position sensor have failed, the SRS airbag system warning light will il- luminate. Although the driver's SRS fron- tal airbag can deploy regardiess of the backward-forward adjustment of the driv- er's seat position even when the warning light is on, have the system inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS airbag system warning light comes on.

—+1® Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-41 NOTE The driver’s SRS side airbag and seat- belt pretensioner are not controlled by the Subaru advanced frontal airbag system. Y Front passenger’s SRS frontal air- bag The front passenger's SRS frontal airbag uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator op- erates in different ways depending on the severity of impact. The total load on the seat is monitored by the occupant detection system's weight sensor located under the seat. The system has another sensor that mon- itors the tension of the front passenger seatbelt. Using the total seat load and seatbelt tension data from the sensors, the occupant detection system deter- mines whether the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag should or should not be in- flated. The occupant detection system may not inflate the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag even when the driver's SRS frontal airbag deploys. This is normal. Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may prevent the Subaru ad- vanced frontal airbag system from func- tioning correctly or cause the system to fail. — CONTINUED — nil

1 à KP AT9OOBE-A book Page 42 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

1-42 seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags + Do not apply any strong impact to the front passenger's seat such as by kicking. + Do not spill liquid on the front passen- ger's seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off im- mediately. + Do not disassemble the front passen- ger's seat. + Do not install any accessory (such as an audio amplifier) other than a genuine SUBARU accessory under the front pas- senger's seat. + Do not place anything (shoes, umbrella, etc.) under the front passenger's seat. + The front passenger's seat must not be used with the head restraint removed. + Donotleave any article including a child restraint system on the front passenger's seat or the seatbelt tongue and buckle en- gaged when you leave your vehicle. + Do not place a magnet near the seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt retractor. + Do not use front seats with their back- ward-forward position and seatback not being locked into place securely. If any of them are not locked securely, adjust them again. For adjusting procedure, refer to the “Front seats” section in this chapter. + lfyou use an optional seatbelt extender, remove it after each use. (Refer to the “Seatbelt extender” section in this chap- ter.) If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front passengers occupant detection system have failed, the SRS airbag system warn- ing light will iluminate. Have the system inspected by your SUBARU dealer imme- diately if the SRS airbag system warning light comes on. If your vehicle has sustained impact, this may affect the proper function of the Subaru advanced frontal airbag system. Have your vehicle inspected at your SUBARU dealer. NOTE The front passenger’s SRS side airbag and seatbelt pretensioner are not con- trolled by the Subaru advanced frontal airbag system. Y Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators

22 : Front passengers frontal airbag gs ONindicator ES > : Front passengers frontal airbag OFF indicator The front passenger's frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators show you the status of the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag. The indicators are located next to the clock in the center portion of the dash- board. When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, both the ON and OFF indi- cators illuminate for 6 seconds during which time the system is checked. Follow- ing the system check, both indicators ex- tinguish for 2 seconds. After that, one of

KT AT90OBE-A book Page 43 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM the indicators illuminates depending on the status of the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag determined by the Subaru advanced frontal airbag system monitor- ing. Ifthe front passenger's SRS frontal airbag is activated, the passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF indicator will remain extinguished. Ifthe front passenger's SRS frontal airbag is deactivated, the passenger's frontal air- bag ON indicator will remain extinguished while the OFF indicator will illuminate. With the ignition switch turned to the “ON” position, if both the ON and OFF indica- tors remain lit or extinguished simulta- neously even after the system check peri- od, the system is faulty. Contact your SUBARU dealer immediately for an in- spection. Y Conditions in which front passen- ger’s SRS frontal airbag is not acti- vated The front passenger's SRS frontal airbag Will not be activated when any of the fol- lowing conditions are met regarding the front passenger's seat: + The seat is empty. + The seat is equipped with a rearward facing child restraint system and an infant is restrained with it. (See WARNING that follows.) + The seat is equipped with a forward fac- ing child restraint system and a small child is restrained with it. (See WARNING that follows.) + The seat is equipped with a booster seat and a small child is in the booster seat. (See WARNING that follows.) + The seat is relieved of the occupant load for a time exceeding the predeter- mined monitoring time period. + The seat is occupied by a child who has outgrown a child restraint system (See WARNING that follows.) or by a small adult. + The front passenger's occupant detec- tion system is faulty. Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-43

TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be sure to install it in the REAR seat in a correct manner. Also, it is strongly recommended that any forward fac- ing child seat or booster seat be in- stalled in the REAR seat, and that even children who have outgrown a child restraint system be also seat- ed in the REAR seat. This is because children sitting in the front passen- ger’s seat may be killed or severely injured should the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag deploy. REAR seats are the safest place for chil- When the front passenger's seat is occu- pied by a child, observe the following pre- cautions. Failure to do so may increase the load on the front passenger's seat, ac- tivating the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag even though that seat is occupied by a child. + Do not place any article on the seat oth- er than the child occupant and a child re- straint system. — CONTINUED —

1 à KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 44 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

1-44 seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags + Do not place more than one child on the seat. + Do not install any accessory such as a table or TV onto the seatback. + Do not store a heavy load in the seat- back pocket. + Do not allow the rear seat occupant to place his/her hands or legs on the front passenger's seatback, or allow him/her to pull the seatback. V [fthe front passenger’s frontal air- bag ONindicatorilluminates and the OFF indicator extinguishes even when an infant or a small child is in a child restraint system (including booster seat) Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” posi- tion if the front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator illuminates and the OFF indi- cator extinguishes even when an infant or a small child is in a child restraint system (including booster seat). Remove the child restraint system from the seat. By refer- ring to the child restraint manufacturer's recommendations as well as the child re- straint system installation procedures in the “Seat heater (if equipped)" section in this chapter, correctly install the child re- Straint system. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position and make sure that the front passenger's frontal airbag ON indi- cator goes out and the OFF indicator comes on. If still the ON indicator remains illuminated while the OFF indicator extinguishes, take the following actions. + Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than the child restraint system and the child occupant. + Ensure that there is no article left in the seatback pocket. + Ensure that the backward-forward posi- tion and seatback of front passenger's seat are locked into place securely by moving the seat back and forth. If the ON indicator still illuminates while the OFF indicator extinguishes after tak- ing relevant corrective actions described above, relocate the child restraint system to the rear seat and immediately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection. NOTE When a child who has outgrown a child restraint system or a small adult is seated in the front passenger’s seat, the Subaru advanced frontal airbag system may or may not activate the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag depending on the occupants seating posture. If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated (the ON indi-

cator illuminates while the OFF indica- tor extinguishes), take the following actions. + Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than the occupant. + Ensure that there is no article left in the seatback pocket. If the ON indicator still illuminates while the OFF indicator extinguishes despite the fact that the actions noted above have been taken, seat the child/ small adult in the rear seat and immedi- ately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection. Even if the system has passed the dealer inspection, it is rec- ommended that on subsequent trips the child/small adult always take the rear seat. Children who have outgrown a child re- straint system should always wear the seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag is deactivated or activated. Y Conditions in which front passen- ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated The front passenger's SRS frontal airbag will be activated for deployment upon im- pact when any of the following conditions is met regarding the front passengers seat. + When the seat is occupied by an adult. nil

1 à KP AT9OOBE-A book Page 45 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

+ When a heavy article is placed on the seat. When the front passenger's seat is occu- pied by an adult, observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may lessen the load on the front passenger's seat, de- activating the front passenger's SRS fron- tal airbag despite the fact that the seat is occupied by an adult. + Do not allow the rear seat occupant to lift the front passenger's seat cushion us- ing his/her feet. + Do not place any article under the front passenger's seat, or squeeze any article from behind and under the seat. This may lift the seat cushion. + Do not squeeze any article between the front passenger's seat and side trim/pillar, door or center console box. This may lift the seat cushion. V Ifthe passenger’s frontal airbag OFF indicator illuminates and the ON indicator extinguishes even when the front passenger’s seat is occupied by an adult This can be caused by the adult incorrect- ly sitting in the front passengers seat. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” posi- tion. Ask the front passenger to set the seatback to the upright position, sit up straight in the center of the seat cushion, correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/ her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to the rearmost position. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position. If the OFF in- dicator remains illuminated while the ON indicator remains extinguished, take the following actions. + Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” po- sition. + Ensure that there is no article, book, shoe, or other object trapped under the seat, at the rear of the seat, or on the side of the seat. + Ensure that the backward-forward posi- tion and seatback of front passengers seat are locked into place securely by moving the seat back and forth. + Next, turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position and wait 6 seconds to allow the system to complete self-checking. Follow- ing the system check, both indicators ex- tinguish for 2 seconds. Now, the ON indi- cator should illuminate while the OFF indi- cator remains extinguished. If the OFF indicator still illuminates while the ON indicator remains extinguished, ask the occupant to move to the rear seat and immediately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-45 Y Effect vehicle modifications made for persons with disabilities may have on Subaru advanced frontal airbag system operation (U.S. only) Changing or moving any parts of the front seats, seat belts, front bumper, front side frame, instrument panel, combination meter, steering wheel, steering column, tire, suspension or floor panel can affect the operation of the Subaru advanced air- bag system. If you have any questions, you may contact the following Subaru dis- tributors: <Continental U.S., Alaska and the District of Columbia> Subaru of America, Inc. Customer Dealer Services Department P.0. Box 6000 Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000 1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783) <Hawaii> Schuman Carriage Motors, Inc. 1234 South Beretania Street, Honolulu, HI

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page 46 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

1-46 seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags <Puerto Rico> Trebol Subaru of Puerto Rico, Inc. P.0. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico

787-793-2828 There are currently no Subaru distributors in any other US. territories. If you are in such an area, please contact the Subaru distributor or dealer from which you bought your vehicle.

1 à KP AT9OOBE-A book Page 47 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

1) SRS AIRBAGS deploy as soon as a collision occurs.

2) After deployment, SRS AIRBAGS start to deflate immediately so that the drivers vision is not

—+1® Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-47 The SRS airbag can function only when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. The Subaru advanced frontal airbag sys- tem is designed to determine the activa- tion or deactivation condition of the front passengers SRS frontal airbag depend- ing on the total load on the front passen- gers seat monitored by the front passen- ger's occupant detection system weight sensor. For this reason, only the driver's SRS frontal airbag may deploy in the event of a collision, but this does not mean failure of the system. If the front sub sensors inside both front fenders and the impact sensors in the air- bag control module detect a predeter- mined amount of force during a frontal col- lision, the control module sends signals to the airbag module(s) (only driver's module or both drivers and front passenger's modules) instructing the module(s) to in- flate the SRS frontal airbag(s). The driv- er's and front passenger's SRS frontal air- bags use dual stage inflators. The two in- flators of each airbag are triggered either sequentially or simultaneously, depending on the severity of impact, backward-for- ward adjustment of the driver's seat posi- tion and fastening/unfastening of the seat- bel in the case of the driver's SRS frontal airbag and depending on the severity of impact and the total load on the seat in the — CONTINUED — nil

1 à KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 48 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

1-48 seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags case of the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag. After deployment, the SRS airbag immediately starts to deflate so that the drivers vision is not obstructed. The time required from detecting impact to the de- flation of the SRS airbag after deployment is shorter than the blink of an eye. Both when only the driver's SRS frontal airbag deploys and the driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbags deploy, the driver's and front passenger's seatbelt pretensioners operate at the same time. Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS airbag would activate in a non-accident situation, should it occur, the SRS airbag will deflate quickly, not obscuring vision and will not interfere with the driver's abil- ity to maintain control of the vehicle. When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and some smoke will be released. These oc- currences are a normal result of the de- ployment. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle. ÂCAUTION Do not touch the SRS airbag system components around the steering wheel and dashboard with bare hands right after deployment. Doing so can cause burns because the components can be very hot as a re- sult of deployment. The drivers SRS frontal airbag and front passengers SRS frontal airbag are de- signed to deploy in the event of an acci- dent involving a moderate to severe fron- tal collision. lt is basically not designed to deploy in lesser frontal impacts because the necessary protection can be achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, they are basi- cally not designed to deploy in side or rear impacts or in roll-over accidents because deployment of only the driver's SRS fron- tal airbag or both driver's and front pas- senger's SRS frontal airbags would not help the occupant in those situations. The driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbags are designed to function on a one- time-only basis. SRS airbag deployment depends on the level of force experienced in the passen- ger compartment during a collision. That level differs from one type of collision to another, and it may have no bearing on

the visible damage done to the vehicle it- self. V Examples of accident in which the driver’s/driver’s and front passen- ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will most likely deploy.

A head-on collision against a thick con- crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19 mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates only the driver's SRS frontal airbag or both driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbags. The airbag(s) will also be activat- ed when the vehicle is exposed to a frontal impact similar in fashion and magnitude to the collision described above.

1 à KP AT9OOBE-A book Page 49 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM V Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the driv- er’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will deploy.

The only the driver's SRS frontal airbag or both driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbags may be activated when the vehicle sustains a hard impact in the un- dercarriage area from the road surface (such as when the vehicle plunges into a deep ditch, is severely impacted or knocked hard against an obstacle on the road such as a curb).

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-49 V Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/ driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to de- ploy.

There are many types of collisions which — CONTINUED — nil

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page 50 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

1-50 seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags might not necessarily require deployment of driver's/driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbag(s). If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a telephone pole or sign pole, or ifit slides under a truck's load bed, or if it sustains an oblique offset fron- tal impact, the driver's/driver's and front passengers SRS frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depending on the level of acci- dent forces involved. V Examples of the types of accidents in which the driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal air- bag(s) will basically not deploy. to deploy if the vehicle is struck from the side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its side or roof, or if it is involved in a low- speed frontal collision.

The driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbags are designed basically not

In an accident where the vehicle is impact- ed more than once, the drivers and/or front passengers SRS frontal airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first impact. Example: In the case of a double collision, first with another vehicle, then against a concrete wall in immediate succession, once either or both of the driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbags is/are ac- tivated on the first impact, it/they will not be activated on the second impact.

KP AT90OBE-A book Page 51 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM HE SRS side airbag The SRS side airbag is stored in the door side of each front seat seatback, which bears an “SRS AIRBAG" label. In a moderate to severe side impact colli- sion, the SRS side airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle deploys between the occupant and the door panel and supple- ments the seatbelt by reducing the impact on the occupant's chest and head. A WARNING | —+1®

The SRS side airbag is designed as only a supplement to the primary protection provided by the seatbelt. They do not do away with the need to fasten seatbelts. It is also impor- tant to wear your seatbelt to help avoid injuries that can result when an occupant is not seated in a prop- er upright position. À WARNING [ A WARNING Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to either front door. The SRS side airbag is stored in both front seat seatbacks next to the door, and it provides protection by deploying rapidly (faster than the blink of an eye) in the event of a side impact collision. However, the force of SRS sit rbag deployment may cause injuries if your head or other parts of the body are too close to the SRS side airbag. Do not rest your arm on either front door or its internal trim. lt could be injured in the event of SRS side air- bag deployment. — CONTINUED —

KT AT90OBE-A book Page 52 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 1-52 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

À WARNING À WARNING Never allow a child to kneel on the front passenger’s seat facing the side window or to wrap his/her arms around the front seat seatback. In the event of an accident, the force of the SRS side airbag deployment could injure the child seriously be- cause his/her head or arms or other parts of the body are too close to the SRS side airbag. Since your vehicle is also equipped with a passenger’s SRS frontal airbag, children aged 12 and under should be placed in the rear seat anyway and should be properly restrained at all times. Do not attach accessories to the door trim or near either SRS side air- bags and do not place objects near the SRS side airbags. In the event of the SRS side airbag deployment, they could be propelled dangerous- ly toward the vehicle’s occupants and cause injuries.

1 à KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 53 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

À WARNING Do not put any kind of cover or clothes or other objects over either front seatback and do not attach la- bels or stickers to the front seat sur- face on or near the SRS side airbag. They could prevent proper deploy- ment of the SRS side airbag, reduc- ing protection available to the front seat’s occupant. Y Operation

1) SRS side airbag deploys as soon as a

senger's head and chest.

3) After deployment, SRS side airbag

starts to deflate immediately.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-53 The SRS side airbag can function only when the ignition switch is in the “ON” po- sition. The driver's and front passengers SRS side airbags deploy independently of each other since each has its own impact sen- sor. Also, the SRS side airbag deploys in- dependenitly of the frontal airbags in the steering wheel and instrument panel. An impact sensor is incorporated into each of the vehicle's center pillars. If ei- ther sensor detects a certain predeter- mined amount of force during a side im- pact collision, the control module sends a signal to the side airbag module on the im- pacted side of the vehicle, instructing it to inflate the SRS side airbag. Then the side airbag module produces gas, which in- stantly inflates the SRS side airbag. After deployment, the SRS side airbag will de- flate in a few seconds. The SRS side airbag deploys even when no one occupies the seat on the side on which an impact is applied. When the SRS side airbag deploys, a sud- den, fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and some smoke will be released. These occurrences are normal result of the de- ployment. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle. — CONTINUED — nil

1 à KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 4 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

1-54 seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags [ À CAUTION | Do not touch the SRS side airbag system components around the front seat seatback with bare hands right after deployment. Doing so can cause burns because the compo- nents can be very hot as a result of deployment. The SRS side airbag is designed to de- ploy in the event of an accident involving a moderate to severe side impact collision. It is basically not designed to deploy in a lesser side impact. Also, it is basically not designed to deploy in frontal or rear im- pacts because SRS side airbag deploy- ment would not help the occupant in those situations. Each SRS side airbag is designed to func- tion on a one-time-only basis. SRS side airbag deployment depends on the level of force experienced in the pas- senger compartment during a side impact collision. That level differs from one type of collision to another, and it may have no bearing on the visible damage done to the vehicle itself. V Example of the type of accident in which the SRS side airbag will most likely deploy.

A severe side impact near the front seat activates the SRS side airbag.

e||4… _4lle #7 A1900BE-A.book Page 55 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM n Ï £ EN Lù ù Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-55 V Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely to 1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique deploy. side-on impact.

2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact in an area outside the vicinity of the passenger compartiment.

3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole

4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact from a motorcycle.

5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or roof.

There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require SRS side airbag deployment. In the event of acci- dents like those illustrated, the SRS side A airbag may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.

1 à KP AT90OBE-A book Page 56 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

1-56 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags V Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag will ba- sically not deploy.

1) The vehicle is involved in a frontal coli

sion with another vehicle (moving or sta- tionary).

2) The vehicle is struck from behind.

The SRS side airbag is basically not de- signed to deploy if the vehicle is involved in a frontal collision or is struck from be- hind. Examples of such accidents are il- lustrated.

In an accident where the vehicle is struck from the side more than once, the SRS side airbag deploys only once on the first impact. Example: In the case of a double side im- pact collision, first with one vehicle and immediately followed by another from the same direction, once the SRS side airbag is activated on the first impact, it will not be activated on the second.

A diagnostic system continually monitors the readiness of the SRS airbag system (including front seatbelt pretensioners) while the vehicle is being driven. The SRS airbag system warning light “AIRBAG" will show normal system operation by lighting for approximately 6 seconds when the ig- nition switch is turned to the “ON” position. The following components are monitored by the indicator: + Front sub sensor (Right-hand side) + Front sub sensor (Left-hand side) + Airbag control module (including impact sensors) + Frontal airbag module (Driver's side) + Frontal airbag module (Front passen- ger's side)

KP AT90OBE-A book Page 57 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM + Side airbag sensor (Center pillar right hand side) + Side airbag sensor (Center pillar left hand side) + Side airbag module (Driver's side) + Side airbag module (Front passenger's side) + Seatbelt pretensioner (Driver's side) + Seatbelt pretensioner (Front passen- ger's side) + Seatbelt buckle switch (Driver's side) + Seatbelt buckle switch (Front passen- ger's side) + Driver's seat position sensor + Front passenger's seatbelt tension sen- sor + Front passenger's occupant detection system weight sensor + Front passenger's occupant detection control module + Front passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF indicator + All related wiring À WARNING —+1® Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-57 HSRS airbag system servicing If the warning light exhibits any of the following conditions, there may be a malfunction in the seatbelt pre- tensioners and/or SRS airbag sys- tem. immediately take your vehicle to your nearest SUBARU dealer to have the system checked. Unless checked and properly repaired, the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbag will not operate properly in the event of a collision, which may increase the risk of injury.

• Flashing or flickering of the warn- ing light ° No illumination of the warning light when the ignition switch is first turned to the “ON” position + Continuous warning light eIllu n of the warning light while driving illumination of the [ A WARNING | °+ When discarding an airbag mod- ule or scrapping the entire vehicle damaged by a col n, consult your SUBARU dealer. The SRS airbag has no user-ser- viceable parts. Do not use electri- cal test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS airbag system. For required servicing of the SRS airbag, see your nearest SUBARU dealer. Tampering with or discon- the system'’s wiring could in accidental inflation of the SRS airbag or could make the sys- tem inoperative, which may result in serious injury. The wiring har- nesses of the SRS airbag system are covered with yellow insulation and system connectors are yellow for easy identification. — CONTINUED —

KP AT9OOBE-A book Page 58 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 1-58 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags [ À CAUTION If you need service or repair in areas listed in the following, have an au- thorized SUBARU dealer perform the work. The SRS airbag control module, impact sensors and airbag modules are stored in these areas. + Under the center console Inside each front fender Steering wheel and column and nearby areas Top of the dashboard on front passenger's side and nearby ar- eas Each front seat and nearby area Inside each center pillar In the event that the SRS airbag is de- ployed, replacement of the system Should be performed only by an autho- rized SUBARU dealer. When the com- ponents of the SRS airbag system are replaced, use only genuine SUBARU parts. To ensure their long-term reliability, the SRS airbags must be inspected by a SUBARU dealer ten years after the date of manufacture, which is shown on the certification plate attached to the driver's

door jamb. NOTE In the following cases, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. + The front part of the vehicle was in- volved in an accident in which only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both driv- er’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags did not deploy. + The pad section of the steering wheel or front passenger’s frontal air- bag cover is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged. In addition, if your vehicle is equipped with SRS side airbags, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible in the following cases. + Either center pillar or a nearby area of the vehicle was involved in an acci- dent in which the SRS side airbag did not deploy. + The fabric or leather of either front seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise damaged. H Precautions against vehicle modification AWARNING + To avoid accidental activation of the system or rendering the sys- tem inoperative, which may result in serious injury, no modifications should be made to any compo- nents or wiring of the SRS airbag system. This includes following modifica- tions: Installation of custom steering wheels Attachment of additional trim materials to the dashboard Installation of custom seats Replacement of seat fabric or leather Installation of additional fabric or leather on the front seat —+1®

d di|æ #7 A1900BE-A.book Page 59 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM n 41 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-59 + Installation of additional electri- + Attachment of any equipment cal/electronic equipment such (side steps or side sill protectors, as a mobile two-way radio on or etc.) other than genuine SUBARU near the SRS airbag system accessory parts to the side body. components and/or wiring is : not advisable. This could inter- Always consult your SUBARU dealer if fere with proper operation ofthe you want to install any accessory parts on SRS airbag system. your vehicle. À CAUTION Do not perform any of the following modifications. Such modifications can interfere with proper operation of the SRS airbag system. + Attachment of any equipment (brush bar, winches, snow plow, skid plate, etc.) other than genu- ine SUBARU accessory parts to the front end.

Modification of the suspension system or front end structure. Installation of a tire of different size and construction from the tires specified on the vehicle plac- ard attached to the driver's door pillar or specified for individual vehicle models in this Owner's Manual.

KP AT90OBE-A book Page 1 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM Keys. Key number . Immobilizer (Turbo models) Security ID plate Security indicator light Key replacement … Door locks … Locking and unlocking from the outside Locking and unlocking from the inside Key lock-in prevention function . Power door locking switches . Remote keyless entry system Locking the doors Unlocking the doors Illuminated entry … Vehicle finder function Sounding a panic alarm . Selecting audible signal operation Replacing the battery … Replacing lost transmitters . Alarm system ….. System alarm operation . Activating and deactivating the alarm system . If you have accidentally triggered the alarm system …. Arming the system Disarming the system . Valet mode Passive arming

Keys and doors Tripped sensor identification Shock sensors (dealer option) Child safety locks Windows … Power windows Trunk lid (Sedan) To open and close the trunk | To open the trunk lid from il To cancel the trunk lid release Internal trunk lid release handle . Rear gate (Wagon) Moonroof (if equipped) Tilt function . Sliding function Sun shades 2-47 2-47 2-18 2-18 2-18 2-20 2-20 2-21 2-21 2-21 2-23 2-24 2-24 2-24 2-25

1 à KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 2 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

2-2 keys and doors Keys

Three types of keys are provided for your vehicle: Master key, submaster key and valet key. The master key and submaster key fit all locks on your vehicle. + Ignition switch + Doors + Trunk (Sedan) + Glove box The valet key fits only the ignition switch and driver's door lock. You can keep the trunk and glove box locked when you

leave your vehicle and valet key at a park- ing facility. ÂCAUTION Do not attach a large key holder or key case to either key. If it bangs against your knees while you are driving, it could turn the ignition switch from the ON position to the ACC or OFF position, thereby stop- ping the engine. EH Key number The key number is stamped on the metal plate attached to the key set. Write down the key number and keep it in another safe place, not in the vehicle. This number is needed to make a replacement key if you lose your key or lock it inside the vehi- cle.

d di|æ KŸ7 A1900BE-A.book Page 3 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM n 41

Immobilizer (Turbo models) The immobilizer system is designed to prevent an unauthorized person from starting the engine. Only keys registered with your vehicle's immobilizer system can be used to operate your vehicle. Even if an unregistered key fits into the ignition switch and can be turned to the “START” position, the engine will automatically stop after several seconds. Each immobilizer key contains a tran- sponder in which the key's ID code is stored. When a key is inserted into the ig- nition switch and turned to the “ON” posi- tion, the transponder transmits the key's ID code to the immobilizer system's re- ceiver. lf the transmitted ID code matches the ID code registered in the immobilizer system, the system allows the engine to be started. Since the ID code is transmit- ted and acted upon almost instantly, the immobilizer system does not impede nor- mal starting of the engine. If the engine fails to start, pull out the key once before trying again. (Refer to the “Ig- nition switch” section [chapter 3].) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of In- dustry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, includin! terference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not express- ly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. NOTE To protect your vehicle from theft, please pay close attention to the fol- lowing security precautions: + Never leave your vehicle unattended with its keys inside. + Before leaving your vehicle, close all windows and lock the doors and rear gate. + Do not leave spare keys or any record of your key number in the vehi- cle. À CAUTION + Do not place the key under direct sunlight or anywhere it may be- come hot. + Do not get the key wet. If the key gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth immediately.

Keys and doors 2-3 E Security ID plate

The security ID is stamped on the metal plate attached to the key set. Write down the security ID and keep it in another safe place, not in the vehicle. This number is needed to make a replacement key if you lose your key or lock it inside the vehicle. This number is also needed for replace- ment or repair of the engine control unit, immobilizer control unit. E Security indicator light En The security indicator light deters potential thieves by indicating that the vehicle is equipped with an immobilizer system. lt — CONTINUED —

1 à KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 4 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

2-4 keys and doors begins flashing (approximately once every three seconds) approximately 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned from the “ON” position to the “ACC” or “LOCK” po- sition or immediately after the key is pulled out. If the security indicator light does not flash, the immobilizer system may be faulty. If this occurs, we recommend that you contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. In case an unauthorized key is used (e.g. an imitation key), the security indicator light comes on. NOTE Even if the security indicator light flashes irregularly or its fuse blows (the light does not flash if its fuse is blown), the immobilizer system will function normally. HE Key replacement Your key number and security ID will be required if you ever need a replacement key made. Any new key must be regis- tered for use with your vehicle's immobiliz- er system before it can be used. Up to four keys can be registered for use with one vehicle. For security, all the keys registered with your vehicle's immobilizer system will have their ID codes erased and re-regis- tered when a new key is made. Therefore, all of your vehicle's keys must be present- ed when a new key is registered. Any key that is not re-registered when a new key is made cannot be used after the other keys are re-registered. For information on re- placement keys and on the registration of keys with your immobilizer system, con- tact your SUBARU dealer. Door locks —+1® Æ Locking and unlocking from the outside

To lock the driver's door from the outside with the key, turn the key toward the rear. To unlock the door, turn the key toward the front. Pull the outside door handle to open an unlocked door.

d di|æ KŸ7 A1900BE-A.book Page 5 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM n 41

1) Rotate the lock lever rearward.

To lock the door from the outside without the key, rotate the lock lever rearward and then close the door. To lock the door from the outside using the power door locking switch, push the front side of the switch (‘LOCK side) and then close the door. In this case, all closed doors and the rear gate (for Wagon) are locked at the same time. Always make sure that all doors and the rear gate (for Wagon) are locked before leaving your vehicle. NOTE Make sure that you do not leave the key inside the vehicle when locking the doors from the outside without the key. Æ Locking and unlocking from the inside

Keys and doors 2-5 starting to drive. A WARNING | Keep all doors locked when you drive, especially when small chil- dren are in your vehicle. Along with the proper use of seat- belts and child restraints, locking the doors reduces the chance of be- ing thrown out of the vehicle in an accident. It also helps prevent passengers from falling out if a door is acciden- tally opened, and intruders from un- expectedly opening doors and en- tering your vehicle.

To lock the door from the inside, rotate the lock lever rearward. To unlock the door from the inside, rotate the lock lever for- ward. The red mark on the lock lever appears when the door is unlocked. Pull the inside door handle to open an un- locked door. Always make sure that all doors and the rear gate (for Wagon) are closed before

H Key lock-in prevention func- tion This function prevents the doors from be- ing locked with the key still in the ignition switch. Y Behavior with key lock-in preven- tion function operative With the driver's door open, the doors are automatically kept unlocked even if the door locking switch is pushed to the front (“LOCK”) position. — CONTINUED —

1 à KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 6 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 2-6 keys and doors Y Behavior with key lock-in preven- tion function non-operative + lf the lock lever is turned to the rear (‘LOCK") position with the drivers door open and the driver's door is then closed with the lock lever in that position, the driv- er's door is locked. + lfthe spare key is used to lock the driv- ers door from the outside of the vehicle, the door is locked. This function's operative/non-operative setting can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARU dealer for de- tails. NOTE When leaving the vehicle, make sure you are holding the key before locking the doors. Power door locking switches

All doors and the rear gate (for Wagon) can be locked and unlocked by the power door locking switches located at the driv- ers side and the front passenger's side doors. To lock the doors, push the front side of the switch. To unlock the doors, push the rear side of the switch. When you close the doors after you set the door locks, the doors remain locked.

NOTE Make sure that you do not leave the key inside the vehicle before locking the doors from the outside using the pow- er door locking switches.

d di|æ KŸ7 A1900BE-A.book Page 7 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM n 41

Remote keyless entry sys- tem Two transmitters are provided for your ve- hicle. The remote keyless entry system has the following functions. + Locking and unlocking the doors (and rear gate on the Wagon) without a key + Sounding a panic alarm + Arming and disarming the alarm sys- tem. See the next section “Alarm system” for detailed information. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of In- dustry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including in- terference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not express- ly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The operable distance of the keyless entry system is approximately 30 feet (10 meters). However, this distance will vary depending on environmental conditions. The system's operable distance will be shorter in areas near a facility or electronic equipment emitting strong radio waves such as a power plant, broadcast station, TV tower, or remote controller of home electronic appliances. The remote keyless entry system does not operate when the key is inserted in the ig- nition switch to prevent accidental lockout. À CAUTION ] + Do not expose the transmitter to severe shocks, such as those ex- perienced as a result of dropping or throwing. + Do not take the transmitter apart except when replacing the bat- tery. + Do not get the transmitter wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth immediately. Keys and doors 2-7

8 : LOCK/ARM button Press to Lock all doors. Press and Hold to activate panic alarm. Press three times in a five-second period to use vehicle finder func- tion. d' _: UNLOCK/DISARM button

1) Press once to Unlock driver's

2) Press a second time to Unlock

all other doors (and rear gate on the Wagon) EH Locking the doors Briefly press the “ @ ” button (for less than two seconds) to lock all doors (and rear gate on the Wagon). An electronic chirp will sound once and the turn signal lights will flash once. — CONTINUED —

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page 8 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

2-8 keys and doors If any of the doors (or the rear gate) is not fully closed, an electronic chirp will sound five times and the turn signal lights will flash five times to alert you that the doors (or the rear gate) are not properly closed. When you close the door, it will automati- cally lock. NOTE If the “ @ ” button is pressed for two seconds or longer, the panic alarm will sound. When locking the doors in nor- mal circumstances, press the “ @ ” button for less than two seconds. For details on the panic alarm, refer to “Sounding a panic alarm”. E Unlocking the doors Briefly press the “ J" ” button (for less than two seconds) to unlock the drivers door. An electronic chirp will sound twice and the turn signal lights will flash twice. To unlock all other doors (and rear gate on the Wagon), briefly press the “ J° ” but- ton a second time within 5 seconds. NOTE Ifthe interval between the first and sec- ond presses of the “ J° ” button (for unlocking of all of the doors and the rear gate) is extremely short, the sys- tem may not respond. Hilluminated entry The interior (dome) light and ignition switch light (for turbo models) will illumi- nate when the “ J° ” button is pressed. These lights stay illuminated for approxi- mately 30 seconds if any of the doors (or the rear gate on the Wagon) is not opened. If the “ @ ” button is pressed before 30 seconds have elapsed, these lights will go out. Also, these lights will go out if the key is inserted in the ignition switch. The inte- rior light switch must be set to the middle position in order for this function to oper- ate. E Vehicle finder function Use this function to find your vehicle parked among many vehicles in a large parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet (10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the “ G ” button three times in a five-sec- ond period will cause your vehicle's horn to sound once and its turn signal lights to flash three times. NOTE If the interval between presses is too Short when you press the “ @ ” button three times, the system may not re- spond to the signals from the remote

transmitter. HE Sounding a panic alarm To activate the alarm, keep the “ 8 ” but- ton pressed for more than two seconds. The horn will sound and the turn signal lights will flash. To deactivate it, press the “ @ ” button or “ dd? ” button. Unless a button on the re- mote is pressed, the alarm will be deacti- vated after approximately 30 seconds. H Selecting audible signal op- eration Using an electronic chirp, the system will give you an audible signal when the doors lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn the audible signal off. Do the following to deactivate the audible signal. You can also use the same steps to restore the function.

1. Sit in the drivers seat and shut all

doors and the rear gate.

2. Open the drivers door, then remove

the key from the ignition switch.

3. Hold down the “UNLOCK” side of the

power door locking switch.

4. While holding down the “UNLOCK"

side of the power door locking switch, in- sert the key into the ignition switch and re- move it again at least 6 times within 10

1 à KP AT9OOBE-A book Page 9 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

seconds after Step 3.

5. While still holding down the “UNLOCK"

side of the power door locking switch, close the driver's door once within 10 sec- onds after Step 4.

6. The turn signal lights flashes 3 times to

indicate completion of the setting. NOTE If you do not close the driver’s door within 10 seconds after Step 4, a flash of the turn signal lights will signal time- out. If this happens, repeat the whole procedure from Step 1. You may have the above settings done by your SUBARU dealer. BH Replacing the battery When the transmitter battery begins to get weak, transmitter range will begin to de- crease. Replace the battery as soon as possible. To replace the battery: LT 200809

—+1® Keys and doors 2-9

1) Negative (-) side facing up

3. Replace with a new battery (Type

CR2025 or equivalent) making sure to in- stall the new battery with the negative (-) side facing up.

4. Reinstall the back half of the transmit-

ter case by snapping it back on. After the battery is replaced, the trans- mitter must be synchronized with the keyless entry system’s control unit. Press either the “ G ”’or“ J° ” button six times to synchronize the unit. À CAUTION |

2. Remove the old battery from the hold-

+ Do not let dust, oil or water get on or in the transmitter when replac- ing the battery. — CONTINUED — nil

1 à KP AI9OOBE-A book Page 10 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

• Be careful not to damage the printed circuit board in the trans- mitter when replacing the battery. BE Replacing lost transmitters If you lose a transmitter or want to pur- chase additional transmitters (up to four can be programmed), you should re-pro- gram all of your transmitters for security reasons. It is recommended that you have your dealer program all of your transmit- ters into your system. Y Programming the transmitters The keyless entry system is equipped with a special code learning feature that allows you to program new transmitter codes into the system or to delete old ones. The sys- tem can learn up to four unique transmitter codes. The four transmitter codes may be the same or different. Programming transmitter codes into system:

To register a new transmitter with the key- less entry system, it is necessary to pro- gram the transmitter's code (identification number) into the system. A label showing the code is affixed to the bag containing the transmitter, and another is affixed to the circuit board inside the transmitter. If there is no bag, open the transmitter case and make a note of the eight-digit number. Program the number into the system in accordance with the following procedure:

1. Firmly close the doors and the rear

2. Open the driver's door, sit on the driv-

er's seat, and close the door.

3. Perform the following steps within 45

seconds. Transmitter circuit board

2)Insert the key into the ignition switch, then turn it from the “LOCK” position to the “ON” position 10 times within 15 seconds. NOTE + When you complete step 2), an elec- tronic tone will sound once. + If you do not perform steps 1) and 2) Within 45 seconds, an error will occur. Neither an electronic tone nor the buzz- er will sound, and the interior lamp will not flash. In this event, perform the whole procedure again beginning with

4. Open and close the door once within

15 seconds. NOTE + When part 4 of the procedure is com- pleted, an electronic tone will sound for 30 seconds. + If you do not perform the operations in part 4 within 15 seconds, an error will occur and the electronic tone will not sound. In this event, perform the registration steps again beginning with

part 3 of the procedure.

5. Before the electronic tone stops sound-

ing, push the lock side of the power door lock switch the same number of times as the leftmost digit of the transmitter code. For example, push the lock switch eight times if the leftmost digit of the code is 8.

Keys and doors 2-11 NOTE + The electronic tone will stop sound- ing when you start entering the num- ber. + If you do not start entering the num- ber using the lock switch before the electronic tone stops sounding, an er- ror will occur. In this event, perform the registration steps again beginning with

part 3 of the procedure.

+ If the interval between one push of the switch and the next exceeds five seconds, an error will occur. In this event, perform the procedure again be- ginning with part 4. If an error occurs six times, perform the procedure again starting with part 3.

6. When you have finished entering the

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 12 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 2-12 keys and doors number, push the unlock side of the lock switch within five seconds. NOTE + An electronic tone will sound. + If you push the unlock side of the lock switch when more than five sec- onds have passed, an error will occur. In this event, perform the procedure again beginning with part 4. If an error occurs six times, perform the proce- dure again starting with part 3.

7. Perform parts 5 and 6 of the procedure

for each of the remaining digits of the transmitter code beginning with the sec- ond digit (counting from the left) and fin- ishing with the eighth digit. NOTE + When you finish entering the eighth digit, an electronic tone will sound for 30 seconds. + If the interval between one push of the switch and the next exceeds five seconds, an error will occur. In this event, perform the procedure again be- ginning with part 4. If an error occurs six times, perform the procedure again Starting with part 3.

8. Before the electronic tone stops sound-

ing, use the power door lock switch to again enter the transmitter code beginning

with the leftmost digit. NOTE If you do not start entering the number using the lock switch before the elec- tronic tone stops sounding, an error will occur. In this event, perform the procedure again beginning with part 3.

9. When you have finished entering the

code a second time, an electronic tone will sound for one second and automatic door locking and unlocking operation will take place once to indicate completion of regis- tration, provided the code entered the sec- ond time is identical to that entered the first time. NOTE If the code entered the second time is not identical to the code entered the first time, an error will occur. In this event, perform the procedure again be- ginning with part 5. If an error occurs five times, perform the procedure again starting with part 3. 10.1f you wish to program another trans- mitter code into the system (up to four transmitter codes can be programmed into the system), perform the procedure beginning with part 4. When you have fin- ished programming all of the necessary transmitter codes into the system, remove

the key from the ignition switch. 11.Test every registered transmitter to confirm correct operation. Y Deleting old transmitter codes The control unit of the keyless entry sys- tem has four memory locations to store transmitter codes, giving it the ability to operate with up to four transmitters. When you lose a transmitter, the lost transmit- ter's code remains in the memory. For se- curity reasons, lost transmitter codes should be deleted from the memory. To delete old transmitter codes, program four transmitter codes into the system. If you have only one current transmitter, program it four times. If you have two cur- rent transmitters, program each one twice. If you have three current transmitters, pro- gram two of them once and the third one twice. This process will leave only current transmitter codes in the system's memory. NOTE Make sure no one else is operating their keyless entry system within range of your vehicle when programming transmitters. If someone else were to operate their remote transmitter while you are programming your transmit- ters, it is possible that their transmitter code will be programmed into your system, allowing them unauthorized

1 à KP AT9OOBE-A book Page 13 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

access to your vehicle. Alarm system The alarm system helps to protect your vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn sounds and the turn signal lights flash if someone attempts to break into your vehi- cle. The starter motor is also interrupted to prevent starting the vehicle without a key. The system can be armed and disarmed with the remote transmitter. The system does not operate when the key is inserted into the ignition switch. Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set for activation at the time of shipment from the factory. You can set the system for de- activation yourself or have it done by your SUBARU dealer. HE System alarm operation The alarm system will give the following alarms when triggered: + The vehicle's horn will sound and the turn signal lights will flash for 30 seconds. In addition, the starter motor will not oper- ate. + Ifany door (or the rear gate/trunk lid) re- mains open after the 30-second period, the horn will continue to sound for a maxi- mum of 3 minutes. If the door (or the rear gate/trunk lid) is closed while the horn is

Keys and doors 2-13 sounding, the horn will stop sounding with a delay of up to 30 seconds. The alarm is triggered by: + Opening a door, the rear gate or trunk lid + Physical impact to the vehicle, such as forced entry (only vehicles with shock sen- sors (dealer option)) H Activating and deactivating the alarm system To change the setting of your vehicles alarm system for activation or deactiva- tion, do the following.

1. Disarm the alarm system (see “Disarm-

ing the system” in this section).

2. Sit in the drivers seat and shut all

doors (and the rear gate if your vehicle is a Wagon).

3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” po-

4. Hold down the UNLOCK side of the

driver's power door locking switch, open the driver's door within the following 1 sec- ond, and wait 10 seconds without releas- ing the switch. The setting will then be changed as follows: If the system was previously activated: The odometer/trip meter screen displays “AL oF” and the horn sounds twice, indi- — CONTINUED — nil

e||4… KŸ7 AI900BE-A.book Page 14 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

2-14 keys and doors cating that the system is now deactivated. If the system was previously deactivated: The odometer/trip meter screen displays “AL on” and the horn sounds once, indi- cating that the system is now activated. NOTE You may have the above setting change done by your SUBARU dealer. Hif you have accidentally trig- gered the alarm system Y To stop the alarm Do any of the following operations: + Press any button on the remote trans- mitter. + Cycle the ignition switch from the “LOCK” to “ON” position three times within 5 seconds. M Arming the system Y To arm the system using remote transmitter

1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if

2. Remove the key from the ignition

3. Open the doors and get out of the vehi-

4. Make sure that the engine hood (and

the trunk lid) are locked.

5. Close all doors (and the rear gate on

6 Press to Arm the system. 7 : Press to Disarm the system.

6. Briefly press the “ @ ” button (for less

than two seconds). All doors (and the rear gate on the Wagon) will lock, an electronic chirp will sound once, the turn signal lights will flash once, and the indicator lights will start flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing for 30 seconds (standby time), the indica- tor lights will then flash slowly (twice ap- proximately every two seconds), indicat- ing that the system has been armed for surveillance. If any of the doors, (rear gate or trunk lid) is not fully closed, an electronic chirp sounds five times, the turn signal lights flash five times to alert you that the doors (or the rear gate) are not properly closed. When you close the door, the system will

KP AT90OBE-A book Page 15 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM automatically arm and doors will automat- ically lock. Y To arm the system using power door locking switches

1. Close all windows.

2. Remove the key from the ignition

3. Open the doors and get out of the vehi-

4. Make sure that the engine hood is

5. Close the doors (and the rear gate on

the Wagon) but leave only the drivers door or the front passenger’s door open.

6. Push the front side (‘LOCK" side) of

the power door locking switch to set the door locks.

7. Close the door. An electronic chirp will

sound once, the turn signal lights will flash once, and the indicator lights will start flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing for 30 seconds (standby time), the indicator lights will then flash slowly (twice approxi- mately every two seconds), indicating that the system has been armed for surveil- lance. NOTE + The system can be armed even if the engine hood, the windows and/or moonroofs are opened. Always make sure that they are fully closed before arming the system. + The 30-second standby time can be eliminated if you prefer. Have it per- formed by your SUBARU dealer. + The system is in the standby mode for a 30-second period after locking the doors with the remote transmitter. The security indicator light will flash at Short intervals during this period. + Ifany of the following actions is done during the standby period, the system will not switch to the surveillance state. + Doors are unlocked using the re- mote transmitter. + Any door (including the rear gate of a Wagon or the trunk of a Sedan) is opened. + Ignition switch is turned to the

—+1® Keys and doors 2-15 “ON” position. + The engine does not start even when the ignition switch is turned to the “START” position once the alarm sys- tem has been triggered. Disarming the system Briefly press the “ J° ” button (for less than two seconds) on the remote transmit- ter. The driver's door will unlock, an elec- tronic chirp will sound twice, the turn sig- nal lights will flash twice and the indicator light will go off. NOTE (Models with immobiliz- er) If your vehicle is equipped with an im- mobilizer, the immobilizer’s function will cause the security indicator light to flash (approximately once every three seconds) even after the system is dis- armed. NOTE The system can be disarmed by the fol- lowing method, too. + Cycle the ignition switch from the “LOCK” to the “ON” position three times within 5 seconds. Y Emergency disarming If you cannot disarm the system using the — CONTINUED —

e||4… KŸ7 AI900BE-A.book Page 16 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

2-16 keys and doors transmitter (i.e. the transmitter is lost, bro- ken or the transmitter battery is too weak), you can disarm the system without using the transmitter.

1. Unlock the door with the key and then

2. Insert the key into the ignition switch

and cycle it from the “LOCK” to the “ON” position three times within 5 seconds. H Valet mode When you choose the valet mode, the alarm system does not operate. In valet mode, the remote transmitter is used only for locking and unlocking the doors and rear gate (Wagon) and panic activation. To enter the valet mode, change the set- ting of your vehicle's alarm system for de- activation mode. (Refer to “Activating and deactivating the alarm system” in this sec- tion.) The security indicator light will con- tinue to flash once every three seconds in- dicating that the system is in the valet mode (only vehicle with an immobilizer). To exit valet mode, change the setting of your vehicle’s alarm system for activation mode. (Refer to “Activating and deactivat- ing the alarm system” in this section.) NOTE If your vehicle is not equipped with an immobilizer, the security indicator light does not flash during the valet mode. M Passive arming When passive arming mode has been programmed by the dealer, arming of the system is automatically accomplished without using the remote transmitter. Note that in this mode, DOORS MUST BE MANUALLY LOCKED. Y To enter the passive mode If you wish to program the passive arming mode, have it done by your SUBARU dealer. Y Arming the system ÂÀCAUTION In passive mode, the system will au- tomatically activate the alarm but WILL NOT automatically lock the doors. In order to lock the doors you must either lock them as indicated in step 4 below or with the key once they have been closed. Failure to lock the doors manually will result in a higher security risk.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” po-

2. Turn the ignition switch from “ON” to

“LOCK” position and remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Open the doors and get out of the vehi-

1 à KP AT90OBE-A book Page 17 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

4. Before closing the doors, lock all doors

with the inside door lock levers.

5. Close the doors. The system will auto-

matically arm after one minute. In the passive mode, the system can also be armed with the remote transmitter or with the power door locking switches. If the remote transmitter or power door lock- ing switch is used to lock the vehicle, arm- ing will take place immediately regardless of whether or not the passive mode has been selected. Y Disarming the system To disarm the system, briefly press the “7 ” button on the transmitter. E Tripped sensor identification The security indicator light flashes when the alarm system has been triggered. AI- so, the number of flashes indicates the lo- cation of unauthorized intrusion or the se- verity of impact on the vehicle. + When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, the indicator light will light for 1 second and then flash as follows: When a door or rear gate (Wagon) or the trunk (Sedan) was opened: 5 times When the ignition switch was turned to the “ON” position: 3 times When a strong impact or multiple im- pacts were sensed: twice (only vehicles with shock sensors (dealer option)) When a light impact was sensed: once (only vehicles with shock sensors (deal- er option)) NOTE Any of the above indicator light flash- ings will recur each time the igniti switch is turned to the “ON” position. Rearming the alarm system cancels the flashing. E Shock sensors (dealer op- tion) The shock sensors trigger the alarm sys- tem when they sense impacts applied to

—+1® Keys and doors 2-17 the vehicle and when any of their electric wires is cut. The alarm system causes the horn to sound and the turn signal lights to flash for a short time when the sensed im- pact is weak, but it warns of a strong im- pact or multiple impacts by sounding the hom and flashing the turn signal lights, both lasting approximately 30 seconds. If you desire, your SUBARU dealer can connect them and set them for activation or deactivation. NOTE + The shock sensors are not always able to sense impacts caused by breaking in, and cannot sense an im- PS pact that does not cause vibration (such as breaking the glass using a rescue hammer). + The shock sensors may sense vibra- tion like those shown in the following and trigger the alarm system. Select the settings of the alarm system and shock sensors appropriately depend- ing on where you usually park your ve- hicle. Example: Vibration from construction site Vibration in multistory car park Vibration from trains + You can have the sensitivity of the shock sensors adjusted to your prefer- ence by your SUBARU dealer. nil

KP AT9OOBE-A book Page 18 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 2-18 keys and doors Y Driver’s side switches Child safety locks Windows EH Power windows [ A WARNING | To avoid serious personal injury caused by entrapment, you must do the following. + When operating the power win- dows, be extremely careful to pre- vent anyone’s fingers, arms, neck or head from being caught in the window. Always lock the passengers’ win- 2)

Lock switch For driver's window (with one-touch auto

Each rear door has a child safety lock that prevents the doors from being opened even if the inside door handle is pulled. dows using the lock switch when children are riding in the vehicle. Before leaving the vehicle, always doun feature)

3) For front passenger's window

4) For rear left window

When the child safety lock lever is in the lock position, the door cannot be opened from inside regardiess of the position of the inner door handle lock lever. The door can only be opened from the outside. remove the key from the ignition 5) For rear right window switch for safety and never allow an unattended child to remain in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the power win- dow. All door windows can be controlled by the power window switch cluster at the driver side door. A WARNING Always use the child safety lock whenever a child rides in the rear seat. Serious injury could result if a child accidentally opened the door and fell out. The power windows operate only when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

e||4… KŸ7 AI900BE-A.book Page 19 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

V Operating the driver’s window Ÿÿ !

To open: Push the switch down lightly and hold it. The window will open as long as the switch is held. This switch also has a one-touch auto down feature that allows the window to be opened fully without holding the switch. Push the switch down until it clicks and re- lease it, and the window will fully open. To stop the window halfway, pull the switch up lightly. To close: Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The window will close as long as the switch is held. V Operating the passengers’ windows

To open the passengers’ windows, push the appropriate switch down and hold it until the window reaches the desired posi- tion. To close the window, pull the switch up and hold it until it reaches the desired po- sition.

—+1® Keys and doors 2-19 V Locking the passengers’ windows

To lock the passengers’ windows, push the lock switch. When the lock switch is in the “LOCK” position, the passengers’ win- dows cannot be opened or closed. Press the switch again to cancel the pas- sengers’ window locking. Y Passengers’ side switches To open the window, push the switch down and hold it until the window reaches the desired position. To close the window, pull the switch up and hold it until the window reaches the desired position. When the lock switch on the power win- — CONTINUED - nil

KP AT90OBE-A book Page 20 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 2-20 keys and doors dow switch cluster, located on the driver's side door, is in the “LOCK” position, the passengers’ windows cannot be operated with the passengers' switches. Trunk lid (Sedan) À WARNING M To open and close the trunk lid from outside ° To prevent dangerous exhaust gas from entering the vehicle, al- ways keep the trunk lid closed while driving. Help prevent young children from locking themselves in the trunk. When leaving the vehicle, either close all windows and lock all doors or cancel the inside trunk lid release. Also make certain that the trunk is closed. On hot or sunny days, the temper- ature in the trunk could quickly become high enough to cause death or serious heat-related inju- ries including brain damage to anyone locked inside, particularly for small children. To open the trunk lid from outside, insert the key and turn it clockwise. To close the trunk lid, lightly press the trunk lid down until the latch engages.

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page 21 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM Æ To open the trunk lid from in- side BTo cancel the trunk lid re- lease

Pull the trunk lid release lever upward. The inside trunk lid release can be can- celled to prevent unauthorized entry into the trunk. To cancel the trunk lid release, set the lid release cancel lever (located on the inside of the trunk lid, mounted to the trunk lid latch) to the “CANCEL" position. When this lock is in the “CANCEL" posi- tion, the trunk can be opened only with the key. internal trunk lid release han- dle The internal trunk lid release handle is a device designed to open the trunk lid from inside the trunk. In the event children or

Keys and doors 2-21 adults become locked inside the trunk, the handle allows them to open the lid. The handle is located on the inside of the trunk lid.

To open the trunk lid from inside the trunk, press the yellow handle downward as indi- cated by the arrow on the handle. This operation unlocks the trunk lid. Then, push up the lid. The handle is made of material that re- mains luminescent for approximately an hour in the dark trunk space after it is ex- posed to ambient light even for a short time. — CONTINUED — nil

KP AT9OOBE-A book Page 22 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 2-22 keys and doors [ A WARNING Never allow any child to get in the trunk and play with the release han- de. If the driver starts the vehicle without knowing that a child is in- side the trunk and the child opens the lid using the release handle, the child could fall out and be killed or seriously injured. ACAUTION + Do not close the lid while gripping the release handle. The handle may be damaged. Do not use the handle as a hook to fasten straps or ropes to secure your cargo in the trunk. Such use may result in damage of the han- dle. Load the trunk so that cargo can not strike the release handle. Ifthe cargo hits the handle while the ve- hicle is being driven, the handle may be pushed down and the trunk lid may open. That may cause cargo to fall out of the trunk, which could create a traffic safety hazard. Y Inspection Perform the following steps at least twice a year to check the release handle for cor- rect operation.

2. Use a screwdriver with a thin blade.

Slide the screwdriver blade from the slit aperture of the lock assembly fully to the end until you hear a click.

3. Move the release handle, from outside

the vehicle, in the direction of the arrow to check if the latch is released. If the latch is not released, contact your

e||4… KŸ7 AI900BE-A.book Page 23 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

SUBARU dealer. In that case, use the key to release the latch, then close the trunk lid. Also, if the movement of the release han- die feels restricted or not entirely smooth during operation, or the handle and/or handle base is cracked, contact your SUBARU dealer. Rear gate (Wagon)

The rear gate can be locked and unlocked using either the keyless entry system or the power door locking switches. Refer to the “Power door locking switches” and “Remote keyless entry system” sec- tions in this chapter. To open the rear gate, first unlock the rear gate lock then pull the outside handle up. Then, hold the rear gate and raise it as high as it will go.

Keys and doors 2-23 To close the rear gate, lower it slowly and push down firmly until the latch engages. The rear gate can be lowered easily if you pull down on the recessed grip. À WARNING ° To prevent dangerous exhaust gas from entering the vehicle, al- ways keep the rear gate closed while driving. Do not attempt to shut the rear gate while holding the recessed grip. Also avoid closing the rear gate by pulling on the recessed grip from inside the cargo space. There is a danger of your hand be- ing caught and injured. — CONTINUED — nil

e||4… KŸ7 AI900BE-A.book Page 24 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

2-24 keys and doors [ À CAUTION | ° Do not jam a plastic bag in or place cellophane tape on the rear gate stays or scratch the stays while loading or unloading cargo. That could cause leakage of gas from the stays, which may result in their inability to hold the rear gate open. Be careful not to hit your head or face on the rear gate when open- ing or closing the rear gate and when loading or unloading cargo. NOTE If the rear gate cannot be unlocked due to a discharged battery, a fault in the door locking/unlocking system or oth- er causes, you can unlock it by manu- ally operating the rear gate lock release lever. For the procedure, refer to “Rear gate — if the rear gate cannot be unlocked” in

chapter 9 “In case of emergency”.

Moonroof (if equipped) The moonroof has both tilting and sliding functions. The moonroof operates only when the ig- nition switch is in the “ON” position. Tilt function Release the switch after the moonroof has been raised or has been lowered com- pletely. Pushing the switch continuously may cause damage to the moonroof. H Sliding function

The tilting function will only operate when the moonroof is fully closed. Push the rear side of the “Tilt” switch to raise the moonroof. Push the front side of the “Tilt” switch to lower the moonroof.

Push the “Open/Close” switch rearward to open the moonroof. The sun shade will also be opened together with the moon- roof. Push the “Open/Close” switch forward to close the moonroof. The moonroof will stop halfway if you continue to press on the switch. Release the switch once and push it again to close the moonroof com- pletely.

Keys and doors 2-25 After washing the vehicle or after it rains, + Before leaving the vehicle, always The sun shade can be slid forward or wipe away water on the roof prior to open- remove the key from the ignition backward by hand while the moonroof is ing the moonroof to prevent drops of water switch for safety and never allow closed. from falling into the passenger compart- an unattended child to remain in If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade ment. the vehicle. Failure to follow this also moves back. NOTE procedure could result in injury to If the moonroof cannot be closed a child operating the moonroof. through switch operation because of system failure, it can be closed manu- ÂACAUTION ally using a hex-head wrench. For the procedure, refer to “Moonroo! the moonroof cannot be closed” section in

chapter 9 “In case of emergency”.

Do not sit on the edge of the open moonroof. Do not operate the moonroof if falling snow or extremely cold PS À WARNING conditions have caused it to \ freeze shut. + Never let anyone’s hands, arms, head or any objects protrude from EÆ Sun shades the moonroof. A person could be seriously injured if the vehicle stops suddenly or turns sharply or if the vehicle is involved in an accident. To avoid serious personal injury caused by entrapment, you must do the following. Before closing the moonroof, make sure that no one’s hands, arms, head or other objects will be accidentally caught in the moon- roof. SA SA

KP AT90OBE-A book Page 1 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM Ignition switch LOCK ACC. START Key reminder cl Ignition switch light . Key interlock release (AT veh Hazard warning flasher Meters and gauges (WRX-STI) Combination meter illumination Cancelling sequential illumination of the combination meter $+ Speedometer … Odometer/Trip meter Tachometer . Fuel gauge Temperature gauge . Outside temperature indicator REV indicator light and buzzer (WRX-STI) . Setting the alarm-level engine speed Deactivating the REV alarm system . Meters and gauges (Except WRX-STI) . Speedometer … Odometer/Trip meter Tachometer . Fuel gauge Temperature gauge . Outside temperature indicator

Instruments and controls Warning and indicator lights Seatbelt warning light and chime SRS airbag system warning light Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators CHECK ENGI indicator lamp Charge warning light Oil pressure warning light AT OIL TEMPerature warning light (AT vehicles) . Rear differential oil temperature warning light (WRX-STI) ABS warning light Brake system warning Door open warning light . AlI-Wheel Drive warning light (AWD AT vehicles — if equipped) . Intercooler water spray warning light (WRX-STI) Selector lever position indicator (AT vehicles) Turn signal indicator lights High beam indicator light Cruise control indicator ligl Cruise control set indicator light . Driver’s control center differential auto indicator light (WRX-STI) Driver’s control center differential indicator an warning lights (WRX-STI) … Headlight indicator light (WRX-STI) REV indicator light (WRX-STI) . 3-14 3-14 3-15 3-15

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 2 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM Instruments and controls Clock … Light control switch Headlights ….. High/low beam change (dimmer) Headlight flasher Daytime running Turn signal lever Illumination brightness control Headlight beam leveler (U.S.-spec. WRX-STI) . Parking light switch … Front fog light button (if equipped) Wiper and washer …. Windshield wiper and washer switches . Rear window wiper and washer switch — Wagon .… Rear window defogger button Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped) .… Intercooler water spray switch (WRX-STI) . Mirrors … Inside mirror Outside mirrors Tilt steering wheel Horn …. 3-22 3-22 3-22 3-23 3-23 3-23 3-24 3-25 3-25 3-25 3-26 3-26 3-27 3-28 3-29 3-30 3-31 3-32 3-32 3-33 3-35 3-35

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page 3 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

Ignition switch | 300564 The ignition switch has four positions: LOCK, ACC, ON and START. ELOCK The key can only be inserted or removed in this position. The ignition switch will lock the steering wheel when you remove the key. If turning the key is difficult, turn the steer- ing wheel slightly to the right and left as you turn the key. —+1®

Instruments and controls 3-3 Y Automatic transmission vehicles Y Manual transmission vehicles

J | The key can be turned from “ACC” to A “LOCK” only when the key is pushed in D

The key can be turned from “ACC” to “LOCK” only when the selector lever is in the “P” position.

while turning it. À WARNING + Never turn the ignition switch to “LOCK” while the vehicle is being driven or towed because that will lock the steering wheel, prevent- ing steering control. And when the engine is turned off, it takes a much greater effort than usual to steer. — CONTINUED — nil

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 4 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 3-4instruments and controls + Before leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the ignition switch for safety and never allow an unattended child to remain the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child or others. Children could operate the power windows, the sunroof or other controls or even make the vehicle move. NOTE + Keep the ignition switch in the “LOCK” position when the engine is not running. + Using electrical accessories for a long time with th. ion switch in the “ON” or “ACC” position can cause the battery to go dead. Ifthe ignition switch will not move from the “LOCK” position to the “ACC” po- sition, turn the steering wheel slightly to the left and right as you turn the ig- nition switch. + Ifthe key is attached to a keyholder or to a large bunch of other keys, cen- trifugal force may act on it as the vehi- cle moves, resulting in unwanted turn- ing of the ignition switch. Also, if a large keyholder is attached to the key, your knees or hands may accidentally touch it in a way that turns the ignition

switch. HACC In this position the electrical accessories (radio, cigarette lighter, etc.) can be used. HON This is the normal operating position after the engine is started. HE START The engine is started in this position. The starter cranks the engine to start it. When the key is released (after the engine has started), the key automatically returns to the “ON” position. À CAUTION | Do not turn the ignition switch to the “START” position while the engine is running. Y For vehicle with immobilizer If your registered key fails to start the en- gine, pull out the key once (the security in- dicator light will blink), and then insert the key in the ignition switch and turn it to the “START" position and again try to start the engine.

NOTE The engine may not start in the follow- ing cases:

+ The key grip is touching another key or a metallic key holder.

| à & 97 AID0OBE-A.book Page 5 Friday, June 17, 200$ 5:40 PM

+ The key is near another key that con- tains an immobilizer transponder. H Key reminder chime The reminder chime sounds when the driver's door opens and the key is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” positions. The chime stops when the key is removed from the ignition switch. Mignition switch light For easy access to the ignition switch in the dark, the ignition switch light comes on when driver's door is opened. The light re- mains on for 10 seconds and goes out af- ter driver's door is closed or if the key is turned to the “ON” position. Æ Key interlock release (AT ve- hicles only) If the key can not be turned to the “LOCK” position even when the selector lever is in the “P” position:

1. Take out the screwdriver from the tool

2. Remove the cover under the steering

3. Turn the ignition key while pressing the

key interlock release lever. Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU

Instruments-and controls 3-5 dealer immediately to have the key inter- lock system repaired.

1 à KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 6 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

3-Ginstruments and controls Hazard warning flasher Meters and gauges (WRX- STI)

The hazard warning flasher is used to warn other drivers when you have to park your vehicle under emergency conditions. The hazard warning flasher works with the ignition switch in any position. To turn on the hazard warning flasher, push the hazard warning button on the in- strument panel. To turn off the flasher, push the button again. NOTE When the hazard warning flasher is on, the turn signals do not work. EH Combination meter illumina- tion When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, the various parts of the combination meter are illuminated in the following sequence:

1. Meter needles and gauge needles light

2. Meter needles and gauge needles

each show MAX position.

3. Meter needles and gauge needles

each show MIN position, and REV indica- tor flashes.

4. Dials and indicators in meters and

5. “STI” mark lights up.

6. Regular illumination (for driving) be-

gins. H Cancelling sequential illumi- nation of the combination meter With the ignition switch in the “ON” posi- tion, it is possible to cancel sequential illu- mination of the combination meter. Press the trip knob while turning the REV setting knob clockwise or counterclock-

wise. The buzzer will sound briefly, and the outside temperature indicator will show “ON” or “——". ON : sequential illumination —-: sequential illumination cancelled The setting toggles between “ON” and “- —" each time the trip knob is pressed. Return the REV setting knob to its original position to complete the setting process. The buzzer will sound briefly. À few sec- onds later, the outside temperature indica- tor will return to showing the outside tem- perature. NOTE It is not possible to cancel sequential illumination of the combination meter while sequential illumination is actual- ly taking place. Cancel sequential illu- mination when regular illumination (for driving) has begun. H Speedometer The speedometer shows the vehicle speed.

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 7 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM H Odometer/Trip meter

This meter displays the odometer and two trip meters when the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”, “ACC” or “ON” position. If you press the trip knob when the ignition switch is in the “LOCK” position, the odometer/trip meter will light up. It is pos- sible switch between the A trip meter and B trip meter indications while the odome- ter/trip meter is lit up. If you do not press the trip knob within 10 seconds ofillumina- tion of the odometer/trip meter, the odom- eter/trip meter will go off. Y Odometer The odometer shows the total distance that the vehicle has been driven. Y Double trip meter

The trip meter shows the distance that the vehicle has been driven since you last set it to zero. To change the mode indication, briefly push the knob. Each press of the knob changes the func- tion alternately. Atrip meter —%> B trip meter To set the trip meter to zero, select the A trip or B trip meter by pushing the knob and keep the knob pushed for more than 2 seconds.

Instruments-and controls 3-7 ÂÀCAUTION | To ensure safety, do not attempt to change the function of the indicator during driving, as an accident could result. NOTE If the connection between the combi- nation meter and battery is broken for any reason such as vehicle mainte- nance or fuse replacement, the data re- corded on the trip meter will be lost. BH Tachometer The tachometer shows the engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute. ÂÀCAUTION Do not operate the engine with the pointer of the tachometer in the red zone. In this range, fuel injection will be cut by the engine control module to protect the engine from overrev- ving. The engine will resume run- ning normally after the engine speed is reduced below the red zone. — CONTINUED —

KT AT90OBE-A book Page 8 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 3-8 instruments and controls H Fuel gauge

The fuel gauge shows the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the tank. When the ignition switch is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position, the fuel gauge shows “E” even if the fuel tank contains fuel. The gauge may move slightly during brak- ing, turning or acceleration due to fuel lev- el movement in the tank.

You will see the “ m»> ” sign in the fuel gauge meter. This indicates that the fuel filler door (lid) is located on the right side of the vehicle. Y Low fuel warning light The low fuel warning light comes on when the tank is nearly empty [Approximately

2.3 US gal (9.0 liters, 1.9 Imp gal)].

It only operates when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. NOTE This light does not go out unless the tank is replenished up to an internal fuel quantity of approximately 4.0 US gal (15 liters, 3.3 Imp gal).

ÂCAUTION Promptly put fuel in the tank when- ever the low fuel warning light comes on. Engine misfires as a re- sult of an empty tank could cause damage to the engine. H Temperature gauge S= |

1) Normal operating range

The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. The coolant temperature will vary in ac- cordance with the outside temperature and driving conditions.

1 à KP AT9OOBE-A book Page 9 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

We recommend that you drive moderately until the pointer of the temperature gauge reaches near the middle of the range. En- gine operation is optimum with the engine coolant at this temperature range and high revving operation when the engine is not warmed up enough should be avoided. À CAUTION ] If the pointer exceeds the normal operating range, safely stop the ve- hicle as soon as possible. See the “In case of emergency” in

1) U.S.-spec. models

2) Canada-spec. models

The outside temperature indicator shows the outside temperature in a range from — 22 to 122°F (30 to 50°C). The indicator can give a false reading un- der any of the following conditions: + When there is too much sun.

• During idling; while running at low speeds in a traffic jam; when the engine is restarted immediately following a shut- down. + When the actual outside temperature falls outside the specified indicator range.

Instruments and controls 3-9 REV indicator light and buzz- er (WRX-STI) 3 x1000#min “6: 200239 & The REV alarm system issues a warning using the REV indicator light (and a buzz- er if additionally selected) when the en- gine speed reaches a level previously set using the REV setting knob. If you press the trip knob when the ignition switch is in the “LOCK” position, the out- side temperature indicator will show the engine speed that has already been set. NOTE Even if the REV alarm system is not set, the REV indicator light will come on whenever the engine speed enters the tachometer's red zone. — CONTINUED — nil

e||4… KŸ7 AI900BE-A.book Page 10 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

3-10 instruments and controls H Setting the alarm-level en- gine speed

1. Turn the REV setting knob clockwise or

counterclockwise, then release it and let it return to its initial position. The buzzer will sound. The REV alarm system is now ready to be set.

2. Turn the REV setting knob to select the

desired alarm-level engine speed. At this time, the outside temperature indi- cator will show the engine-speed setting. + Counterclockwise (-) for less than 0.5 second: Speed setting changes down- ward by 100 rpm. + Clockwise (+) for less than 0.5 sec- ond: Speed setting changes upward by 100 rpm. + Counterclockwise (-) for 0.5 second or longer: Speed setting changes down- ward by 1,000 rpm. + Clockwise (+) for 0.5 second or long- er: Speed setting changes upward by 1,000 rpm. The speed setting will stop changing if it reaches 0 rpm or the maximum engine speed. <Selectable engine speed range> The alarm-level engine speed can be set (in 100 rpm steps) within a range from 2,000 to 7,500 rpm. The indicator shows the setting as follows: Speed (rpm) Indication 2,000 20 2,100 21 7,400 74 7,500 75 Approximately three seconds after you stop turning the knob, the REV alarm sys- tem will automatically enter its next setting mode (step 3 below), in which you can ac- tivate or deactivate the buzzer.

3. Activate or deactivate the buzzer as

desired using the REV setting knob. + Tum the knob clockwise (+) to acti- vate the buzzer. The indicator will show “ON”, and the buzzer will sound three times. With the buzzer activated, en- gine-speed warnings are given by both the REV indicator light and the buzzer. + Turn the knob counterclockwise (—) to deactivate the buzzer. The indicator will show “— —", and the buzzer will not sound. With the buzzer deactivated, en- gine-speed warnings are given only by the REV indicator light. Approximately three seconds after you stop turning the knob, the buzzer will sound once to indicate the end of the set- ting procedure. The indicator will return to showing the outside temperature. Also, the tachometer needle will return to approximately “0”. NOTE + The REV alarm system does not op- erate while settings are being entered. + The speed-setting mode terminates if 0 rpmis selected. + The speed-setting mode is canceled ifthe ignition switch is turned to OFF or the vehicle starts moving before the setting procedure is finished. + Speed setting is impossible when

KP AT90OBE-A book Page 11 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM the vehicle is moving. + The set engine speed may differ from the engine speed shown by the ta- chometer. Use the engine speed shown by the tachometer as a rough guide. Deactivating the REV alarm system To deactivate the REV alarm system's REV indicator light and buzzer functions, set the alarm-level engine speed to 0 (ze- ro) rpm. Meters and gauges (Except WRX-STI) HE Speedometer The speedometer shows the vehicle speed. HE Odometer/Trip meter

This meter displays the odometer and two trip meters when the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”, “ACC” or “ON” position. Y Odometer The odometer shows the total distance that the vehicle has been driven.

The trip meter shows the distance that the vehicle has been driven since you last set it to zero. To change the mode indication, briefly push the knob. Each press of the knob changes the func- tion alternately. Atrip meter + B trip meter To set the trip meter to zero, select the A trip or B trip meter by pushing the knob and keep the knob pushed for more than 2 seconds. — CONTINUED —

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 12 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 3-12 instruments and controls [ À CAUTION H Fuel gauge NOTE To ensure safety, do not attempt to change the function of the indicator during driving, as an accident could result. NOTE If the connection between the combi- nation meter and battery is broken for any reason such as vehicle mainte- nance or fuse replacement, the data re- corded on the trip meter will be lost. H Tachometer The tachometer shows the engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute.

ACAUTION Do not operate the engine with the pointer of the tachometer in the red zone. In this range, fuel injection will be cut by the engine control module to protect the engine from overrev- ving. The engine will resume run- ning normally after the engine speed is reduced below the red zone.

The fuel gauge shows the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the tank. The gauge does not return to “E” even though the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. The gauge may move slightly during brak- ing, turning or acceleration due to fuel lev- el movement in the tank. You will see the “FUEL DOOR :- ” sign near the fuel gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler door (lid) is located on the right side of the vehicle. Y Low fuel warning light The low fuel warning light comes on when the tank is nearly empty [approximately

2.3 US gal (9.0 liters, 1.9 Imp gal]. It only

operates when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. NOTE This light does not go out unless the tank is replenished up to an internal fuel quantity of approximately 4.0 US gal (15 liters, 3.3 Imp gal).

d di|æ #7 A1900BE-A.book Page 13 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM n 41 Instruments and controls 3-13 | À CAUTION and driving conditions. HE Outside temperature indica- We recommend that you drive moderately tor (Turbo model only) until the pointer of the temperature gauge Promptly put fuel in the tank when- reaches near the middle of the range. En- 1 ever the low fuel warning light gine operation is optimum with the engine - comes on. Engine misfires as a re- coolant at this temperature range and high OUT.TEMP sult of an empty tank could cause revving operation when the engine is not | Fa & "É | damage to the engine. warmed up enough should be avoided. = M Temperature gauge ÂCAUTION | OUT TEMP If the pointer exceeds the normal | es °C operating range, safely stop the ve- = _— hicle as soon as possible. 7 > See “In case of emergency” in chap- er î ter 9. 1) U.S.-spec. models

2) Canada-spec. models

1 The outside temperature indicator shows the outside temperature in a range from — 22 to 122°F (-30 to 50°C). The indicator can give a false reading un- 300620 der any of the following conditions:

1) Normal operating range ° When there 1s ton much sun.

+ During idling; while running at low The temperature gauge shows engine speeds in a traffic jam; when the engine is coolant temperature when the ignition restarted immediately following a shut- switch is in the “ON” position. down. + When the actual outside temperature The coolant temperature will vary in ac- falls outside the specified indicator range. cordance with the outside temperature > PS > SA

1 à KT AISOOBE-A-G03.fm Page 14 Wednesday, June 22, 2005 9:45 AM

3-14-nstruments and controls Warning and indicator lights Several of the warning and indicator lights come on momentarily and then go out when the ignition switch is initially turned to the “ON” position. This permits check- ing the operation of the bulbs. Apply the parking brake and turn the igni- tion switch to the “ON” position. The fol- lowing lights come on: Seatbelt warning light SRS airbag system warning light Front passenger's frontal airbag ON in- dicator light Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator light CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal- function indicator lamp Charge warning light Oil pressure warning light AT OIL temperature warning light (AT vehicles) ABS warning light Brake system warning light All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT vehi- cles) Cruise control indicator light (if equipped) Cruise control set indicator light (if equipped) If any lights fail to come on, it indicates a burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the corresponding system. Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer for repair. H Seatbelt warning light 1 and chime e Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt warning device at the driver's seat, as re- quired by current safety standards. There is a seatbelt warning light in the combina- tion meter. If the driver has not yet fastened the seat- belt when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, the seatbelt warning light will flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the seatbelt is unfastened. If the driver's seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will also sound simultaneously. If the driver's seatbelt is still not fastened 6 seconds later, the warning light will re- main lit for 15 seconds. lfthe driver's seat- belt is still not fastened even 15 seconds later (21 seconds after turning ON the ig- nition switch), the warning lights will alter- nate between flashing and steady illumi- nation at 15-second intervals, and the chime will sound while the warning light is flashing. Alternate flashing and steady illumination of the warning lights and sounding of the

chime will continue until the driver fastens the seatbelt. NOTE + Ifthe driver unfastens the seatbelt af- ter fastening, the seatbelt warning de- vice operates as follows according to the vehicle speed. + At speeds lower than approximate- ly 9 mph (15 km/h) The warning light will alternate be- tween flashing and steady illumina- tion at 15-second intervals. The chime will not sound. + At speeds higher than approxi- mately 9 mph (15 km/h) The warning light will alternate be- tween flashing and steady illumina- tion at 15-second intervals and the chime will sound while the warning light is flashing. + Itis possible to cancel the warning operation that follows the 6-second warning after turning ON the ignition switch by unfastening and refastening the driver’s seatbelt. When the ignition switch is turned ON next time, howev- er, the complete sequence of the warn- ing operation resumes. For further de- tails about canceling the warning oper- ation, please contact your SUBARU dealer. —+1® nil

KP AT90OBE-A book Page 15 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM ESRS airbag system warning light When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, the SRS airbag system warning light will come on for approxi- mately six seconds and go out. This shows the SRS airbag and SRS side air- bag (if equipped) and seatbelt pretension- ers are in normal operation. AIR BAG [ A WARNING | If the warning light exhibits any of the following conditions, there may 7 be a malfunction in the seatbelt pre- L4 tensioners and/or SRS airbag sys- tem. immediately take your vehicle to your nearest SUBARU dealer to have the system checked. Unless checked and properly repaired, the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbag will not operate properly in the event of a collision, which may increase the risk of injury. e Flashing or flickering of the indi- cator light ° No illumination of the warning light when the ignition switch is first turned to the “ON” position inuous illumination of the n of the warning light while driving Front passenger's frontal air- bag ON and OFF indicators one" @f, : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ms ONindicator Be #2 : Front passengerss frontal airbag OFF indicator The front passenger's frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators show you the status of the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag. The indicators are located next to the clock in the center portion of the dash- board.

—+1® Instruments and controls 3-15 When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, both the ON and OFF indi- cators illuminate for 6 seconds during which time the system is checked. Follow- ing the system check, both indicators ex- tinguish for 2 seconds. After that, one of the indicators illuminates depending on the status of the front passengers SRS frontal airbag determined by the Subaru advanced frontal airbag system monitor- ing. Ifthe front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated, the passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF indicator will remain extinguished. Ifthe front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag is deactivated, the passenger's frontal air- bag ON indicator will remain extinguished while the OFF indicator will illuminate. With the ignition switch turned to the “ON” position, if both the ON and OFF indica- tors remain lit or extinguished simulta- neously even after the system check peri- od, the system is faulty. Contact your SUBARU dealer immediately for an in- spection. — CONTINUED —

1 à KP AT90OBE-A book Page 16 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 3-16 instruments and controls HE CHECK ENGINE warn- ng light/Malfunction in- dicator lamp CHECK ENGINE ÂÀCAUTION If the CHECK ENGINE light comes on while you are driving, have your vehicle checked/repaired by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possi- ble. Continued vehicle operation Without having the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could cause serious damage, which may not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty. If this light comes on steadily or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate that there is a problem or potential prob- lem somewhere in the emission control system. Y lfthe light comes on steadily: If the light comes on steadily while driving or does not go out after the engine starts, an emission control system malfunction has been detected. You should have your vehicle checked by an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi- ately. NOTE This light also comes on when the fuel filler cap is not tightened until it clicks. If you have recently refueled your vehicle, the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator lamp coming on could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap. Remove the cap and retighten it until it clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE warning light turn off immediately. It may take several driving trips. lf the light does not go out, take your vehicle to your au- thorized SUBARU dealer immediately. Y lfthe light is blinking: If the light is blinking while driving, an en- gine misfire condition has been detected which may damage the emission control system. To prevent serious damage to the emis- sion control system, you should do the fol- lowing. + Reduce vehicle speed. + Avoid hard acceleration. + Avoid steep uphill grades. + Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi- ble. + Stop towing a trailer as soon as pos- sible.

The CHECK ENGINE warning light may stop blinking and come on steadily after several driving trips. You should have your vehicle checked by an authorized SUBARU dealer immediately. M Charge warning light [ If this light comes on when the engine is running, it may indicate that the charging system is not working properly. If the light comes on while driving or does not go out after the engine starts, stop the engine at the first safe opportunity and check the alternator belt. lf the belt is loose, broken or if the belt is in good con- dition but the light remains on, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer immediate- ly. M Oil pressure warning 7 light If this light comes on when the engine is running, it may indicate that the engine oil pressure is low and the lubricating system is not working properly. If the light comes on while driving or does not go out after the engine starts, stop the engine at the first safe opportunity and check the engine oil level. If the oil level is low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil —+1®

KP AT90OBE-A book Page 17 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM is at the proper level but the light remains on, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer immediately. A CAUTION ] Do not operate the engine with the oil pressure warning light on. This may cause serious engine damage. B AT OIL TEMPerature AT OIL warning light (AT vehi- TEMP cles) The AT oil temperature warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position and goes out after approximately two seconds. If this light comes on when the engine is running, it may indicate that the automatic transmission fluid temperature is too hot. Ifthe light comes on while driving, it is un- necessary to stop the vehicle, but avoid driving up steep grades or in stop and go traffic. Y Automatic transmission control system warning If the light flashes after the engine starts, it may indicate that the automatic trans- mission control system is not working properly. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer for service immediately. B Rear differential oil tem- RDIFF perature warning light (WRX-STI) [ À CAUTION Reduce vehicle speed and park the vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible if the R.DIFF TEMP light comes on. Continued driving with this light on can damage the rear dif- ferential and other parts of the pow- ertrain. If this light comes on when the engine is running, it may indicate that the rear differ- ential oil temperature is too hot. At this time, the driver's control center dif- ferential will automatically cancel the cur- rent torque-distribution ratio setting and adopts its minimum ratio. If the light comes on while driving, reduce vehicle speed and stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place. Park the vehicle for several minutes. After the light goes out, you can start driving. If the light does not go out, contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for service.

Instruments and controls 3-17 NOTE + If the tire pressures are not correct and/or the tires are not all the same size and brand, the rear differential will be heavily loaded when the vehicle is driven, resulting in an abnormally high oil temperature. + The rear differential oil will deterio- rate if its temperature increases enough for the rear differential oil tem- perature warning light to come on. It is advisable to have the rear differential oil replaced as soon as possible. ABS (U.S.) HABS warninglight (&) (Canada) The ABS warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi- tion and goes out after approximately two seconds. This is an indication that the ABS system is working properly. ÂCAUTION If the warning light behaves as fol- lows, the ABS system may not work properly. When the warning light is on, the ABS function shuts down; however, the conventional brake system con- tinues to operate normally. — CONTINUED —

KP AT9OOBE-A book Page 18 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 3-18 instruments and controls + The warning light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position. The warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, but it does not go out even when the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 8 mph (12 km/h). The warning light comes on dur- ing driving. If any of these conditions occur, have the ABS system repaired at the first available opportunity by your SUBARU dealer. With a vehicle equipped with an EBD sys- tem, the ABS warning light comes on to- gether with the brake system warning light ifthe EBD system becomes faulty. For fur- ther details of the EBD system fault warn- ing, refer to “Brake system warning light”. NOTE If the warning light behavior is as de- scribed in the following, the ABS sys- tem may be considered normal. + The warning light comes on right af- ter the engine is started but goes out immediately, remaining off. + The warning light remains on after

the engine has been started, but it goes out when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 8 mph (12 km/h). + The warning light comes on during driving, but it goes out immediately and remains off. When driving with an insufficient battery voltage such as when the engine is jump started, the ABS warning light may come on. This is due to the low battery voltage and does not indicate a malfunction. When the battery becomes fully charged, the light will go out. BBrake system BRAKE (U.S.) warning light (©) (Canada) A WARNING | + Driving with the brake system war! light on is dangerous. This indicates your brake system may not be working properly. If the light remains on, have the brakes inspected by a SUBARU dealer immediately. If at all in doubt about whether the brakes are operating properly, do not drive the vehicle. Have your vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.

This light has the following three func- tions: Y Parking brake warning The light comes on with the parking brake applied while the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. lt goes out when the park- ing brake is fully released. Y Brake fluid level warning This light comes on when the brake fluid level has dropped to near the “MIN” level ofthe brake fluid reservoir with the ignition switch in the “ON” position and with the parking brake fully released. If the brake system warning light should come on while driving (with the parking brake fully released and with the ignition switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn brake pads. If this occurs, immediately stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid level is below the “MIN” mark in the reser- voir, do not drive the vehicle. Have the ve- hicle towed to the nearest SUBARU deal- er for repair. Y Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system warning (vehicles with ABS) The brake system warning light also illu-

e||4… KŸ7 AI900BE-A.book Page 19 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

minates if a malfunction occurs in the EBD system. In that event, it comes on together With the ABS warning light. The EBD system may be malfunctioning if the brake system warning light and ABS warning light illuminate simultaneously during driving. Even if the EBD system fails, the conven- tional braking system will still function. However, the rear wheels will be more prone to locking when the brakes are ap- plied harder than usual and the vehicle’'s motion may therefore become somewhat harder to control. Ifthe brake system warning light and ABS > n warning light illuminate simultaneously, take the following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, flat

2. Shut down the engine, then restart it.

3. Release the parking brake. If both

warning lights go out, the EBD system may be faulty. Drive carefully to the near- est SUBARU dealer and have the system inspected.

4. If both warning lights come on again

and stay illuminated after the engine has been restarted, shut down the engine again, apply the parking brake, and check the brake fluid level.

5. lf the brake fluid level is not below the

“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be faulty. Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the system in- spected.

6. lf the brake fluid level is below the

“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. In- stead, have the vehicle towed to the near- est SUBARU dealer for repair. H Door open warning light Le) The door open warning light comes on if any door or the rear gate is not fully closed. Always make sure this light is out before you start to drive. HAII-Wheel Drive warn- ing light (AWD AT vehi- cles — if equipped) The All-Wheel Drive warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON position and goes out after approxi- mately two seconds. This light comes on when AIl-Wheel Drive is disengaged and the drive mechanism is switched to Front Wheel Drive for mainte- nance or similar purposes (Non-turbo ve- hicles). It flashes if the vehicle is driven with tires of differing diameters fitted on the wheels or with an excessively low air pressure in

—+1® Instruments and controls 3-19 any of the tires. [ À CAUTION | Continuing to drive with the AWD warning light flashing can damage the powertrain. If the AWD warning light starts to flash, promptly park in a safe place and check whether the tires have differing diameters and whether any of the tires has an ex- cessively low inflation pressure. Hintercooler water C spray warning light SPRAY A (WRX-STI) à This light comes on when the water level in the intercooler water spray tank falls to the lower limit (approximately 0.4 US at,

e||4… KŸ7 AI900BE-A.book Page 20 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

3-20 instruments and controls H Selector lever position indi- cator (AT vehicles)

This indicator shows the position of the selector lever. BE Turn signal indicator lights ++ These lights show the operation of the turn signal or lane change signal. If the indicator lights do not blink or blink rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Refer to the “Replacing bulbs” section in chapter 11. HHigh beam indicator (D) light This light shows that the headlights are in the high beam mode. This indicator light also comes on when the headlight flasher is operated. E Cruise control indica- tor light The cruise control indicator light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position and goes out after approxi- mately three seconds. This light comes on when the “CRUISE" main switch is pressed. If you move the cruise control lever or press the main switch button while turning the ignition switch “ON”, the cruise control function is deactivated and the “CRUISE" indicator light flashes. To reactivate the cruise control function, turn the ignition switch back to the “ACC” or “LOCK” posi- tion, and then turn it again to the “ON” po- sition. CRUISE E Cruise control set indi- cator light The cruise control set indicator light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position and goes out

after approximately three seconds. This light comes on when vehicle speed has been set. H Driver’s control center differential auto indica- tor light (WRX-STI) This light functions while the ignition switch is ON. When on, it indicates that the driver’s control center differential is set to AUTO mode. It goes off when the driv- ers control center differential's manual mode switch is pressed. For details, refer to Chapter 7, “Driver's Control Center Dif- ferential (DCCD) (WRX-STI)".

KT AT90OBE-A book Page 21 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM B Driver’s control center differ- ential indicator and warning lights (WRX-STI) Y Indicator lights eI0)IOIR)IE)

When illuminated, one of these indiator lights indicates the initial limited slip differ- ential (LSD) torque currently selected for the center differential. Y Warning light

The bottom indicator light “ O "’flashes in the event of failure of the driver's control center differential. Have the vehicle in- spected by your SUBARU dealer. For de- tails, refer to Chapter 7, “Drivers Control Center Differential (DCCD) (WRX-STI)". Æ Headlight indicator light (WRX-STI) This light comes on when the headlight switch is placed in the “ 200: ” or “ =D ” position. 300: BREVindicator light (WRX- O STI) This light comes on when the engine

Instruments-and controls 3-21 speed reaches a level set by driver and when the tachometer needle enters the red zone.

3-22 instruments and controls Clock Light control switch BE Headlights The light switch operates only when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. [ A WARNING | To prevent battery discharge result- ing from accidentally leaving your lights on when your vehicle is parked, the light switch operates only when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. In any other posi- EE — tion, the vehicle’s lights will be out. 300127 (300628 n + If you park your vehicle on a road- | | To turn on the headiights, turn the knob on 4 To set the hour, press the “H” button. To side at night, use the hazard warn- the end of the turn signal lever. set the minutes, press the “M” button. To ing flasher to alert the other drivers. . reset the minutes the “00” with a radio time 3002 first position signal, push the “SET” button. Parking lights, instrument panel illumina- tion, tail lights, front side marker lights and ÂÀCAUTION license plate light are on. second position Headlights, parking lights, instrument pan- elillumination, tail lights, and license plate light are on. To ensure safety, do not attempt to set the time while driving, as an ac- cident from inadequate attention to the road could result. eit- +

d di|æ #7 A1900BE-A.book Page 23 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM n 41 Instruments and controls 3-23 ÆHigh/low beam change (dim- mer) Æ Headlight flasher B Daytime running light system Y WRX-STI The low beam headlights, tail lights, park- ing lights, and license plate lights will au- tomatically come on when the engine has started, under the following conditions: + The parking brake is fully released.

• The light switch is in the “OFF” or “ 200 ” position. + The automatic transmission selector le- ver is set at other than the “P” position. 200129 A WARNING The side marker lights are not turned on by the daytime running light system. The light switch must

To flash the headlights, pull the lever to- ward you and then release it. The high beam will stay on for as long as you hold

To change from low beam to high beam, push the turn signal lever forward. When the headlights are on high beam, the high beam indicator light “ © ” on the instru- ment panel is also on. To switch back to low beam, pull the lever back to the detent position. the lever. The headlight flasher works even though the lighting switch is in the “OFF” position. When the headlights are on high beam: the high beam indicator light “ the instrument panel also comes on. ÂÀCAUTION Do not hold the lever in the flashing position for more than just a few seconds.

always be turned to the “ =D ” po- sition when it is dark outside. Y Except WRX-STI The low beam headlights will automatical- ly come on at reduced brightness when the engine has started, under the follow- ing conditions: + The parking brake is fully released.

• The light switch is in the “OFF” or “ :00z ” position. + The automatic transmission selector le- ver is set at other than the “P” position. — CONTINUED —

e||4… KŸ7 AI900BE-A.book Page 24 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

3-24 instruments and controls [ A WARNING The tail lights, parking lights, and side marker lights are not turned on by the daytime running light system. The light switch must always be turned to the “ =0 ” position when it is dark outside. Turn signal lever

To activate the right turn signal, push the turn signal lever up. To activate the left turn signal, push the turn signal lever down. When the turn is finished, the lever will return automatically. If the lever does not return after cornering, return the lever to the neutral position by hand. To signal a lane change, push the turn sig- nal lever up or down slightly and hold it during the lane change. The turn signal in- dicator lights will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change. The lever will re-

turn automatically to the neutral position when you release it.

e||4… KŸ7 AI900BE-A.book Page 25 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

Ilumination brightness con- trol Headlight beam leveler (U.S.- spec. WRX-STI)

Instruments and controls 3-25 Parking light switch

When the headlight switch is in the “ 200 ” or “ EO ” position, you can ad- just brightness of the instrument panel illu- mination for better visibility. To brighten, turn the control dial upward. To darken, turn the control dial downward. The WRX-STI version has High-Intensity Discharge (HID) headlights on the low beam setting. The HID headlights gener- ate more light than conventional halogen headlights. Therefore a driver of an on- coming vehicle may experience too much glare when your headlight beam height adjustment is high due to the vehicle car- rying heavy load. The headlight beam leveler can be used to adjust beam height to avoid such a con- dition. The higher the number the knob is turned to, the lower the beam becomes.

The parking light switch operates regard- less of the ignition switch position. By pushing the front end of this switch, fol- lowing lights will come on. — Parking lights — Front side marker lights — Tail lights — License plate lights To turn off, push the rear end of the park- ing light switch. Avoid leaving these lights on for a long time because that will run down the bat- tery. nil

KT AT90OBE-A book Page 26 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 3-26 instruments and controls Front fog light button (if equipped) Wiper and washer [ A WARNING

The front fog lights operate only when the headlights are on low beam. Push the front fog light button to turn the front fog lights on. Press the button again to turn them off. The indicator light located on the button will illuminate when the front fog lights are on. In freezing weather, do not use the windshield washer until the wind- shield is sufficiently warmed by the defroster. Otherwise the washer fluid can freeze on the windshield, blocking your view. ÂCAUTION + Do not operate the washer contin- uously for more than ten seconds, or when the washer fluid tank is empty. This may cause overheat- ing of the washer motor. Check the washer fluid level frequently, such as at fuel stops. Do not operate the wipers when the windshield or rear window is dry. This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield or rear window, al- ways use the windshield washer. + In freezing weather, be sure that the wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield or rear window be- fore switching on the wipers. At- tempting to operate the wiper with the blades frozen to the window glass could cause not only the wiper blades to be damaged but also the wiper motor to burn out. If the wiper blades are frozen to the window glass, be sure to operate the defroster, windshield wiper deicer (if equipped) or rear win- dow defogger before turning on the wiper. If the wipers stop during opera- tion because of ice or some other obstruction on the window, the wiper motor could burn out even if the wiper switch is turned off. If this occurs, promptly stop the ve- hicle in a safe place, turn the igj tion switch to the “LOCK” po: tion and clean the window glass to allow proper wiper operation.

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 27 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM + Use clean water if windshield washer fluid is unavailable. In ar- eas where water freezes in winter, use SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid or the equivalent. (See the “Windshield washer fluid” section in chapter 11.) Also, when driving the vehicle when there are freezing tempera- tures, use non-freezing type wiper blades. Do not clean the wiper blades with gasoline or a solvent, such as paint thinner or benzene. This will cause deterioration of the wiper blades. NOTE + The wiper operates only when the ig- nition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position. + Clean your wiper blades and window glass periodically with a washer solu- tion to prevent streaking, and to re- move accumulations of road salt or road film. Keep the washer button de- pressed at least for 1 second so that washer solution will be sprinkled all over the windshield or rear window. + Grease, wax, insects or other materi- al on the windshield or the wiper blade results in jerky wiper operation and streaking on the glass. If you cannot remove those streaks after operating the washer or if the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer surface of the windshield or rear window and the wip- er blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abra- sive cleaner. After cleaning, rinse the window glass and wiper blades with clean water. The glass is clean if no beads form on the glass when you rinse with water. + If you cannot eliminate the streaking even after following this procedure, re- place the wiper blades with new ones. Refer to the “Replacement of wiper blades” section (chapter 11) for re- placement instructions.

Instruments and controls 3-27 E Windshield wiper and washer switches Y Windshield wipers OFF ST HI

OFF: Park 2: intermittent LO: Low speed HE: High speed To turn the wipers on, push the wiper con- trol lever down. To turn the wipers off, return the lever to the “OFF” position. — CONTINUED —

1 à KP AT9OOBE-A book Page 28 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

3-28 Instruments and controls Y Wiper intermittent time control Y Mist (for a single wipe)

When the wiper switch is in the “ " po- sition, turn the dial to adjust the operating interval of the wiper. The operating interval can be adjusted in four steps. Two click stop positions of the dial may help you to aim at your desired interval. For a single wipe of the wipers, pull the le- ver toward you. The wipers operate until you release the lever. Y Washer

To wash the windshield, push the washer button at the end of the wiper control le- ver. The washer fluid sprays until you re- lease the washer button. The wipers oper- ate while you push the button. H Rear window wiper and wash- er switch —- Wagon

É _: Washer (accompanied by wiper operation) ON: Normal QFF : Park Washer Y Rear wiper The rear wiper offers intermittent opera- tion only. To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob on the end of the wiper control lever to the nil

e||4… KŸ7 AI900BE-A.book Page 29 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

“ON" position. To turn the wiper off, return the knob on the end of the lever to the “OFF” position. Y Washer To wash the rear window while the rear wiper is operating, turn the knob on the end of the wiper control lever counter- clockwise to the “ ÉÂ ” position. The washer fluid sprays until you release the knob. To wash the rear window when the rear wiper is not in use, turn the knob on the end of the wiper control lever clockwise to the “ à” position. The washer fluid sprays and the wiper operates until you release the knob. Rear window defogger but- ton The rear window defogger operates only when the ignition switch is in the “ON” po- sition. The rear window defogger button is locat- ed on the climate control panel. To turn on the defogger, push the button. To turn it off, push the button again. The indicator light located on the button lights up while the rear window defogger is operating. The defogger will automatically shut off af- ter approximately 15 minutes. If the win- dow clears before that time, push the but- ton to turn it off. It also turns off when the ignition switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK" position. If defrosting or defogging is desired when you restart your vehicle, you have to push the button to turn it on again.

Instruments and controls 3-29

Manual climate control system

Automatic climate control system NOTE + If your vehicle is equipped with the — CONTINUED — nil

KT AT90OBE-A book Page 30 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 3-30 instruments and controls outside mirror defogger, the outside mirror defogger operates while the rear window defogger is operating. + Turn on the rear window defogger if the wiper is frozen to the glass. Â CAUTION | + Do not use sharp instruments or window cleaner containing abra- sives to clean the inner surface of the rear window. They may dam- age the conductors printed on the window. To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not operate the de- fogger continuously for any long- er than necessary. Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)

The windshield wiper deicer operates only when the ignition switch is in the “ON” po- sition. Before turning on the windshield wiper de- icer, remove any snow from the wind- shield. To turn on the windshield wiper de- icer, push the button. The indicator light located on the button lights up while the windshield wiper deicer is operating. The windshield wiper deicer will automati- cally shut off after approximately 15 min- utes. If the windshield wiper blades have been deiced completely before that time, push the button to turn it off. It also turns off when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ACC” or “LOCK” position. If deicing is not complete when you restart your vehicle, you have to push the button to turn the de- icer on again. NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with the out- side mirror defogger, the outside mir- ror defogger operates while the rear window defogger is operating. ÂÀCAUTION To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not operate the windshield wiper deicer continuous- ly for any longer than necessary.

d di|æ (#7 A1900BE-A.book Page 31 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM n 41 Instruments-and controls 3-31 Intercooler water spray NOTE | À CAUTION | switch (WRX-STI) Do not press the switch when the Pressing this switch causes water to be warning light is illuminated. If the sprayed into the intercooler. lt can be switch is kept pressed when the used to help maintain adequate intercool- tank is short of water, the water er performance when the outside temper- pump motor could overheat. ature is high. PSS + The intercooler water spray warning 4 light comes on when the water level in the tank has dropped to the lower limit. If the warning light illuminates, refill the tank with water. The tank is located on the right-hand side of the trunk. For 300825 the tank refilling method, refer to the Water is sprayed for approximately two | “intercooler water spray (WRX-STI)” seconds every time the switch is pressed | Section in chapter 11. and then released. + In cold weather (when you do not use the intercooler water spray), keep the tank half-empty or below in case the water freezes. À larger amount of water could break the tank if it froze. > PS > SA et. + “til

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page 32 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 3-32 instruments and controls Mirrors Always check that the inside and outside mirrors are properly adjusted before you start driving. inside mirror

The inside mirror has a day and night po- sition. Pull the tab at the bottom of the mir- ror toward you for the night position. Push it away for the day position. The night po- sition reduces glare from headlights. Y Auto-dimming mirror/compass (if equipped)

The inside electronic compass mirror has an anti-glare feature which automatically reduces glare coming from headlights of vehicles behind you. It also contains a built-in compass. + By pressing and releasing the left but- ton, the automatic dimming function is tog- gled on or off. When the automatic dim- ming function is on, the auto dimming indi- cator light (green) located to the right of the button will illuminate. + By pressing and releasing the right but-

ton, the compass display is toggled on or off. When the compass is on, an illuminat- ed compass reading will appear in the lower part of the mirror. Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode, the mirror surface turns bright if the trans- mission is shifted into reverse. This is to ensure good rearward visibility during re- versing. V Photosensors

The mirror has a photosensor attached on both the front and back sides. If the glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you strikes the mirror, these sensors detect it and make the reflection surface of the mir- ror dimmer to help prevent you from being blinded. For this reason, use care not to

1 à KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 33 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

cover the sensors with stickers, or other similar items. Periodically wipe the sen- sors clean using a piece of dry soft cotton cloth or an applicator. V Compass calibration

1. For optimum calibration, switch off all

nonessential electrical accessories (rear window defogger, heater/air conditioning system, spotlight, etc.) and ensure all doors are shut.

2. Drive to an open, level area away from

large metallic objects or structures and make certain the ignition switch is in the “ON" position.

3. Press and hold the left button for 3 sec-

onds then release, and the compass will enter the calibration mode. “CAL” and di- rection will be displayed.

4. Drive slowly in a circle until “CAL” dis-

appears from the display (approximately two or three circles). The compass is now calibrated.

5. Further calibration may be necessary

should outside. Influences cause the mir- ror to read inaccurately. You will know that this has occurred if your compass begins to read in only limited directions. Should you encounter this situation, return to step one of the above procedure and recali- brate the mirror. V Compass zone adjustment

1. The zone setting is factory preset to

Zone 8. Refer to the “Compass calibration zone” map shown above or one attached to the end of this manual to verify that the compass zone setting is correct for your geographical location.

2. Press and hold the right button for 3

seconds then release, and the word “ZONE” will briefly appear and then the zone number will be displayed.

3. Press the right-hand button repeatedly

to cycle the display through all possible zone settings. Stop cycling when the cor- rect zone setting for your location is dis- played.

4. Releasing the button for 3 seconds will

—+1® Instruments and controls 3-33 exit the zone setting mode. B Outside mirrors

Y Convex mirror (passenger side) [ A WARNING | Objects look smaller in a convex mirror and farther away than when viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use the convex mirror to judge the dis- tance of vehicles behind you when changing lanes. Use the inside mir- ror (or glance backwards) to deter- mine the actual size and distance of objects that you view in convex mir- ror. — CONTINUED — nil

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page 34 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

3-34 instruments and controls Y Remote control mirror switch {MIRROR D}

The remote control mirrors operate only when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.

1. Press either end of the selection

switch, “L” for the left, “R” for the right.

2. Move the direction control switch in the

direction you want to move the mirror.

3. Return the selection switch to the neu-

tral position to prevent unintentional oper- ation. The mirrors can also be adjusted manual- ly. Y Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)

Manual climate control system

Automatic climate control system

The outside mirror defogger shares the button with rear window defogger. The outside mirror defogger operates only when the ignition switch is in the “ON” po- sition. To turn on the outside mirror defogger, push the button. To turn it off, push the button again. The indicator light located on the button lights up while the outside mirror defogger is operating. The defogger will automatically shut off af- ter approximately 15 minutes. If the mirror clears before that time, push the button to turn it off. It also turns off when the ignition switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. If defrosting or defogging is de- sired when you restart your vehicle, you have to push the button to turn it on again. NOTE While the outside mirror defogger is operating, the rear window defogger also operates. Â CAUTION To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not operate the de- fogger continuously for any longer than necessary.

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page 35 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM Tilt steering wheel Horn

1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to the

“Front seats” section (chapter 1).

2. Push the tilt lock lever down.

3. Move the steering wheel to the desired

4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering

5. Make sure that the steering wheel is

securely locked by moving it up and down. A WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel tilt position while g. This may cause loss of vehicle control and re- sult in personal injury. To sound the horn, push the horn pad. —+1® Instruments and controls 3-35

KP AT90OBE-A book Page 1 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM Ventilator Air flow selection Center and side ventilators Manual climate control system (if equipped) Control panel Heater operation Air conditioner operation (if equipped) Automatic climate control system (if equipped) Control panel To use as full-automatic climate control system …. To use as semi-automatic climate control system …. Fan speed control dial Temperature control dial Air flow control dial . Air inlet selection button Air conditioner button . Temperature sensors Operating tips for heater and a conditioner . Cleaning ventilation grille . Efficient cooling after parking in sunlight Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant circuit … 4-7 Air filtration system

Climate control Checking air conditioning system before summer season Cooling and dehumidifying low temperature weather conditions …….. Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine is heavily loaded . Refrigerant for your climate control system . Replacing an air filter .… in high humidity and

1 à 7 AIS00BE-A book Page 2 Friday, June 17, 2008 5:40 PM

4-2 Climate control Ventilator M Air flow selection

1 à 7 AIS00BE-A book Page 3 Friday, June 17, 2008 5:40 PM

EH Center and side ventilators Y Center ventilators A 400376 Move the tab up and down or right and left to adjust the flow direction. Y Side ventilators

Move the knob in any direction you prefer to adjust the flow direction. To open the ventilator, turn the knob coun- terclockwise. To close the ventilator, turn the knob clockwise. —+1®

Climate control 4-3 Manual climate control sys- tem (if equipped) H Control panel

3) Rear window defogger button (Refer to

Y Temperature control dial This dial regulates the temperature of air flow from the air outlets over a range from the blue side (cool) to red side (warm). — CONTINUED — nil

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 4 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 4-4 Climate control Y Fan speed control dial The fan operates only when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position. The fan speed control dial is used to select four fan speeds. Y Air flow control dial This dial has the following five positions:

24: Air flows through the instrument pan- el outlets. Ye : Air flows through the instrument pan- el outlets and the foot outlets.

44 : Air flows through the foot outlets and some through the windshield defroster outlets. . Air flows through the windshield de- froster outlets and foot outlets. y. Air flows through the windshield de- froster outlets. NOTE + You will find the notation “USE WITH ÈSS ” on the air flow control dial plate. This is intended to remind you to set the air inlet selection lever in the

“ 2 ” position when defogging the windshield. Defogging with the air inlet selection lever set in the “ D ” position pro- vides better defogging performance than in the“ C@ ” position. + When the dial is placed inthe “ y ” or “ & ” position, the air conditioner compressor operates automatically re- gardless of the position of the air con- ditioner button to defog the windshield quickly. However the indicator on the air condi- tioner button will not come on. Also, you cannot stop the air condi- tioner compressor by pressing the air conditioner button. Y Air conditioner button (if equipped)

The air conditioner operates only when the engine is running. Push the air conditioner button while the fan is in operation to turn on the air condi- tioner. The indicator light will come on. Push it again to turn off the air conditioner. Y Air inlet selection lever Æ& (Recirculation): Interior air is recir- culated inside the vehicle. Place the air inlet selection lever in the “ CS ” position for fast cooling with the air conditioner or when driving on a dusty road. #2 (Outside air): Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment. Place the air inlet selection lever in the “ &S ” position when the interior has cooled to a comfortable temperature and the road is no longer dusty. [ A WARNING | Continued operation in the “ C@ ” position may fog up the windows. Switch to the “ soon as the outside

| à & 97 AID0OBE-A.book Page 5 Friday, June 17, 200$ 5:40 PM

Æ Heater operation Y Defrosting or defogging the wind- shield

To direct warm air to the windshield and front door windows:

1. Set the air inlet selection lever to the

2. Set the air flow control dial to the

3. Turn the temperature control dial all the

4. Set the fan speed control dial to the

highest speed. If your vehicle is equipped with an air con- ditioner, when the “ "or“ & ” posi- tion is selected, the air conditioner com- pressor automatically operates regardless of the position of the air conditioner button to defog the windshield quickly. However, the air conditioner indicator light does not come on at this time. NOTE Warm air also comes out from the right and left air outlets. To stop warm air flow from these outlets, turn the corre- sponding knob clockwise. Y Heating and defrosting

To direct warm air toward the floor and the windshield:

1. Set the air inlet selection lever to the

3. Set the temperature control dial to the

most comfortable level.

4. Set the fan speed control dial to the de-

sired speed. If your vehicle is equipped with an air con- ditioner, when the “ "or“ & ” posi- tion is selected, the air conditioner com- pressor automatically operates regardless of the position of the air conditioner button to defog the windshield quickly. However, the air conditioner indicator light does not come on at this time. NOTE Warm air also comes out from the right and left air outlets. To stop warm air flow from these outlets, turn the corre- sponding knob clockwise. Y Heating

To direct warm air toward the floor: — CONTINUED — nil

1 à KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 6 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

1. Set the air inlet selection lever to the

2. Set the air flow control dial to the

3. Set the temperature control dial to the

most comfortable level.

4. Set the fan speed control dial to the de-

sired speed. NOTE Warm air also comes out from the right and left air outlets. To stop warm air flow from these outlets, turn the corre- Sponding knob clockwise. Y Bi-level heating

This setting allows you to direct air of dif- ferent temperatures from the instrument panel and foot outlets. The air from the foot outlets is slightly warmer than from the instrument panel outlets.

1. Set the air inlet selection lever to the

2. Set the air flow control dial to the

3. Set the temperature control dial to the

desired temperature level.

4. Set the fan speed control dial to the de-

sired speed. Setting the temperature control dial fully turned to the red area or blue area de- creases the temperature difference be- tween the air from the instrument panel outlets and the air from the foot outlets. Y Ventilation

To force outside air through the instru-

1. Set the air inlet selection lever to the

3. Set the temperature control dial all the

4. Set the fan speed control dial to the de-

sired speed. When driving on a dusty road, set the air inlet control lever to the“ C&Y ” position. [ A WARNING | Continued operation in the “ CS ” position may fog up the windows. Switch to the “ position as soon as the outside dusty condition clears.

1 à KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 7 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

For cooling and dehumidification of the passenger compartiment, performing the following steps will allow air to flow through the instrument panel outlets:

1. Set the air inlet selection lever to the

4. Set the temperature control dial to the

5. Set the fan speed control dial at the

highest speed. Y Defrosting or defogging

To direct warm air to the windshield and front door windows:

1. Set the air inlet selection lever to the

2. Set the air flow control dial to the

3. Set the temperature control dial to the

4. Set the fan speed control dial at the

highest speed. The air conditioner compressor automati- cally operates when the air flow control dial set in the “ 47 ” or“ & ” position to provide better defogging performance. However, the air conditioner indicator light does not come on at this time.

Climate-control 4-7 Automatic climate control system (if equipped) Although this climate control system can be used as a full-automatic climate control system, it can also, if desired, be used as a semi-automatic climate control system. When it is used as a full-automatic climate control system, the outlet air temperature, fan speed, air flow distribution, air inlet control, and air conditioner compressor operation are all automatically controlled to maintain a constant, comfortable tem- perature inside the vehicle. NOTE + Operate the automatic climate con- trol system when the engine is run- ning. + When the engine coolant is cold, the blower does not run. + In the “AUTO” mode, when the air temperature in the passenger compart- ment is sufficiently cool, the air condi- tioner compressor does not operate. For efficient defogging or dehumidify- ing in cold weather, press the “A/C” button to operate the air conditioner compressor. + Even when cooling is not necessary, setting the temperature much lower than the current outlet air temperature — CONTINUED — nil

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page 8 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 4-8 Climate control turns on the air conditioner compres- sor automatically and the “A/C” indica- tor light on the control panel comes on. EH Control panel

6) Rear window defogger button (Refer to

the “Rear window defogger button” sec- tion in chapter 3.) B To use as full-automatic cli- mate control system Place the temperature control dial in the position for your desired temperature, then set the other dials and buttons as de- scribed in the following. The system's functions will then switch to AUTO mode and be controlled automatically. + Air flow control dial: AUTO position + Fan speed control dial: AUTO position + Air inlet selection button: Press for at least 1 second. (Indicator will flash twice.) + Air conditioner button: Press for at least 1 second. (Indicator will flash twice.) A To use as semi-automatic cli- mate control system Each function can be individually set to AUTO mode independently of the others. Any function set to AUTO mode is con- trolled automatically. Any function not set to AUTO mode can be manually adjusted as desired. The temperature can be set within a range of 65 to 85°F (20 to 30°C).

The fan operates only with the ignition switch in the ON position. The fan speed control dial is used to select the AUTO (automatic control) mode or to select the desired fan speed. The dial's positions and their functions are as follows: OFF: The fan does not operate. AUTO: The fan speed is adjusted auto- matically in accordance with the air tem- perature inside and outside the passenger compartment, the intensity of sunlight, and other factors. SUBARU recommends using the AUTO position. Other positions: The fan speed can be adjusted in 25 steps. NOTE With the fan speed control dial in the

1 à KP AT9OOBE-A book Page 9 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

AUTO position and the air flow control dial inthe “ 1,3 ”,“ 4% ”,or“ & ” po- sition, the fan does not operate during engine warmup until the engine cool- ant temperature exceeds approx. 122°F (50°C). E Temperature control dial

This dial is used to set the desired interior temperature. With the dial set to your de- sired temperature, the system automati- cally adjusts the temperature of air sup- plied from the outlets such that the desired temperature is achieved and maintained. Ifthe dial is turned fully counterclockwise, the system gives maximum cooling perfor- mance. |fthe dial is turned fully clockwise, the system gives maximum heating per- formance. B Air flow control dial

This dial has the following six positions. The outlets from which air is supplied in each position are as follows: AUTO: The air flow control is adjusted au- tomatically in accordance with the air tem- perature inside and outside the passenger compartment, the intensity of sunlight, and other factors. SUBARU recommends using the AUTO position. 32: Instrument panel outlets 177: Instrument panel outlets and foot out- lets +5: Foot outlets and windshield defroster outlets (relatively little air from windshield

Climate-control 4-9 defroster outlets) &: Windshield defroster outlets and foot outlets 7: Windshield defroster outlets or “ & ” position, the air conditioner compressor operates automatically to defog the windshield quickly. At the same time, the air inlet selection is au- tomatically set to “outside air” mode. MB Air inlet selection button

ON position (Recirculation): Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle. Push the air inlet selection button to the ON position for fast cooling with the air conditioner or — CONTINUED — nil

e||4… KŸ7 AI900BE-A.book Page 10 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

4-10 Ciimate control when driving on a dusty road. The indica- tor light will come on. OFF position (Outside Air): Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment. Push the air inlet selection button to the OFF position when the interior has cooled to a comfortable temperature and the road is no longer dusty. The indicator light will go off. AUTO: When the air inlet selection button is pressed for at least one second, the in- dicator flashes twice. The air inlet control is then adjusted automatically in accor- dance with the air temperature inside and outside the passenger compartment, the intensity of sunlight, and other factors. Pressing the air inlet selection button can- cels the “AUTO” mode. SUBARU recom- mends using the AUTO position. À WARNING Continued operation in the ON posi- tion may fog up the windows. Switch to the OFF position as soon as the outside dusty condition clears. M Air conditioner button

The button's positions and their functions are as follows: ON: The air conditioner operates while the fan is running. Push the button to select this position. The indicator light will illuminate. OFF:The air conditioner does not operate. Push the button a second time to select this position. The indicator light will go off. AUTO: When the button is pressed for at least one second, the indicator flashes twice. The air conditioner compressor op- eration is then adjusted automatically in accordance with the air temperature in- side and outside the passenger compart- ment, the intensity of sunlight, and other factors. Pressing the button cancels the

“AUTO” mode. SUBARU recommends us- ing the AUTO position. NOTE The air conditioner’s compressor does not operate with an outside tempera- ture of 32°F (0°C) or lower. HE Temperature sensors

The automatic climate control system em- ploys several sensors. These sensors are delicate. If they are not treated properly and become damaged, the system may not be able to control the interior tempera- ture correctly. To avoid damaging the sen- sors, observe the following precautions:

e||4… KŸ7 AI900BE-A.book Page 11 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

— Do not subject the sensors to impact. — Keep water away from the sensors. — Do not cover the sensors. The sensors are located as follows: — Solar sensor: beside windshield de- froster grille — Interior air temperature sensor: beside the fan speed control dial — Outside temperature sensor: behind front grille. Operating tips for heater and air conditioner EH Cleaning ventilation grille

Always keep the front ventilation inlet grille free of snow, leaves, or other ob- structions to ensure efficient heating and defrosting. Since the condenser is located in front of the radiator, this area should be kept clean because cooling performance is impaired by any accumulation of insects and leaves on the condenser. Efficient cooling after parking in direct sunlight After parking in direct sunlight, drive with the windows open for a few minutes to al-

Climate control 4-11 low outside air to circulate into the heated interior. This results in quicker cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the windows closed during the operation of the air con- ditioner for maximum cooling efficiency. B Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant circuit Operate the air conditioner compressor at a low engine speed (at idle or low driving speeds) a few minutes each month during the off-season to circulate its oil. Æ Checking air conditioning system before summer sea- son Check the air conditioner unit for refriger- ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper op- eration each spring. This check is best performed by your SUBARU dealer. H Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and low tem- perature weather conditions Under certain weather conditions (high relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a small amount of water vapor emission from the air outlets may be noticed. This condition is normal and does not indicate — CONTINUED — nil

1 à KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 12 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

4-12 Climate control any problem with the air conditioning sys- tem. H Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine is heavily loaded To improve acceleration and gas mileage, the air conditioner compressor is de- signed to temporarily shut off during air conditioner operation whenever the accel- erator is fully depressed such as during rapid acceleration or when driving on a steep upgrade. B Refrigerant for your climate control system Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly refrigerant HFC134a. Therefore, the method of adding, changing or checking the refrigerant is different from the method for CFC12 (Freon). Consult your SUBARU dealer for service. Repairs needed as a result of using the wrong re- frigerant are not covered under warranty. Air filtration system If your vehicle's air conditioning system is equipped with an air filtration system, re- place the filter element according to the replacement schedule shown in the fol- lowing. This schedule should be followed to maintain the filter's dust collection abili- ty. Under extremely dusty conditions, the filter should be replaced more frequently. It is recommended that you have your fil- ter checked or replaced by your SUBARU dealer. For replacement, use only a genu- ine SUBARU air filter kit. Replacement schedule: Every 12 months or 7,500 miles (12,000 km) whichever comes first H Replacing an air filter

e||4… _4lle #7 A1900BE-A.book Page 13 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM n Ï £ EN Lù ù Climate control 4-13

2. Unhook the hooks of the air filter cover 1) Aïr filter element 5. Reinstall the air filter cover.

one. [ À CAUTION ] The arrow mark on the filter must point down.

6. Connect the connector, and reinstall

7. Close the glove box.

3. Draw out the air filter element.

d di|æ KŸ7 A1900BE-A.book Page 14 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM n 41 4-14 Ciimate control + Windshield gets easily fogged or misted. NOTE The filter can influence the air condi- tioning, heating and defroster perfor- mance if not properly maintained.

1)Fill out the information on the service label (small). 2)Attach the service label to the driver side door pillar and the caution label to the driver side end of the instrument panel.

[ À CAUTION Contact your dealer if the following occurs, even if it is not yet time to change the filter: + Reduction of the air flow through the vents. eit- +

À 4 \@ KŸ7 A1900BE-A.book Page 1 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM n 41 Audi J Antenna system 5-2 Printed antenna 5-2 FM reception 5-2 Installation of accessories . 5-2 Audio set 5-3 Type A audio set . 5-3 Type B audio set . 5-3 In-dash 6 CD auto changer 1 (Optional audio unit — if equipped) Type A audio set (if equipped) . Radio operation 5-4 Compact disc player operation . . 5-7 CD changer control (if optional in-dash CD A changer is connected) 5-9 7 Type B audio set (if equipped) . 5-11 Radio operation 5-11 Built in CD changer opera 5-15 In-dash 6 CD auto changer 1 (if equipped) 5-19 Loading and unloading compact discs 5-19 Precautions to observe when handling a compact disc . 5-21 5-4

1 à KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 2 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

5-2 Audio Antenna system B Printed antenna [ ÂCAUTION | Do not use sharp instruments or window cleaner containing abra- sives to clean the inner surface of the window on which the antenna is printed. Doing so may damage the antenna printed on the window. Y Sedan

The antenna is printed on the inner sur- face of the rear window glass. Y Wagon and OUTBACK SPORT

The antenna is printed on the inner sur- face of the rear window glass. H FM reception Although FM is normally static free, recep- tion can be affected by the surrounding ar- ea, atmospheric conditions, station strength and transmitter distance. Build- ings or other obstructions may cause mo- mentary static, flutter or station interfer- ence. |f reception continues to be unsatis- factory, switch to a stronger station.

Installation of accessories Always consult your SUBARU dealer be- fore installing a citizen band radio or other transmitting device in your vehicle. Such devices may cause the electronic control system to malfunction if they are incorrect- ly installed or if they are not suited for the vehicle. —+1®

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page 3 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

Audio set Your SUBARU may be equipped with one of the following audio sets. See the pages indicated in this section for operating de- tails. Æ Type À audio set JO Comes)

+ Radio operation: refer to page 5-4 + Compact disc player operation: refer to page 5-7 + CD changer control: refer to page 5-9 E Type B audio set —+1® Audio 5-3 Æin-dash 6 CD auto changer 1 (Optional audio unit — if equipped)

+ Radio operation: refer to page 5-11 + Built-in CD changer operation: refer to page 5-15

+ Inserting and removing a disc or all discs: refer to page 5-19

] à æ KŸ7 AID0OBE-A.book Page 4 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

5-4 Audio Type A audio set (if equipped) The radio will operate only when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position. H Radio operation o (2) (3) (4 sea. L "MOSS © (6) & 500023

2) Power switch, Volume control, Bass/Treble control and Fader/Balance control dial

—+1® Y Power switch and volume/bassjtre- ble/fader/balance control (PWR/ VOL) The dial (2) is used for both power (ON/ OFF) and volume control. The radio is turned ON and OFF by pushing the dial and the volume is controlled by turning the dial. V Tone and balance control The “VOLUME” control knob normally function as volume control. This knob be- come a control for Treble, Bass, Fader or Balance when you select the appropriate audio mode. Choose desired volume level for each re mode by turning the “VOLUME” control knob. The control function returns to vol- ume control mode after approximately 5 seconds. To change control modes: Each brief press of the “T/B” button changes control modes in the following sequence starting from volume control mode. (When the ra- dio is first turned on, the control mode is in the volume control.) (VOL) (BAS) (TRE) Fader © Balance (FAD) (BAL) Volume —= Bass —= ce] nil

KT AT90OBE-A book Page $ Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise BAS Bass control For less bass sound For more bass sound TRE Treble control For less treble sound For more treble sound BAL Balance control To increase left speaker volume and decrease right speaker volume To increase right speaker volume and decrease left speaker volume FAD Fader control To increase rear speaker volume and decrease front speaker volume To increase front speaker volume and decrease rear speaker volume voL Volume control For less volume For more volume Y FM/AM selection button (FM/AM) Will change in the following order: Push the “FM/AM" button (4) when the ra- dio is off to turn on the radio. Push the “FM/AM” button when the radio is on to select FM1, FM2 or AM reception. Each time this button is pressed, the band ei+-

rently selected. Y Stereo indicator The stereo indicator “ST” will come on when an FM stereo broadcast is received. The display indicates which one is cur- — CONTINUED —

1 à KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 6 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

5-6 Audio Y Manual tuning (TUNE) Push the “ À ” side of the tuning button (3) to increase the tuning frequency and press the “ \, ” side of the button to de- crease it. Each time the button is pressed, the fre- quency changes 10 KHz in the AM wave- band and 0.2 MHz in the FM waveband. Constant pressure on the button causes a continuous change in the frequency. Y Automatic tuning (SCAN) Press the “SCAN” button (1) to change the radio to the SCAN mode. In this mode, the radio scans through the radio band until a station is found. The radio will stop at the station for five seconds while displaying the frequency, after which scanning will continue until the entire band has been scanned from the low end to the high end. Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel the SCAN mode and to stop on any dis- played frequency. When the “SCAN” button is pressed for automatic tuning, stations are scanned in the direction of low frequencies to high fre- quencies only. Automatic tuning may not function proper- ly if the station reception is weakened by distance from the station or proximity to tall buildings and hills. Y Selecting preset stations Presetting a station with a “Preset” button (5) allows you to select that station in a single operation. Up to six AM, FM1 and FM2 stations each may be preset. Y How to preset stations

1. Press the “FM/AM" selection button to

select AM, FM1 or FM2 reception.

2. Press the “SCAN” button (1) or tune

the radio manually until the desired station frequency is displayed.

3. Press one of the “Preset” buttons (5)

for at least 2 seconds to store the fre- quency. The frequency of the station will flash once on the display at this time. lfthe button is pressed for less than 2 seconds, the preceding selection will remain in memory. NOTE + If the connection between the radio and battery is broken for any reason such as vehicle maintenance or radio removal, all stations stored in the pre- set buttons are cleared. If this occurs, it is necessary to reset the preset but- tons. + fa cell phone is placed near the ra- dio, it may cause the radio to emit noise when it receives calls. This noise does not indicate a radio fault.

] 4 à & -Rr0omE-A book Page 7 Friday, June 17,200 5:40 PM Ï a L & Audio 5-7 HE Compact disc player operation Y To play back a compact disc q) (@) @) V When CDis not in the player insert it in to the slot (with the label side “ up) and the player will automatically pull [un + Make sure to always insert a disc with the label side up. If a disc is insert- Hold a disc with a finger in the center hole (es) LE \ Æ the disc into position. sw ) CA | à : 1 Æ | [rm . A single CD (8 cm/3 inch CD) may also be \ 2 Z ” used without any adapter. s)(t ed with the label side down, it might be

A5) (7) Eject button ejected or the player might shut off. A 4 (8) Disc slot + After the last song finishes, the play- Ÿ () DISC button er will automatically return to track 1 (10) Repeat/Random button (the first song on the disc). (11) Track selection buttons V When CDis in the player Press the “DISC” button (9). The display will show “CD” and the player will start playback. NOTE After the last song finishes, playback will automatically return to track 1 (the first song on the disc). Y To select a song from its beginning V Forward direction Briefly press the “ À ” side of the button — CONTINUED — + nil

| à & WP AIDOOBE-A.book Page 8 Friday, June 17, 200$ 5:40 PM

5-8 Audio (11) to skip to the beginning of the next track. Each time this side of the button is pressed, the indicated track number will increase. V Backward direction Briefly press the “ \, ” side of the button (11) to skip to the beginning of the current track. Each time this side of the button is pressed, the indicated track number will decrease. Y Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing V Fast-forwarding Press the “ À ” side of the button (11) continuously to fast-forward the disc. Release the button to stop fast-forward- ing. V Fast-reversing Press the “ \, ” side of the button (11) continuously to fast-reverse the disc. Release the button to stop fast-reversing. Y Repeat playback Press the “RPT/RDM" button (10) and re- lease it in less than 2 seconds while a song is playing to play the song repeated- ly. The “RPT" indicator will come on and the song will be played continuously. To cancel the repeat mode, press the button again. Then the “RPT" indicator goes out, and normal playback mode is restored. Y Random playback Press the “RPT/RDM"” button (10) and hold it in for more than 2 seconds while a disc is being played back to play all songs on the disc in a random order. The “RDM” indicator will come on and all songs on the disc will be played in a random order. To cancel the random mode, press the button again. Then the “RDM” indicator goes out, and normal playback mode is restored. Y To eject a disc from the player When a disc is being played back or when a disc is in the player, press the “Eject” button “ & ” (7). The disc will be ejected. The disc may be removed even when the ignition switch is in the “LOCK” position. NOTE Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD sticking out, because vibration might make it fall out.

1 à KP AT9OOBE-A book Page 9 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

HE CD changer control (if optional in-dash CD changer is connect- ed) An optional CD changer can be connected to this audio unit. Consult the instructions that accompany the CD changer for operating the CD changer itself (e.g., how to load or un- load CDs). See your SUBARU dealer for more information. (12) (13) D = me DO Cm | NES DIESEN mar) C0 (15) (14) 500025 (12 (13 (14

Track selection buttons DISC button Repeat/Random button Disc select button —+1® Audio 5-9 Y To start playback When the “DISC” button (13) is pressed, the CD changer will start playback. The display shows the current disc number, track number and the elapsed time during playback. NOTE + (fa disc is in the player, the “DISC” button is used to change from CD play- er operation to DISC changer opera- tion. Each time the “DISC” button is pressed, the operating mode will change alternately. + Atthe end of the disc, the player au- tomatically continues with the next disc. + After playback on the last disc finish- es, playback will automatically return to the first disc. + If you have loaded fewer than 6 discs, any missing disc is automatical- ly skipped. Y Selection of a desired disc You can select a desired disc from among the discs contained in the CD changer only by pressing the corresponding num- ber on one of the “Disc select” buttons (15). If you are to listen to the 5th disc in the CD changer, press the “5” button of the “Disc select” buttons (15). All other discs in the CD changer can also be se- — CONTINUED - nil

e||4… KŸ7 AI900BE-A.book Page 10 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

5-10 Audio lected in a similar way. NOTE + No disc change takes place if the button corresponding to the storage tray in which no disc is loaded is pressed. + Ifthe disc select button correspond- ing to the disc now in playback is pressed again, the disc will be replayed from its beginning. Y To select a song from its beginning V Forward direction Briefly press the “ À ” side of the button (12) to skip to the beginning of the next track. Each time this side of the button is pressed, the indicated track number will increase. V Backward direction Briefly press the “ \, ” side of the button (12) to skip to the beginning of the current track. Each time this side of the button is pressed, the indicated track number will decrease. Y Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing V Fast-forwarding Press the “ À ” side of the button (12) continuously to fast-forward the disc. Release the button to stop fast-forward- ing. If you continue fast-forwarding to the end of the disc, the CD changer will automati- cally stop fast-forwarding and start play- back beginning with the first track on the current disc. V Fast-reversing Press the “ \ ” side of the button (12) continuously to fast-reverse the disc. Release the button to stop fast-reversing. If you continue fast-reverse to the begin- ning of the disc, the CD changer will auto- matically stop fast-reverse and start play- back beginning with the first track on the current disc. Y Repeat playback Use this to play a certain track repeatedly. During playback, press the “RPT/RDM" button (14) and release it in less than 2 seconds. The “RPT" indicator will come on and the song will be played continuously. To cancel the repeat mode, press the but- ton again. Then the “RPT" indicator goes out, and normal playback mode is re- stored. Y Random playback Use this to play the tracks on the disc in random order. During playback, press the “RPT/RDM" button (14) and hold it in for more than 2 seconds. The “RDM" indica-

tor will come on and all songs on the disc will be played in a random order. To cancel the random mode, press the button again. Then the “RDM” indicator goes out, and normal playback mode is restored. —+1®

The radio will operate only when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

Midrange/Treble control and Fader/ Balance control dial t) (@) (3) (4) (5) SCD CHANGER dise Y Power switch and volume/bassitre- ble/fader/balance control (PWR/ VOL) The dial (8) is used for both power (ON/ OFF) and volume control. The radio is turned ON and OFF by pushing the dial and the volume is controlled by turning the dial. rusaronenno| |

TONE | This dial is used for bass/midrange/treble controls when the “TONE" button (3) is in the depressed position. lt is also used for fader/balance controls when the “BAL” button (4) is in the depressed position. @sRIGHT Ha CI (8) (7) (6)

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 12 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM Display Control mode

Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise BASS Bass control For less bass sound For more bass sound MIDDLE Midrange control For less midrange sound For more midrange sound TREBLE Treble control For less treble sound For more treble sound BALANCE Balance control To increase left speaker volume and decrease right speaker volume To increase right speaker volume and decrease left speaker volume FADER Fader control To increase rear speaker volume and decrease front speaker volume To increase front speaker volume and decrease rear speaker volume VOLUME Volume control For less volume For more volume V Tone control The volume control dial (8) normally func- tion as volume control. The dial become a control for Bass, Midrange or Treble when

you select the appropriate tone control mode.

Choose desired level for each mode by turning the volume control dial. The con- trol function returns to volume control mode after approximately 5 seconds. To change control modes: Each brief press of the “TONE” button (3) changes control modes in the following sequence

1 à KP AT9OOBE-A book Page 13 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

starting from bass control mode. (When the radio is first turned on, the control mode is in the volume control.)

BASS —> MIDDLE —>TREBLE

VOLUME V Fader and balance control The volume control dial (8) normally func- tion as volume control. The dial become the controls for Fader or Balance when you select the appropriate fader and bal- ance control mode. Choose desired setting for each mode by turning the volume control dial. The con- trol function returns to volume control mode after approximately 5 seconds. To change control modes: Each brief press of the “BAL” button (4) changes control modes in the following sequence starting from fader control mode. (When the radio is turned on, the control mode is in the volume control.)

FADER —= BALANCE > VOLUME

V Display illumination dimness can- cellation (BRIGHT) The brightness of the radio display dims when the light switch is in the “ 260: ” or “ ” positions. If this makes the display difficult to read, press the volume dial for more than 1.5 seconds to return the dis- play to original brightness. Subsequently pressing the volume dial again for more than 1.5 seconds or if you can safely do so, turning the light switch to the OFF position and back to the je” or ” position makes the radio display dim again. Y FM/AM selection button Push the “FM” (1) or “AM” (2) button when the radio is off to turn on the radio. Push the “FM” or “AM” button when the ra- dio is on to select FM1, FM2 or AM recep- tion. Y Stereo indicator The stereo indicator “ST” will come on when an FM stereo broadcast is received. —+1® Audio 5-13 Y Manual tuning (TUNE)

: Tuning to a higher frequency : Tuning to a lower frequency : Seeking the next higher station : Seeking the next lower station ZYAY V Manual tuning Turn the tuning knob (6) clockwise and re- lease it immediately to increase the tuning frequency and turn the tuning knob coun- terclockwise and release it immediately to decrease the tuning frequency. Each time the knob is turned, the frequen- cy changes 10 kHz in the AM waveband and 0.2 MHz in the FM waveband. V Seek tuning Turn the tuning knob (6) and hold it for more than a half second. Seek tuning will — CONTINUED — nil

e||4… KŸ7 AI900BE-A.book Page 14 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

5-14 Audio operate and stop automatically on the next station. Continue this operation until you find the desired station. Y Automatic tuning (SCAN) Press the “SCAN” button (5) to change the radio to the SCAN mode. In this mode, the radio scans through the radio band until a station is found. The radio will stop at the station for five seconds while displaying the frequency, after which scanning will continue until the entire band has been scanned from the low end to the high end. Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel the SCAN mode and to stop on any dis- played frequency. When the “SCAN” button is pressed for automatic tuning, stations are scanned in the direction of low frequencies to high fre- quencies only. Automatic tuning may not function proper- ly if the station reception is weakened by distance from the station or proximity to tall buildings and hills. Y Selecting preset stations Presetting a station with a “Preset” button (7) allows you to select that station in a single operation. Up to six AM, FM1 and FM2 stations each may be preset. Y How to preset stations

1. Press the “FM/AM" selection button to

select AM, FM1 or FM2 reception.

2. Press the “SCAN” button (5) or tune

the radio manually until the desired station frequency is displayed.

3. Press one of the “Preset” buttons (7)

for at least 1.5 seconds to store the fre- quency. The frequency of the station will flash once on the display at this time. lfthe button is pressed for less than 1.5 sec- onds, the preceding selection will remain in memory. NOTE + If the connection between the radio and battery is broken for any reason such as vehicle maintenance or radio removal, all stations stored in the pre- set buttons are cleared. If this occurs, it is necessary to reset the preset but- tons. + Ifa cell phone is placed near the ra- dio, it may cause the radio to emit noise when it receives calls. This noise does not indicate a radio fault.

KP AT90OBE-A book Page 15 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM BBuilt in CD changer operation () (0) at) (12) (13) (14) (15) AD neo cHanden pres se f | [1 |

Audio 5-15 LOAD button Disc slot Repeat button Random button Eject button Fast-forwarding/Fast-reversing and track UP/DOWN knob (17) Disc select button NOTE Make sure to always insert a disc with the label side up. If a disc is inserted with the label side down, it might be ejected or the player might shut off. Y How to insert a CD(s) V Inserting a CD

1. Press “LOAD” button (9). If the maga-

zine in the player has an idle position where you can insert a disc, the “DISC” in- dicator associated with the idle position Will blink. If no indicator blinks, it means that there is no idle position in the magazine.

2. As soon as the “DISC” indicator begins

to blink, the “LOAD" will appear on display for a period of 15 seconds. Insert a disc during the period. The disc will be then au- tomatically drawn in, and the player will — CONTINUED —

1 à KP AT90OBE-A book Page 16 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

5-16 Audio begin to play back the first track of the disc. + To insert more discs in succession, re- peat Steps 1 and 2. The magazine will be loaded with discs in the ascending order of position number. If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds after you have pressed the “LOAD” but- ton, the player will begin to play back the first track of the last disc you have insert- ed. + The disc indicator steadily lights up if a disc is already inserted in the correspond- ing position of the magazine. + While the player is in the loading mode, if you press any of the other mode buttons “FM” (1), “AM” (2), the player will enter the standby mode. Press the “CD” button (14) to start playback. V Inserting a disc in a desired position

1. Press the “LOAD” button (9). If the

magazine in the player has an idle posi- tion where you can insert a disc, the “DISC” indicator associated with the idle position will blink. The positions in the magazine the indica- tor of which steadily lights up are already loaded with discs.

2. Press the “Disc select” button (17) at

the position where you want to insert a disc. The associated “DISC” indicator will blink, and the “LOAD" will be displayed.

3. If you insert a disc during the 15-sec-

ond period while the “LOAD" is on display, the disc will be automatically drawn in, and the player will start playback of the disc, beginning with the first track. + To insert more discs in succession, re- peat Steps 1 and 2. + While the player is in the loading mode, if you press any of the other mode buttons “FM” (1), “AM” (2), the player will enter standby mode. Press the “CD” button (14) to start playback. V Loading all the magazine (Full disc loading mode)

1. If you continue to press the “LOAD”

button (9) for more than 1.5 seconds, the player will produce beep sound and will enter the full disc loading mode.

2. À “DISC” indicator will blink, and the

“ALL LOAD" will be on display for a period of 15 seconds. If a disc is successfully loaded during this period, the “DISC” indi- cator will stop blinking and will steadily light.

3. When the loading of a disc is complete,

the next “DISC” indicator will blink. Then repeat Step 2.

4. When the magazine is filled with discs

by repeating Steps 2 and 3, the player will start playback of the discs, beginning with

the one inserted first. If you fail to insert any disc during each 15 seconds interval, the full disc loading mode will be canceled, and the player will Start playback of the disc inserted first. Y How to play back a CD or make a pause V When there is no CD inserted: Insert a CD by referring to “How to Insert a CD(s). When a CD is loaded, the player will start playback of the CD, beginning with the first track. V When there are CDs loaded: Press a desired one of the “Disc select” buttons (17) the “DISC” indicator of which steadily lights up. The player will then start playback of the selected CD, beginning with the first track. —+1®

1 à KP AT90OBE-A book Page 17 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

Y Selecting a desired track (TRACK)

: Skipping forward : Skipping backward : Fast-forwarding : Fast-reversing AYZY V Skipping forward Turn the “TRACK” knob (16) clockwise and release it immediately to skip to the beginning of the next track. Each time the knob is turned and released, the indicated track number will increase. V Skipping backward Turn the “TRACK” knob (16) counter- clockwise and release it immediately to skip to the beginning of the current track. If you continue to turn and release the knob, the indicated track number will de- crease. V Fast-forwarding Turn the “TRACK” knob (16) clockwise and hold it continuously to fast-forward the disc. Release the knob to stop fast-forwarding. V Fast-reversing Turn the “TRACK” knob (16) counter- clockwise and hold it continuously to fast- reverse the disc. Release the knob to stop fast-reversing. Y Repeat playback Press the “RPT" button (11) while a song is playing to play the song repeatedly. The “RPT' indicator will come on and the song will be played continuously. To cancel the repeat mode, press the button again. Then the “RPT” indicator goes out, and normal playback mode is restored. Y Random playback Press the “RDM” button (12) while a disc is being played back to play all songs on the disc in a random order. The “RDM in- dicator will come on and all songs on the disc will be played in a random order. To cancel the random mode, press the button again. Then the “RDM" indicator goes out, and normal playback mode is restored.

Audio 5-17 Y Scan When the “SCAN" button (13) is pressed while the disc is being played back, you can hear the first 10 seconds of each track to search for the desired program. To con- tinue listening to the program, press the “SCAN” button again. After all tracks on the disc have been scanned, normal play- back mode is restored. Y How to unload CDs from the player V Ejecting a CD from the player Ofthe discs loaded, you can select and re- move only one disc.

1. Press the “Disc select” button (17) of

the disc whose “DISC” indicator is ON.

2. Press the “Eject” button (15). Then the

“DISC” indicator associated with the disc you have selected will blink, and the disc will be ejected. To remove more discs in succession, re- peat Steps 1 and 2. V Ejecting all discs from the player (All disc ejection mode)

1. If you continue to press the “Eject” but-

ton (15), the player will produce beep sound and will enter the all disc ejection mode.

2. Remove the disc that has been eject-

ed. The other discs loaded will then be ejected one after another. If you do not re- — CONTINUED — nil

KP AT9OOBE-A book Page 18 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 5-18 Audio move the disc that has been ejected, the “AIl disc ejection mode” will be canceled. NOTE Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD sticking out, because vibration might make it fall out.

KP AT90OBE-A book Page 19 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM In-dash 6 CD auto changer 1 (if equipped) Æ Loading and unloading compact discs (5) (1) (2) SUBARU

—+1® Audio 5-19 Disc slot Disc indicators (disc No.1 to 6) Disc select buttons (disc No.1 to 6) Eject button Disc slot indicator ÂÀCAUTION Do not attempt to insert two or more discs into the slot at a time. Doing so can cause mechanical damage to the CD changer. Use only music CDs identified by a mark. Do not use CDs listed in the fol- lowing which could cause dam- age to the CD player. 3 inch (8 cm) compact disc. Any disc with a peel-off or seal onit. Any disc with scratches and/or dust. Bent disc. Cleaning disc. CD accessory. (E.g., 3 inch (8 cm) disc adapter) — CONTINUED —

e||4… KŸ7 AI900BE-A.book Page 20 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

5-20 Audio + Do not insert or remove any disc when the automatic transmission selector lever is in the park posi- tion; the selector lever in that po- sition can interfere with disc in- sertion or removal, causing scratches on the disc surface (for AT vehicles). Y To insert a disc

1. Press one of the “Disc select” buttons

(3) (numbered from 1 to 6) for which the disc indicator light (2) is “OFF”. The disc indicator lights are located direct- ly above the corresponding “Disc select” buttons.

2. The indicator will begin blinking. The

blinking will last for 15 seconds. During this period, insert a desired disc, and the disc will begin to play. (If any disc is not inserted during this period, the “Disc slot” (1) door will close. Repeat Step 1.) Be sure to hold a disc with the label side (the side where titles are printed) up.

3. To insert another disc, repeat Steps 1

and 2 choosing a different disc select but- ton. Y To insert six discs at a time

1. Press and hold the “Disc select” button

number 1 until all disc indicators begin blinking (approximately 1.5 seconds).

2. Theindicators will blink for 15 seconds.

During this period, insert desired six discs.

3. When all discs are loaded, the first disc

will begin to play. (If no disc is inserted Within this 15 seconds, the entire disc load sequence will be canceled.) Y To remove a disc

1. Press the desired one of the “Disc se-

lect” buttons (3) (numbered from 1 to 6) for which the disc indicator light is on.

2. Press the “Eject” button (4). The select-

ed disc will be ejected and the indicator light will begin blinking.

3. To remove another disc, repeat Steps

1 and 2 choosing a different “Disc select” button. (To remove discs when the ignition switch is in the “Lock” position, press the “Eject” button, and the first disc will be ejected. Press the “Eject” button again, and the next disc will be ejected and so on. At this time, the “Disc select” buttons are dis- abled.) Y To remove all discs at one time

1. Press and hold the “Eject” button (4)

until all “Disc” indicators begin blinking (approximately 1.5 seconds), and the first disc will be ejected.

2. When the disc is removed, the next

one will be ejected, and so on.

Y To replace a playing disc with an- other Simply press the desired one of “Disc se- lect” buttons (3) (numbered from 1 to 6) or press the “Disc select” button on the radio unit to select the desired disc, and the disc will begin to play. Y Disc indicators Lit: when the corresponding storage tray is occupied by a disc. Blinking: Disc player is either in loading, eject or changing mode. OFF: No disc is loaded or the ignition switch is in the “LOCK” position. V Open/Closed disc slot indicator When the disc slot is open, the disc indica- tors on both sides of the slot illuminate. Y Function control Refer to CD changer control operating in- structions described in the “Type B audio set (if equipped)” section.

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page 21 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

Precautions to observe when handling a compact disc Use only compact discs (CDs) that have the mark shown in the following illustra- tion. COMPACT His DIGITAL AUDIO

You may also use compact discs (CD-Rs and CD-RWs) that have the following marks, but you may not use some discs if they were produced using writing methods not compatible with your vehicle's audio system. COMPACT COMPACT DISC AUISE DualDisc + You cannot use a DualDisc in the CD player. If you insert a DualDisc into the player, the disc may not come out again, possibly causing the player to malfunc- tion. + In cold and/or rainy weather, dew can

Audio 5-21 form inside the CD player, preventing nor- mal operation. lf this happens, eject the CD and wait for the player to dry out. + Skipping may occur when the CD player is subjected to severe vibration (for exam- ple, when the vehicle is driven on a rough surface). + To remove a disc from the case, press the center of the case and hold both edg- es of the disc. If the disc surface is touched directly, contamination could cause poor tone quality. Do not touch the disc surface. + Use a clean disc whenever possible. If there are deposits, wipe the disc surface from the center outward with a dry, soft cloth. Be sure not to use a hard cloth, thin- ner, benzene, alcohol, etc. + Do not use any disc that is scratched, deformed, or cracked. Also, do not use any disc that has a non-standard shape (for example, a heart shape). Malfunctions or problems might result. + A disc is vulnerable to heat. Never keep it either in places exposed to direct sun- light, near heaters or in vehicles parked in the sun or on hot days. — CONTINUED — nil

1 à KP AT9OOBE-A book Page 22 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

5-22 Audio (À N. (ED

d di|æ KŸ7 A1900BE-A.book Page 1 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM n 41 Interior equipment Interior light Dome light . Cargo area light (if equipped) . Map light (if equipped) Sun visors Vanity mirror (if equipped) Storage compartments . Glove box Center console Coin tray Cup holder Front passenger’s cup holder Rear passenger’s cup holder . Accessory power outlet (if equipped) Cigarette lighter socket Use with a cigarette lighter . Using as an accessory power outlet Ashtray Floor mat (if equipped) . Coat hook ….. Cargo area cover (Wagon - if equipped) Using the cover … To remove the cover . Stowage of the cover To install the cover housing Cargo tie-down hooks (Wagon - if equipped) 6-2 Cargo area bars 6-2 Under-floor storage compartment (if equipped) 6-12 6-12

| à & 97 AID0OBE-A.book Page 2 Friday, June 17, 200$ 5:40 PM

6-2 Interior equipment Interior light When leaving your vehicle, make sure the light goes out to avoid battery discharge. H Dome light

The dome light switch has three positions: ON: The light stays on continuously. DOOR (middle position): The dome light comes on when any of the doors (or the rear gate on wagon) is opened. The light remains on for several seconds and grad- ually goes out after all doors (and the rear gate on the wagon) are closed or if the key is inserted in the ignition switch. The light also can be turned on by use of the remote keyless entry transmitter. See the “Remote keyless entry system” sec- tion in chapter 2 for detailed information. OFF: The light stays off. H Cargo area light (if equipped)

DOOR: The light comes on only when the rear gate is opened. OFF: The light stays off.

Vehicle with moonroof Vehicle without moonroof

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page 3 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

To turn on the map light, push the switch. To turn it off, push the switch again. When leaving the vehicle, make sure the light is turned off to avoid battery dis- charge. Sun visors

To block out glare, swing down the visors. To use the sun visor at a side window, swing it down and move it sideways.

Interior equipment 6-3 Vanity mirror (if equipped)

To use the vanity mirror, swing down the sun visor and open the vanity mirror cov- er.

e||4… _4lle (#7 A1900BE-A.book Page 4 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM n Ï £ EN Lù ù 6-4 Interior equipment Storage compartments close it, push the lid firmly upward. H Coin tray To lock the glove box, insert the key and [ À CAUTION tum it clockwise. + Always keep the storage compart- HE Center console ment closed while driving to re- duce the risk of injury in the event of sudden stops or an accident. + Do not store spray cans, contain- ers with flammable or corrosive liquids or any other dangerous items in the storage compartment.

To open the lid, pull up the lock release.

To open the glove box, pull the handle. To

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page $ Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM Cup holder Front passenger’s cup holder

A dual cup holder is built in the center con- sole, beside the parking brake lever. BH Rear passenger’s cup holder

(nl CES / Z 600082 A dual cup holder is located at the back of the center console. To use the cup holder, open the lid by pulling its upper edge. [ À CAUTION + Do not pick up a cup from the cup holder or put a cup in the holder while you are driving, as this may distract you and lead to an acci- dent. Take care to avoid spills. Bever- ages, if hot, might burn you or your passengers. Spilled bever- ages may also damage uphol- stery, carpets or audio equipment.

Interior equipment 6-5 Accessory power outlet (if equipped)

Accessory power outlet is provided in the cargo area (if equipped). Electrical power (12V DC) from the battery is available at the outlet when the ignition switch is either in the “ACC” or “ON” posi- tion. You can use an in-car use electrical appli- ance by connecting it to the outlet. ÂÀCAUTION + Do not attempt to use a cigarette lighter in the accessory power outlet. — CONTINUED — nil

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 6 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 6-6 Interior equipment Do not place any foreign objects, especially metal ones such as coins or aluminum foil, into the accessory power outlet. That could cause a short circuit. Al- ways put the cap on the accesso- ry power outlet when it is not in use. Use only electrical appliances which are designed for 12V DC and which consume less than 120W. Overloading the accessory power outlet can cause a short circuit. Do not use double adapt- ers or more than one electrical ap- pliance. If the plug on your electric appli- ance is either too loose or too tight for the accessory power out- let, this can result in a poor con- tact or cause the plug to get stuck. Only use plugs that fit properly. Use of an electric appliance in the accessory power outlet for a long period of time while the engine is not running can cause battery dis- charge. + Before driving your vehicle, make sure that the plug and the cord on your electrical appliance will not interfere with your shifting gears and operating the accelerator and brake pedals. If they do, do not use the electrical appliance while driving. Cigarette lighter socket \ VAT, A cigarette lighter socket can be found be- hind the ashtray lid under the climate con- trols. Push gently on the lid to open it. A cigarette lighter plug is an optional acces- sory. lt is available from your SUBARU dealer. The cigarette lighter socket may also be used as a power source for an in-car use electrical appliance.

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 7 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM ÂCAUTION H Use with a cigarette lighter

Interior equipment 6-7 [ À CAUTION | + The electrical power outlet locat- ed on the lower part of the instru- ment panel is originally designed to use a genuine SUBARU ciga- rette lighter plug. Do not use non- genuine cigarette lighter plugs in the socket. Doing so may cause a Short-circuit and overheating, re- sulting in a fire. If the socket is ever used for a plug-in accessory such as a mo- bile phone, that may damage the portion of the socket’s internal mechanism that causes a ciga- rette lighter plug to “pop out” af- ter its lighter element is heated. Therefore, do not place a cigarette lighter plug in a socket that has been used, even once, to power a plug-in accessory. Doing so may cause the plug to stick and over- heat, creating a potential fire haz- ard. Do not place any foreign objects, especially metal ones such as coins or aluminum foil, into the socket. That could cause a short circuit. | 2 7} Do not hold the lighter pushed in, because it will overheat.

The cigarette lighter operates only when the ignition switch is in the “ON” and “ACC” positions. To use the cigarette lighter, push in the knob and wait a few moments. lt will auto- matically spring up when ready for use. A WARNING | To avoid being burned, never grasp the lighter by the end with the heat- ing element. Doing so could result in injury and could also damage the heating element.

H Using as an accessory power outlet Electrical power (12V DC) from the battery is available at the socket when the ignition switch is either in the “ACC” or “ON” posi- tion. If you use the socket as an accessory power outlet, take the following precau- tions. When the socket is not in use, always put the cap on the socket to prevent any for- eign object from entering it. [ À CAUTION + Use only in-car use electrical ap- pliances which are designed for 12V DC and which consume less than 120W. Overloading the sock- et can cause a short circuit. Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical appliance. — CONTINUED —

KT AT90OBE-A book Page 8 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 6-8 Interior equipment

Ashtray NOTE « If the plug on your electric appli- ance is either too loose or too tight for the socket, this can result in a poor contact or cause the plug to get stuck. Only use plugs that fit properly. Use of an electric appliance in the socket for a long period of time while the engine is not running can cause battery discharge. Before driving your vehicle, make sure that the plug and the cord on your electrical appliance will not interfere with your shifting gears and operating the accelerator and brake pedals. If they do, do not use the electrical appliance while

Particles of ash and tobacco will accu- mulate around the hinges of the ash- tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a

To open the ashtray, push lightly on the lid below the climate controls. driving. If the socket has been used for electrical appliances, damage may have been done to the internal mechanism that causes a cigarette lighter to “pop out” after its ele- ment has been heated. For that reason, a cigarette lighter, even if it is a genuine part, should not be used in the socket. If you want to use the socket for a cigarette lighter again, or to protect your purchaser before you sell your vehicle, have your SUBARU dealer replace the socket with a new one.

Fully close the lid after using it to help re- duce residual smoke. To remove the ashtray for cleaning, hold the right and left sides of the ashtray and pull it out. toothbrush or other narrow-ended im- plement. ÂCAUTION Do not use ashtrays as waste recep- tacles or leave a lighted cigarette in an ashtray. This could cause a fire.

Interior equipment 6-9 Coat hook

d cs | | | A CAUTION ] oc22s 4 A retaining pin is located on the driver's Make sure the driver’s floor mat is The coat hook is attached to the rear left side of the vehicle next to the fuel filler placed back in its proper location passenger's hand grip. door release. and correctly secured on its retain- The floor mat is secured using the built-in ing If the floor mat slips forward [ ÂCAUTION grommet, by placing the grommet over the andinterferes with the movement of pin and pushing downward. the pedals during driving, it could Never hang anything on the coat cause an accident. hook that might obstruct the driv- er's view or that could cause injury in sudden stops or in a collision. And do not hang items on the coat hook that weigh 2.2 lbs (1 kg) or more.

KP AI9OOBE-A book Page 10 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 6-10 interior equipment Cargo area cover (Wagon —if equipped) The cargo area cover is provided for cov- ering the cargo area and to protect its con- tents from direct sunlight. This cover is de- tachable to make room for additional car- go. HE Using the cover

To extend the cover, pull the end of the cover out of the housing, then insert its hooks into the catches as shown. To re- wind it, unhook it from the catches and it Will rewind automatically. You should hold on to the cover and guide it back into the cover housing while it is rewinding.

[ A WARNING Do not place anything on the ex- tended cover. Putting excessive weight on the extended cover can break it and an object on the cover could tumble forward in the event of a sudden stop or collision. This could cause serious injury. AÀCAUTION Be careful not to scratch the rear gate stays while extending and re- winding the cover. Scratches on the stays could cause leakage of gas from the stays, which may result in their inability to hold the rear gate open. EH To remove the cover

1. Rewind the cover.

2. Pull either sleeve on the end of the cov-

er housing to shorten the covers length.

3. Take it off the retainer.

H Stowage of the cover

1 à KP AT90OBE-A book Page 11 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM The cargo area cover can be stowed un- der the cargo floor. ÆToinstall the cover housing

1. Pull either sleeve on the end of the cov-

er housing to shorten the cover's length.

2. Insert the projections located on the

both ends of the sleeve into the recesses of the retainers. Cargo tie-down hooks (Wag- n — if equipped) —+1® Interior equipment 6-11 ÂÀCAUTION |

The cargo tie-down hooks are de- signed only for securing light cargo. Never try to secure cargo that ex- ceeds the capacity of the hooks. The maximum load capacity is 44 Ibs (20 kg) per a hook. The cargo area is equipped with four tie- down hooks so that cargo can be secured With a cargo net or ropes. When using the tie-down hooks, turn them down out of the storing recesses. When not in use, put the hooks up into the stor- ing recesses.

1 à KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 12 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

6-12 Interior equipment Cargo area bars Under-floor storage compart- ment (if equipped)

In the cargo area, there are two bars (one on each side) to which a net can be at- tached. ÂCAUTION | Do not place objects with a total weight exceeding 6.6 Ibs (3 kg) on a net attached to the cargo area bars. The storage compartment is located un- der the floor of the cargo area and can be used to store small items. To open the lid, pull the tab up. NOTE When storing a flat tire, put the storage tray in the cargo area. [ Â CAUTION + Always keep the lids closed while driving to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden stop or an accident.

+ Do not store spray cans, contain- ers with flammable or corrosive liquids or any other dangerous items in the storage compartment.

7-2 Fuel requirements . 7-2 Fuel filler lid and cap . 74 State emission testing (U.S. only) 7-5 Preparing to drive 7-6 Starting the engine 77 Manual transmission vehicle 7-7 Automatic transmission vehicle 77 Stopping the engine … … 7-8 Manual transmission — 6 speeds (WRX-STI) 79 Selecting reverse gear . 7-9 Shifting speeds 79 Driving tips 7-10 Manual trans on — 5 speeds (except WRX-STI) - Shifting speeds 7-11 Driving tips … 7-12 Driver’s Control Center (WRX-STI) Auto mode . Manual mode Temporary release . Automatic transmission Selector lever for automatic transmission Shift lock release … Limited slip differential (LSD) Power steering

Starting and operating Braking Braking tips Brake system Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) . ABS system self-check ABS warning light Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system … Steps to take if EBD system fails . Parking your vehicle Parking brake Parking tips … Cruise control To set cruise control To temporarily cancel the cruise control To turn off the cruise control . To change the cruising speed 7-21 7-21 7-21 7-22 7-22 7-22 7-23 7-24 7-24 7-25 7-25 7-25 7-27 7-27 7-28 7-28 7-28

1 à WP AIDOOBE-A-G07.îm Page 2 Wednesday, June 22, 2005 9:43 AM

7-2 Starting and operating Fuel [ À CAUTION Use of a fuel which is low in quality or use of an inappropriate fuel addi- tive may cause engine damage. M Fuel requirements Y 2.5-liter non-turbo models The 2.54iter non-turbo engine is designed to operate using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI or higher. Y WRX The 2.5-liter turbo engine is designed to operate using premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI or higher. If premium unleaded gasoline is not avail- able, regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI or higher may be temporarily used. For optimum engine performance and driveability, it is required that you use premium grade unleaded gasoline. NOTE Be sure to use premium unleaded gas- oline of 91 AKI or higher for WRX. If other gasoline (lower than 91 AKI) is used, knocking, reduced output and poor accelerator response will result. Y WRX-STI The 2.5-liter turbo engine is designed to operate using super-premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 93 AKI or higher. If super-premium unleaded gaso- line with an octane rating of 93 AKI or higher is not available, premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI or higher may be temporarily used. For opti- mum engine performance and driveability, it is required that you use super-premium grade unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 93 AKI or higher. NOTE Be sure to use super-premium unlead- ed gasoline of 93 AKI or higher for WRX-STI. If other gasoline (lower than 93 AKI) is used, knocking, reduced out- put and poor accelerator response will result. Y Fuel octane rating This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and Motor Octane num- bers and is commonly referred to as the Anti Knock Index (AK). Using a gasoline with a lower octane rat- ing can cause persistent and heavy knocking, which can damage the engine. Do not be concerned if your vehicle some-

times knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or when you accelerate. See your dealer or a qualified service technician if you use a fuel with the specified octane rating and your vehicle knocks heavily or persistently. Y Unleaded gasoline The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler nozzle. Under no circumstances should leaded gasoline be used because it will damage the emission control system and may impair driveability and fuel economy. Y Gasoline for California-certified LEV Your vehicle was certified to California's low emission vehicle (LEV) standards as indicated on the underhood tune-up label, it is designed to optimize engine and emission performance with gasoline that meets the clean burning low-sulfur Califor- nia gasoline specifications. If you live in any other state than California, your vehi- cle will operate on gasoline meeting Fed- eral specifications. Gasoline sold outside California is permitted to have higher sul- fur levels, which may affect the perfor- mance of your vehicle's catalytic convert- er and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or smell. SUBARU recommends that you try a different brand of unleaded gasoline having lower sulfur to determine if the

] à & 7 AI900BE-A-G07.fm Page 3 Wednesday, June 22, 2005 9:43 AM

problem is fuel related before returning your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service. Y MMT Some gasoline contains an octane-en- hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy- clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If you use such fuels, your emission control system performance may deteriorate and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal- function indicator lamp may turn on. If this happens, return to your authorized SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is deter- mined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be cov- ered by your warranty. Y Gasoline for cleaner air Your use of gasoline with detergent addi- tives will help prevent deposits from form- ing in your engine and fuel system. This helps keep your engine in tune and your emission control system working properly, and is a way of doing your part for cleaner air. If you continuously use a high quality fuel with the proper detergent and other additives, you should never need to add any fuel system cleaning agents to your fuel tank. Many gasolines are now blended with ma- terials called oxygenates. Use of these fu- els can also help keep the air cleaner. Ox- ygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE (Me- thyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol (ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in your ve- hicle, but should contain no more than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the proper operation of your SUBARU. In addition, some gasoline suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines, which are designed to reduce vehicle emissions. SUBARU approves the use of reformulated gasoline. If you are not sure what the fuel contains, you should ask your service station oper- ators if their gasolines contain detergents and oxygenates and if they have been re- formulated to reduce vehicle emissions. As additional guidance, only use fuels suited for your vehicle as explained in the following. + Fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that specified in this manual. + Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline. Methanol can be used in your vehicle ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel mixture AND if it is accompanied by suffi- cient quantities of the proper cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors required to pre-

—+1® Starting and operating 7-3 vent damage to the fuel system. Do not use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT un- der these conditions. + If undesirable driveability problems are experienced and you suspect they may be fuel related, try a different brand of gaso- line before seeking service at your SUBARU dealer. + Fuel system damage or driveability problems which result from the use of im- proper fuel are not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty. À CAUTION Do not let fuel spill on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Fuels con- taining alcohol may cause paint damage, which is not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty. — CONTINUED — nil

1 à KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 4 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

7-4 Starting and operating M Fuel filler lid and cap Y Refueling

lease lever up. The lever is on the floor at the left of the driver's seat.

2. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it

slowly counterclockwise. [ A WARNING + Gasoline vapor is highly flamma- ble. Before refueling, always first stop the engine and make sure that there are no lighted ciga- rettes, open flames or electrical sparks in the adjacent area.

+ When opening the cap, do not re- move the cap quickly. Fuel may be under pressure and spray out of the fuel filler neck especially it hot weather, which may cause in- jury.

3. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler

pump automatically stops. Do not add any more fuel.

4. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise

until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain not to catch the tether under the cap while tightening.

5. Close the fuel filler lid completely.

If you spill any fuel on the painted surface, rinse it off immediately. Otherwise, the painted surface could be damaged. NOTE + You will see the “ > ” or “FUEL DOOR - ” sign in the fuel gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler door (lid) is located on the right side of the vehicle. + If the fuel filler cap is not tightened until it clicks or if the tether is caught under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE warning light may come on. Refer to the “Warning and indicator lights” sec- tion located in chapter 3. (Turbo model only) Promptly put fuel in the tank whenever the low fuel warning nil

KT AT90OBE-A book Page $ Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM light comes on. Engine misfires as a re- sult of an empty tank could cause dam- age to the engine. A CAUTION ] + Never add any cleaning agents to the fuel tank. The addition of a cleaning agent may cause dam- age to the fuel system. Make sure that the cap is tight- ened until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an acci- dent. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Fuels may cause paint damage, which is not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty. Always use a genuine SUBARU fuel filler cap. If you use the wrong cap, it may not fit or have proper venting, and your fuel tank and emission control system might be damaged. State emission testing (U.S. only) At state inspection time, remember to tell your inspection or service station in advance not to place your Subaru AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dyna- mometer. Otherwise, serious transmis- sion damage will result. Some states have started using dyna- mometers in their state inspection pro- grams in order to meet their obligation un- der federal law to implement stricter vehi- cle emission standards to reduce air pollu- tion from vehicles. À dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like testing device that allows your vehicle's wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in one place. Depend- ing on the severity of a states air pollution problems, the states must adopt either a “basic” or “enhanced” vehicle emission in- spection test. Normally, a portion of the basic emission test consists of an emis- sion inspector inserting an analyzer probe into the exhaust pipe of an idling vehicle for a short period of time. States with more severe air pollution problems are required to adopt an enhanced vehicle emission test. This test simulates actual driving conditions on a dynamometer and permits more accurate measurement of tailpipe

Starting and operating 7-5 emitted pollution than the basic emission test. The U.S. Environmental Protection Agen- cy (EPA) and states using two-wheel dy- namometers in their emission testing pro- grams have EXEMPTED Subaru AWD vehicles from the portion of the testing program that involves a two-wheel dyna- mometer. There are some states that use four-wheel dynamometers in their testing programs. When properly used, that equipment will not damage an AWD Subaru vehicle. Under no circumstances should the rear wheels be jacked off the ground, nor should the driveshaft be disconnected for state emission testing. À WARNING Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehi- cle must NEVER be performed on a single two-wheel dynamometer. At- tempting to do so will result in un- controlled vehicle movement and may cause an accident or injuries to persons nearby. — CONTINUED —

= AÏ900BE-A.book Page 6 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

7-6 Starting and operating [ À CAUTION Resultant vehicle damage due to im- proper testin ot covered under the SUBARU ed Warranty and is the responsibility of the state in- spection program or its contractors or licensees. The EPA has issued regulations for in- specting the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) system as part of the state emissions in- spection. The OBD system is designed to detect engine and transmission problems that might cause vehicle emissions to ex- ceed allowable limits. These inspections apply to all 1996 model year and newer passenger cars and light trucks. Over 30 states plus the District of Columbia have implemented the OBD system inspection. + The inspection of the OBD system con- sists of a visual operational check of the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/malfunc- tion indicator lamp (MIL) and an examina- tion of the OBD system with an electronic scan tool while the engine is running. + A vehicle passes the OBD system in- spection if proper the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/MIL illumination is observed, there is no stored diagnostic trouble codes, and the OBD system readiness monitors are complete. + A vehicle fails the OBD inspection if the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/MIL is not properly operating or there is one or more diagnostic trouble codes stored in vehicle's computer with the “CHECK EN- GINE” warning light/MIL illuminated. + A state emission inspection may reject (not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of OBD system readiness monitors “Not Ready” is greater than one. Under this condition, the vehicle operator should be instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few days to set the monitors and return for an emission re-inspection. + Owners of rejected or failing vehicles should contact their Subaru Dealer for service. Preparing to drive You should perform the following checks and adjustments every day before you start driving.

1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and

lights are clean and unobstructed.

2. Check the appearance and condition of

the tires. Also check tires for proper infla- tion.

3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of

4. Check that the hood, trunk (Sedan)

and rear gate (Wagon) are fully closed.

5. Check the adjustment of the seat.

6. Check the adjustment of the inside and

7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your

passengers have fastened their seatbelts.

8. Check the operation of the warning and

indicator lights when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position.

9. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-

ing lights after starting the engine. NOTE Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, washer fluid and other fluid levels Should be checked daily, weekly or at fuel stops.

1 à KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 7 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

Starting the engine [ À CAUTION ] Do not operate the starter motor continuously for more than ten sec- onds. If the engine fails to start after operating the starter for five to ten seconds, wait for ten seconds or more before trying again. EH Manual transmission vehicle

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-

3. Press the clutch pedal to the floor and

shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor while starting the engine. The starter motor will only operate when the clutch pedal is pressed fully to the floor.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” po-

sition and check the operation of the warn- ing and indicator lights. Refer to the “Warning and indicator lights” section (chapter 3).

5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”

position without depressing the accelera- tor pedal. Release the key immediately af- ter the engine has started. If the engine does not start, try the follow- ing. 1)Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position and wait for at least 10 sec- onds. After checking that the parking brake is firmly set, turn the ignition switch to the “START” position while de- pressing the accelerator pedal slightly (approximately a quarter of the full stroke). Release the accelerator pedal as soon as the engine starts. 2)1fthis fails to start the engine, turn the ignition switch back to the “OFF” posi- tion and wait for at least 10 seconds. Then fully depress the accelerator ped- al and turn the ignition switch to the “START” position. If the engine starts, quickly release the accelerator pedal. 3)1fthis fails to start the engine, turn the ignition switch again to the “OFF” posi- tion. After waiting for 10 seconds or longer, turn the ignition switch to the “START” position without depressing the accelerator pedal. 4)lf the engine still refuses to start, con- tact your nearest SUBARU dealer for assistance.

6. Confirm that all warning and indicator

lights have gone off after the engine has started. The fuel injection system auto- matically lowers the idle speed as the en- gine warms up.

—+1® Starting and operating 7-7 NOTE The engine may be difficult to start when the battery has been disconnect- ed and reconnected (for maintenance or other purposes). This difficulty is caused by the electronically controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis function. To overcome it, keep the ignition switch in the “ON” position for approximately 10 seconds before starting the engine. BAutomatic transmission vehi- cle

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-

3. Shift the selector lever to the “P” or “N”

position (preferably “P” position). The starter motor will only operate when the select lever is at the “P” or “N” position.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” po-

sition and check the operation of the warn- ing and indicator lights. Refer to the “Warning and indicator lights” section (chapter 3).

5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”

position without depressing the accelera- tor pedal. Release the key immediately af- ter the engine has started. If the engine does not start, try the follow- — CONTINUED — nil

KT AT90OBE-A book Page 8 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 7-8 Starting and operating ing. 1)Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position and wait for at least 10 sec- onds. After checking that the parking brake is firmly set, turn the ignition switch to the “START” position while de- pressing the accelerator pedal slightly (approximately a quarter of the full stroke). Release the accelerator pedal as soon as the engine starts. 2)1f this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition switch back to the “OFF” posi- tion and wait for at least 10 seconds. Then fully depress the accelerator ped- al and turn the ignition switch to the “START” position. lf the engine starts, quickly release the accelerator pedal. 3)1f this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition switch again to the “OFF” posi- tion. After waiting for 10 seconds or longer, turn the ignition switch to the “START” position without depressing the accelerator pedal. 4)1f the engine still refuses to start, con- tact your nearest SUBARU dealer for assistance.

6. Confirm that all warning and indicator

lights have gone out after the engine has started. The fuel injection system auto- matically lowers the idle speed as the en- gine warms up.

While the engine is warming up, make

sure that the selector lever is at the “P” or “N” position and that the parking brake is applied. NOTE The engine may be difficult to start when the battery has been disconnect- ed and reconnected (for maintenance or other purposes). This difficulty is caused by the electronically controlled throttle’s self-diagno: function. To overcome it, keep the ignition switch in the “ON” position for approximately 10 seconds before starting the engine. ÂCAUTION If you restart the engine while the vehicle is moving, shift the selector lever into the “N” position. Do not attempt to place the selector lever of a moving vehicle into the “P” posi- tion. Stopping the engine The ignition switch should be turned off only when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is idling. À WARNING Do not stop the engine when the ve- hicle is moving. This will cause loss of power to the power steering and the brake booster, making steering and braking more difficult. It could also result in accidental activation of the “LOCK” position on the igni- tion switch, causing the steering wheel to lock.

KP AT9OOBE-A book Page 9 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM Manual transmission — 6 speeds (WRX-STI)

[ A WARNING | The manual transmission is a fully syn- chromeshed, 6-forward-speed and 1-re- verse-speed transmission. The shift pattern is shown on the shift le- ver knob. Do not drive the vehicle with the clutch disengaged (i.e., when the clutch pedal is depressed) or with the shift lever in the neutral posi- tion. Engine braking has no effect in er of these conditions and the risk of an accident is consequently increased. H Selecting reverse gear

You must raise the slider and hold it in that position before you can move the shift le- ver to the “R” position. To change gears, fully depress the clutch

Starting and operating 7-9 pedal, move the shift lever, and gradually let up on the clutch. If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the transmission in neutral, release the clutch pedal momentarily, and then try again. [ À CAUTION Shift into reverse ONLY when the vehicle has completely stopped. It may cause damage to the transmis- sion to try shifting into reverse when the vehicle is moving. E Shifting speeds Y Recommended shifting speeds The best compromise between fuel econ- omy and vehicle performance during nor- mal driving is ensured by shifting up at the speeds listed in the following table. Shift up mph (km/h) 1stto 2nd 15 (24) 2nd to 3rd 25 (40) 3rd to 4th 40 (64) Ath to Sth 45 (72) 5th to 6th 50 (80) — CONTINUED -

KP AI9OOBE-A book Page 10 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 7-10 Starting and operating Y Maximum allowable speeds The following tables show the maximum speeds that are possible with each differ- ent gear. The tachometer's needle will en- ter the red area if these speeds are ex- ceeded. With the exception of cases where sudden acceleration is required, the vehicle should not be driven with the tachometer's needle inside the red area. Failure to ob- serve this precaution can lead to exces- sive engine wear and poor fuel economy. Gear mph (km/h) 1st 33 (53) 50 (81) 68 (110)

2nd 3rd ah 114 (143) AWARNING When shifting down a gear, ensure that the vehicle is not travelling at a speed exceeding the Maximum Al- lowable Speed for the gear which is about to be selected. Failure to ob- serve this precaution can lead to en- gine over-revving and this in turn can result in engine damage.

In addition, sudden application of engine brakes when the vehicle is travelling on a slippery surface can lead to wheel locking; as a conse- quence, control of the vehicle may be lost and the risk of an accident in- creased. NOTE Never exceed posted speed limits. M Driving tips Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to hold your vehicle at a standstill on an up- grade. Either of those actions may cause clutch damage. Do not drive with your hand resting on the shift lever. This may cause wear on the transmission components. When it is necessary to reduce vehicle speed due to slow traffic, turning corners, or driving up steep hills, downshift to a lower gear before the engine starts to la- bor. On steep downgrades, downshift the transmission to 5th, 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear as necessary; this helps to maintain a safe speed and to extend brake pad life. In this way, the engine provides a braking

effect. Remember, if you “ride” (over use) the brakes while descending a hill, they may overheat and not work properly. The engine may, on rare occasions, knock when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This phenomenon is not an indication of a problem in your vehicle.

KP AT90OBE-A book Page 11 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM Manual transmission — 5 speeds (except WRX-STI)

The manual transmission is a fully syn- chromeshed, 5-forward-speed and 1-re- verse-speed transmission. The shift pattern is shown on the shift le- ver knob. When shifting from 5th gear to reverse gear, first return the shift lever to the neutral position then shift into reverse gear. To change gears, fully depress the clutch pedal, move the shift lever, and gradually let up on the clutch pedal. Ifit is difficult to shift into gear, put the transmission in neutral, release the clutch pedal momentarily, and then try again.

Starting and operating 7-11 [ A WARNING | Do not drive the vehicle with the clutch disengaged (i.e., when the clutch pedal is depressed) or with the shift lever in the neutral po: tion. Engine braking has no effect in either of these conditions and the risk of an accident is consequently increased. [ À CAUTION Shift into reverse ONLY when the vehicle has completely stopped. It may cause damage to the transmis- sion to try shifting into reverse when the vehicle is moving. E Shifting speeds Y Recommended shifting speeds The best compromise between fuel econ- omy and vehicle performance during nor- mal driving is ensured by shifting up at the speeds listed in the following table.

Shift up mph (km/h) 1stto 2nd 15 (24) 2nd to 3rd 25 (40) 3rd to 4th 40 (65) Ath to Sth 45 (73) Y Maximum allowable speeds The following table shows the maximum speeds that are possible with each differ- ent gear. Never exceed the speed limit listed in the following table for each gear position ex- cept for brief acceleration in an emergen- cy. The tachometer's needle will enter the red area if these speeds are exceeded. Failure to observe this precaution can lead to excessive engine wear and poor fuel economy. Non-turbo models mph (km/h) 1st 31 (50) 2nd 52 (84) 3rd 75 (120) — CONTINUED -

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 12 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 7-12 Starting and operating Turbo models mph (km/h) 1st 34 (54) 59 (95) 2nd 3rd 85 (136) A WARNING When shifting down a gear, ensure that the vehicle is not travelling at a speed exceeding the Maximum Al- lowable Speed for the gear which is about to be selected. Failure to ob- serve this precaution can lead to en- gine over-revving and this in turn can result in engine damage. In addition, sudden application of engine brakes when the vehicle is travelling on a slippery surface can lead to wheel locking; as a conse- quence, control of the vehicle may be lost and the risk of an accident in- creased.

M Driving tips Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to hold your vehicle at a standstill on an up- grade. Either of those actions may cause

clutch damage. Do not drive with your hand resting on the shift lever. This may cause wear on the transmission components. When it is necessary to reduce vehicle speed due to slow traffic, turning corners, or driving up steep hills, downshift to a lower gear before the engine starts to la- bor. On steep downgrades, downshift the transmission to 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear as necessary; this helps to maintain a safe speed and to extend brake pad life. In this way, the engine provides a braking effect. Remember, if you “ride” (over use) the brakes while descending a hill, they may overheat and not work properly. The engine may, on rare occasions, knock when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This phenomenon is not an indication of a problem in your vehicle. Driver’s Control Center Dif- ferential (DCCD) (WRX-STI) [ A WARNING Always use the utmost care when driving. Being overconfident be- cause you are driving a vehicle wi a driver’s control center differe: could easily lead to a serious acci- dent.

d di|æ #7 A1900BE-A.book Page 13 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM n 41

A CAUTION ] In the event of failure of the drivers control center differential, the “ ” indicator light will flash. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. The driver's control center differential al- lows you to freely change the degree of limitation of the differential action (limited slip differential (LSD) torque) of your vehi- cle's center differential. By using the center differential control di- al, you can set an initial LSD torque to match the road surface conditions, driving conditions and your driving style.

À) Initial LSD torque (adjustable) B) Mechanical LSD torque NOTE If you rapidly depress and release the accelerator pedal while driving at low speed, you may hear a knocking sound from the vicinity of the center differen- tial and rear differential. This sound oc- curs because of the structure of the center differential. lt does not indicate a problem.

Starting and operating 7-13 Auto mode

In the auto mode, the system estimates the driving and road conditions using sig- nals from the wheel speed sensor, throttle position sensor, steering angle sensor and brake switch, etc. According to the re- sult, it electronically and automatically controls the degree of limitation of the dif- ferential action (LSD torque) to optimize the differential action of the center differ- ential. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the “AUTO” indicator light in the com- bination meter comes on. The system can be switched to a manual mode. EH Manual mode In the manual mode, you can use the cen- ter differential control dial to adjust the ini- — CONTINUED —

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page 14 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

7-14 Starting and operating tial LSD torque as desired. When this mode is selected, the “AUTO” indicator light in the combination meter goes off. Y Manual switch DCCD

Press the “DCCD-MANU" switch on the center console to switch from auto mode to manual mode. The “AUTO” indicator light in the combination meter will go off. Press the switch again to go back to auto mode. The “AUTO” indicator light in the combination meter will come on. Y Center differential control dial and indicator light C.DIFF

The control dial is located beside the park- ing-brake lever. By turning the control dial forward and rearward, it is possible to change the initial LSD torque. The center-differential indicator lights in the combination meter give six levels of in- dication. The indicator lights and control dial are linked; when the dial is turned to change the initial LSD torque, the illumina- tion position of the indicator lights chang- es accordingly.

Turn the dial forward to increase the initial LSD torque; when the white line on the dial reaches the frontmost position, the ini- tial LSD torque setting is maximum. The center differential will then be almost com- pletely locked and the “LOCK” indicator light will come on.

KP AT90OBE-A book Page 15 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM Loc Turn the dial rearward to reduce the initial LSD torque; when the white line reaches the rearmost position, the initial LSD torque will be minimum and the “ ( ”’indi- cator light will come on. Under this condi- tion, only the Mechanical LSD torque will limit the differential action. À CAUTION ] + Do not turn the control dial when a wheel slippage occurs. Wait un- til the wheelspin has been brought under control. + Under any of the following condi- tions, turn the center differential control dial to the rearmost posi- tion to minimize the initial LSD torque: + When a temporary spare tire is installed + When your vehicle is towed + When the vehicle is stopped with the manual mode selected NOTE + A higher initial LSD torque setting gives the vehicle greater traction when driving straight ahead but makes cor- nering more difficult. Remember this when adjusting the initial LSD torque. In general, higher settings assist dri roads and lower settings for non-slip- pery roads. If you become stuck in snow or mud, turning the center differ- ential control dial to the frontmost po- sition will help move the vehicle out. (The “LOCK” indicator will come on at the frontmost position.) + During cornering or when making turns (especially when getting into the garage), the rotational difference be- tween the front and rear wheels may cause a braking effect accompanied by

Starting and operating 7-15 vibration and noise. This does not indi- cate a problem. The phenomenon will disappear when you turn the center dif- ferential control dial to the rearmost position (minimum initial LSD torque position). + Use the center-differential indicator light only as a rough indication of the initial LSD torque. + If you operate the center differential control dial while quickly accelerating or turning a tight corner, you may feel slight shocks. This is due to differential action by the center differential and does not indicate a problem. H Temporary release When the driver stops the vehicle and pulls the parking-brake lever after manual- ly setting the initial LSD torque, the LSD torque is temporarily minimized. However the indicator in the combination meter continues to show the driver's selected ini- tial LSD torque. When the driver releases the parking-brake lever, the initial LSD torque set by the driver is restored.

KP AT90OBE-A book Page 16 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 7-16 Starting and operating Automatic transmission A WARNING + When parking the vehicle, first se- curely apply the parking brake The automatic transmission is electroni- Do not shift from the “P” or “N” po- and then place the selector lever cally controlled with 4-forward speeds and sition into the “D”, “3”, “2”, “1” or in the “P” position. Avoid parking 1-reverse speed. “R” position while depressing the for a long time with the selector le- NOTE accelerator pedal. This may cause ver in any other position as doing : the vehicle to jump forward or back- so could result in a dead battery. + When the engine coolant tempera- ward. ture is still low, your vehicle’s automat- , ic transmission will up-shift at higher H Selector lever for automatic engine speeds than when the coolant ÂCAUTION transmission temperature is su ently high in or- * Shift into the “P” or “R” position der to shorten the warm-up time and only after the vehicle is complete- improve driveability. The gearshift tim- ly stopped. Shifting while the ve- ing will automatically shift to the nor- hicle is moving may cause dam- mal timing after the engine has warmed age to the transmission.

+ immediately after ATF (automatic * Do not race the engine for more transmission fluid) is replaced, you than five seconds in any position may feel that the automatic transmis- except the “N° or “P” position sion operation is somewhat unusual. when the brake is set or when This results from invalidation of data chocks are used in the wheels. the on-board computer has collected This may cause the automatic and stored in memory to allow the transmission fluid to overheat. 700034 transmission to shift at the most ap- + Avoid shifting from one of the for- propriate times for the current condi: ward driving positions into the tion of your vehicle. Optimized shifting “R’ position or vice versa until the will be restored as the vehicle contin- vehicle has completely stopped. ues to be driven for a while. Such shifting may cause damage to the transmission. > SA et +

e||4… KŸ7 AI900BE-A.book Page 17 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

= : Withthe brake pedal depressed, move the lever along the gate. : Move the lever along the gate. The selector lever has seven positions. Y P (Park) This position is for parking the vehicle and starting the engine. In this position, the transmission is me- chanically locked to prevent the vehicle from rolling freely. When you park the vehicle, first set the parking brake fully, then shift into the “P” position. Do not hold the vehicle with only the transmission. A shift interlock function is employed in the automatic transmission system to en- sure safe starting of the vehicle. To shift the selector lever from the “P” to the any other position, you have to de- press the brake pedal fully when the igni- tion switch is in the “ON” position. This prevents the vehicle from lurching when it is started. If the shift lever does not move from the “P” position with the brake pedal de- pressed, refer to the “Shift lock release” section in this chapter. V R (Reverse) This position is for backing the vehicle. To shift from the “N” to “R” position, first stop the vehicle completely then move the lever to the “R” position. Y N (Neutral) This position is for restarting a stalled en- gine. In this position the wheels and transmis- sion are not locked. In this position, the transmission is neutral; the vehicle will roll freely, even on the slightest incline unless the parking brake or foot brake is on. Avoid coasting with the transmission neu- tral. During coasting, there is no engine brak- ing effect.

Starting and operating 7-17 NOTE If you stop the engine with the selector lever in the “N” position, move the se- lector lever to the “P” position immedi- ately. Otherwise, you may find that the selector lever soon cannot be moved to the “P” position. If you find that the selector lever cannot be moved from the “N” position to the “P” position, turn the ignition switch to the “ON” po- sition and try again. A WARNING | Do not drive the vehicle with the se- lector lever in the “N” (neutral) posi- tion. Engine braking has no effect in this condition and the risk of an ac- cident is consequently increased. Y D (Drive) This position is for normal driving. The transmission automatically shifts into a suitable gear from 1st to 4th according to the vehicle speed and the acceleration you require. When more acceleration is required in this position, press the accelerator pedal fully to the floor and hold that position. The transmission will automatically downshift to 3rd, 2nd or 1st gear. When you release the pedal, the transmission will return to — CONTINUED — nil

e||4… KŸ7 AI900BE-A.book Page 18 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

7-18 Starting and operating the original gear position. V While climbing a grade When driving up hill, undesired upshift to Ath gear is prevented from taking place when the accelerator pedal is released. This minimizes the chances of subse- quent downshifting to a lower gear when accelerating again. This prevents repeat- ed upshifting and downshifting resulting in a smoother operation of the vehicle. NOTE The transmission may downshift to 2nd or 1st gear, depending on the way the accelerator pedal is pressed to ac- celerate the vehicle again. V While going down a hill When descending a steep hill, depressing the brake pedal will cause the transmis- sion to downshift to 3rd gear, thus apply- ing engine braking. Reacceleration for a short time will cause the transmission to upshift normally. NOTE In some cases, depressing the brake pedal on a downhill grade does not re- sult in an automatic downshift to 3rd gear. This can happen when the auto- matic transmission fluid temperature is very low, for example, during driving shortly after the vehicle has been parked for an extended period of time. When the ATF temperature has risen to a certain level, automatic downshift normally takes place. In the meantime, downshift manually for engine braking as required. Also, downshifting when braking downbhill will not occur at speeds above approximately 48 mph (78 km/h). Y 3 (Third) This position is for using engine braking when going down a hill or for climbing a grade. The transmission automatically shifts into a suitable gear from 1st to 3rd according to the vehicle speed and the acceleration you require. When more acceleration is required in this position, press the accelerator pedal fully to the floor and hold that position. The transmission will automatically downshift to 2nd or 1st gear. When you release the pedal, the transmission will return to the original gear position. Y 2 (Second) This position is for using engine braking when going down a hill or for climbing a steep grade. In this position, the transmission holds in

the 2nd gear. Use this position when starting off from a standstill on slippery road surfaces such as mud or snow. lt will ensure greater trac- tion. Y 1 (First) This position is for driving up or down very steep grades, or driving through mud or sand, or on slippery surfaces. In this posi- tion, the transmission holds in the 1st gear. Y Maximum speeds The following tables show the maximum speeds that are possible with each differ- ent gear. When shifting down a gear, it is important to confirm that the current vehicle speed is not in excess of the Maximum Allowable Speed of the gear which is about to be se- lected. mph (km/h) Non-turbo models | Turbo models 1 28 (45) 28 (45) 2 62 (100) 65 (104) 3 97 (156) 104 (167) nil

KP AT90OBE-A book Page 19 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM NOTE In order to prevent over-revving during deceleration of the vehicle, the trans- mission will remain in the current gear if the speed of the vehicle is in excess of the Maximum Allowable Speed for the gear to which the selector lever has been moved. À WARNING When shifting down a gear, ensure that the vehicle is not travelling at a speed exceeding the Maximum Al- lowable Speed for the gear which is about to be selected. Failure to ob- serve this precaution can lead to en- gine over-revving and this in turn can result in engine damage.

In addition, sudden application of engine brakes when the vehicle is travelling on a slippery surface can lead to wheel locking; as a conse- quence, control of the vehicle may be lost and the risk of an accident in- creased. Y Driving tips + Always apply the foot or parking brake when the vehicle is stopped in the “D”, “3”, “2”, “1” or “R” position. + Always set the parking brake when ei+- parking your vehicle. Do not hold the vehi- cle with only the transmission. + Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary position on an uphill grade by using the “D”, “3”, “2”, or “1” position. Use the brake instead. The engine may, on rare occasions, knock when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This phenomenon is not an indication of a problem in your vehicle. BE Shift lock release If the selector lever does not move from the “P” position with the brake pedal de- pressed and the ignition switch in the “ON” position, perform the following steps: To override the shift lock:

1. Set the parking brake and stop the en-

2. Take out the screwdriver from the tool

3. Remove the cover by prying on the

edge with the screwdriver. —+1® Starting and operating 7-19

4. Insert the screwdriver into the hole.

5. Push down on the screwdriver and

move the selector lever from the “P” to the “N’ position.

6. Remove the screwdriver from the hole.

Depress the brake pedal and start the en- — CONTINUED —

KP AT90OBE-A book Page 20 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 7-20 Starting and operating gine. Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU dealer immediately to have the system re- paired.

Limited slip differential (LSD) (if equipped) The LSD provides optimum distribution of power according to the difference in revo- lutions between the right and left wheels that may be caused by certain driving con- ditions, thereby improving driving stability on snow-covered, muddy or other slippery roads or when high speed driving. NOTE (WRX-STI) The rear differential may emit a knock- ing sound when the vehicle is driven slowly with the steering wheel turned fully to either side. This sound occurs because of the design of the mechani- cal LSD. It does not indicate a problem. ACAUTION + Never start the engine while a tire on one side is jacked up, as the vehicle may move. e If one tire is spinning in mud, avoid continued spinning at high speed as this could adversely af- fect the LSD.

+ If you use a temporary spare tire to replace a flat tire, be sure to use the original temporary spare tire stored in the vehicle. Using other sizes will adversely affect the LSD.

d di|æ #7 A1900BE-A.book Page 21 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM n 41

Power steering Braking The power steering system operates only when the engine is running. If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system fails to function, you can steer but it will take much more effort. NOTE Right after the engine has been started and before it has warmed up, you may hear a noise coming from areas adja- cent to the power steering pump which is located at the right-front area of the engine compartment. This noise is nor- mal. It does not indicate power steering system trouble. ÂCAUTION Do not hold the steering wheel at the fully locked position left or right for more than five seconds. This may damage the power steering pump. BBraking tips [ A WARNING Never rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This can cause dangerous overheating of the brakes and needless wear on the brake pads and linings. Y When the brakes get wet When driving in rain or after washing the vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a re- sult, brake stopping distance will be long- er. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly depressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes. Y Use of engine braking Remember to make use of engine braking in addition to foot braking. When descend- ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used, the brakes may start working improperly because of brake fluid overheating, caused by overheated brake pads. To help prevent this, shift into a lower gear to get stronger engine braking. Y Braking when a tire is punctured Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly

Starting and operating 7-2 when a tire is punctured. This could cause a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep driv- ing straight ahead while gradually reduc- ing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe place. BBrake system Y Two separate circuits Your vehicle has two separate circuit brake systems. Each circuit works diago- nally across the vehicle. If one circuit of the brake system should fail, the other half ofthe system still works. Ifone circuit fails, the brake pedal will go down much closer to the floor than usual and you will need to press it down much harder. And a much longer distance will be needed to stop the vehicle. Y Brake booster The brake booster uses engine manifold vacuum to assist braking force. Do not turn off the engine while driving because that will turn off the brake booster, result- ing in poor braking power. The brakes will continue to work even when the brake booster completely stops functioning. If this happens, however, you Will have to push the pedal much harder than normal and the braking distance will increase. — CONTINUED —

d di|æ #7 A1900BE-A.book Page 22 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM n 41 7-22 Starting and operating B Disc brake pad wear warning | ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys- [ À CAUTION indicators tem) + The ABS system does not always D The ABS system prevents the lock-up of decrease stopping distance. You | wheels which may occur during sudden should always maintain a safe fol- braking or braking on slippery road surfac- lowing distance from other vehi- \ es. This helps prevent the loss of steering cles. | control and directional stability caused by ° When driving on badly surfaced | wheel lock-up. roads, gravel roads, icy roads, or over deep newly fallen snow, stopping distances may be longer for a vehicle with the ABS system than one without. When driving under these conditions, therefore, When the ABS system is operating, you may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal when the ABS operates.

7 The ABS system will not operate when the reduce your speed and leave am- bé The disc brake pad wear warning indica- | vehicle speed is below approximately 6 ple distance from other vehicles. tors on the disc brakes give a warning | mph (10 km/h). + When you feel the ABS system noise when the brake pads are worn. operating, you should maintain If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard A WARNING constant brake pedal pressure. from the disc brakes while braking, imme- — Do not pump the brake pedal diately have your vehicle checked by your Always use the utmost care in driv- since doing so may defeat the op- SUBARU dealer. D = GoanitEne SEE ven eration of the ABS system. are driving with an ABS equipped vehicle could easily lead to a seri- ous accident. y MH ABS system self-check Just after the vehicle is started, you may feel on the brake pedal a vibration similar to when the ABS operates, and you may also hear the sound of the ABS working from the engine compartment. This is caused by an automatic functional test of the ABS system being carried out and > PS > SA

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 23 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM does not indicate any abnormal condition. BH ABS warning light

The ABS warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi- tion and goes out after approximately two seconds. This is an indication that the ABS system is working properly. When driving with an insufficient battery voltage such as when the engine is jump started, the ABS warning light may come on. This is due to the low battery voltage and does not indicate a malfunction. When the battery becomes fully charged, the light will go out. [ A CAUTION If the warning light behaves as fol- lows, the ABS system may not be working properly. When the warning light is on, the ABS function shuts down; however, the conventional brake system con- tinues to operate normally. + The warning light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position. The warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, but it does not go out even when the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 8 mph (12 km/h). The warning light comes on dur- ing driving. If these occur, have the ABS system repaired at the first available oppor- tunity by your SUBARU dealer. NOTE If the warning light behavior is as de- scribed in the following, the ABS sys- tem may be considered normal. + The warning light comes on right af- ter the engine is started but goes out

Starting and operating 7-23 immediately, remaining off. + The warning light remains on after the engine has been started, but it goes out when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 8 mph (12 km/h). he warning light comes on during driving, but it goes out immediately and remains off.

e||4… KŸ7 AI900BE-A.book Page 24 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

7-24 Starting and operating Electronic Brake Force Dis- tribution (EBD) system The EBD system maximizes the effective- ness of the brakes by allowing the rear brakes to supply a greater proportion of the braking force. lt functions by adjusting the distribution of braking force to the rear wheels in accordance with the vehicles loading condition and speed. The EBD system is an integral part of the ABS system and uses some of the ABS system's components to perform its func- tion of optimizing the distribution of brak- ing force. If any of the ABS components used by the EBD function fails, the EBD system also stops working. When the EBD system is operating, you may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. EH Steps to take if EBD system fails

Ifa malfunction occurs in the EBD system, the system stops working and the brake system warning light and ABS warning light come on simultaneously. The EBD system may be faulty if the brake system warning light and ABS warning light illuminate simultaneously during driv- ing. Even if the EBD system fails, the conven- tional braking system will still function. However, the rear wheels will be more prone to locking when the brakes are ap- plied harder than usual and the vehicle's motion may therefore become somewhat harder to control. Ifthe brake system warning light and ABS

warning light illuminate simultaneously, take the following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, flat

2. Shut down the engine, then restart it.

3. Release the parking brake. If both

warning lights go out, the EBD system may be faulty. Drive carefully to the near- est SUBARU dealer and have the system inspected.

4. If both warning lights come on again

and stay illuminated after the engine has been restarted, shut down the engine again, apply the parking brake, and check the brake fluid level.

5. If the brake fluid level is not below the

“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be faulty. Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the system in- spected.

6. lf the brake fluid level is below the

“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. In- stead, have the vehicle towed to the near- est SUBARU dealer for repair.

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 25 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM À WARNING + Driving with the brake system light on is dangerous. This indicates your brake system may not be working properly. If the light remains on, have the brakes inspected by a SUBARU dealer immediately. If at all in doubt about whether the brakes are operating properly, do not drive the vehicle. Have your vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair. Parking your vehicle BE Parking brake To set the parking brake, press the brake pedal firmly and hold it down while fully pulling up the parking brake lever.

To release the parking brake, pull the le- ver up slightly, press the release button, then lower the lever while keeping the but- ton pressed. When the parking brake is set while the engine is running, the parking brake warn- ing light comes on. After starting the vehi- cle, be sure that the warning light has gone out before the vehicle is driven. Re- fer to the “Warning and indicator lights” section (chapter 3).

—+1® Starting and operating 7-25 ÂÀCAUTION | Never drive while the parking brake is set because this will cause unnec- essary wear on the brake linings. Before starting to drive, always make sure that the parking brake has been fully released. Parking tips When parking your vehicle, always set the parking brake firmly and put the shift lever in the “1” (1st) for an upgrade or “R” (Re- verse) for a downgrade for manual trans- mission vehicles, or in the “P” (Park) posi- tion for automatic transmission vehicles. Always set the parking brake firmly when parking your vehicle. Never rely on the transmission alone to hold the vehicle. — CONTINUED —

7-26 Starting and operating

KT AT90OBE-A book Page 26 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

turned away from the curb. When parking on a hill, always turn the steering wheel. When the vehicle is head- ed up the hill, the front wheels should be

À WARNING ÂCAUTION + Never leave unattended children or pets in the vehicle. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent opera- tion of the vehicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, the temperature in a closed vehicle could quickly be- come high enough to cause se- vere or possibly fatal injuries to people. Do not park the vehicle over flam- mable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags, as they may burn easily if they come near hot engine or exhaust sys- tem parts. Be sure to stop the engine if you take a nap in the vehicle. If engine exhaust gas enters the passenger compartment, occupants in the vehicle could die from carbon monoxide (CO) contained in the exhaust gas. If your vehicle has a front under- spoiler and rear underspoiler (both optional), pay attention to blocks and other obstructions on the ground when parking. The under- Spoilers could be damaged by con- tact with them. When facing downhill, the front wheels should be turned into the curb.

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 27 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM Cruise control Cruise control enables you to maintain a constant vehicle speed without holding your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is operative when the vehicle speed is 25 mph (40 km/h) or more. Make sure the main switch is turned “OFF” when the cruise control is not in use to avoid unin- tentionally setting the cruise control. NOTE If you move the cruise control lever or press the main switch button while turning the ignition switch “ON”, the cruise control function is deactivated and the “CRUISE” indicator light flash- es. To reactivate the cruise control function, turn the ignition switch back to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position, and then turn it again to the “ON” position. A WARNING | Do not use the cruise control under any of the following conditions. This may cause loss of vehicle control: + driving up or down a steep grade e driving on slippery or winding roads + driving in heavy traffic BTo set cruise control

—+1® Starting and operating 7-27 vehicle reaches the desired speed. CANCEL ARES /ACC | [CRUISEO SN YSET/COAST_/

3. Push the control lever downward in the

“SET/COAST” direction and release it. Then release the accelerator pedal. The “ CRUISE ” indicator light on the com- bination meter will come on.

2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the

At this time, the “ "indicator light is illuminated in the combination meter. — CONTINUED —

e||4… KŸ7 AI900BE-A.book Page 28 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

7-28 Starting and operating The vehicle will maintain the desired speed. Vehicle speed can be temporarily in- creased while driving with the cruise con- trol activated. Simply depress the acceler- ator pedal to accelerate the vehicle. When the accelerator pedal is released, the ve- hicle will return to and maintain the previ- ous cruising speed. HTo temporarily cancel the cruise control There are five ways to cancel the cruise control temporarily: CTA)

+ Pull the control lever in the “CANCEL” direction. + Depress the brake pedal. + Depress the clutch pedal (manual trans- mission vehicles only). + Shift the selector lever into the “N” posi- tion (automatic transmission vehicles only). + Shift the shift lever into neutral position (manual transmission vehicles only). The * "indicator light in the combi- nation meter goes off when the cruise control is cancelled. To resume the cruise control after it has been temporarily canceled and with vehi- cle speed of approximately 20 mph (32 km/h) or more, push the control lever up- ward in the “RES/ACC" direction to return to the original cruising speed automatical- ly. The * ”indicator light in the combi- nation meter will automatically come on at this time. To turn off the cruise control There are two ways to turn off the cruise control: + Push the main switch again. + Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position (but only when the vehi- cle is completely stopped).

A To change the cruising speed Y Toincrease the speed (by control le- ver) (ave > Ares /acc | EU) < | VSET/COAST_/

Push the control lever upward in the “RES/ACC" direction and hold it until the vehicle reaches the desired speed. Then, release the control lever. The vehicle speed at that moment will be memorized and treated as the new set speed. When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the set speed is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can be increased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the control lever upward in the “RES/ACC" direction quickly.

e||4… KŸ7 AI900BE-A.book Page 29 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

Y Toincrease the speed (by accelera- tor pedal)

1. Depress the accelerator pedal to accel-

erate the vehicle to the desired speed.

2. Push the control lever downward in the

“SET/COAST” direction once. Now the desired speed is set and the vehicle will keep running at that speed without de- pressing the accelerator pedal. NOTE If the difference between the actual ve- hicle speed when the control lever is pushed downward and the speed last time you set is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/ h), the vehicle speed will be lowered by 1 mph (1.6 km/h). This occurs because the cruise control system unit regards this lever operation as that intended to decrease the vehicle speed. Y To decrease the speed (by control lever) | can + ARES/ACC | ŒUS) «| YSET/COAST_/

Push the control lever downward in the “SET/COAST” direction and hold it until the vehicle reaches the desired speed. Then, release the control lever. The vehi- cle speed at that moment will be memo- rized and treated as the new set speed. When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the set speed is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can be lowered 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the control lever downward in the “SET/COAST" direction quickly. Y To decrease the speed (by brake pedal)

1. Depress the brake pedal to release

—+1® Starting and operating 7-29 cruise control temporarily.

2. When the speed decreases to the de-

sired speed, press the control lever down- ward in the “SET/COAST" direction once. Now the desired speed is set and the ve- hicle will keep running at that speed with- out depressing the accelerator pedal.

d di|æ KŸ7 A1900BE-A.book Page 1 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM n 41 Driving tips Eu New vehicle break-in driving — the first 1,000 Trailer towing . 8-19 miles (1,600 km) 8-2 Warranties and maintenance 8-19 Fuel economy hints 8-2 Maximum load limits 8-20 : Trailer hitches . 8-23 Engine exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) 8-2 Connecting a trailer . 8-24 Catalytic converter . 8-3 Trailer towing tips . 8-25 Periodic inspections . 8-4 ng in foreign countries … 8-4 g tips for AWD vehicles 8-5 Off road driving … . 8-6 AIl AWD models except OUTBACK SPORT and vehicles with 17 inch tires . 8-6

PS4 OUTBACK SPORT 8-6

Winter driving … 8-8 Operation during cold weather 8-8 Driving on snowy and icy roads . 8-9 Corrosion protection 8-10 Snow tires 8-10 Tire chains 8-11 Rocking the vehicle . 8-12 Loading your vehicle 8-12 Vehicle capacity weight . 8-13 GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle and Gross Axle Weight Rating) … Roof rail and crossbar (if equipped) Trailer hitch (if equipped) . Connecting a trailer When you do not tow a trailer . eit- +

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 2 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 8-2 Driving tips New vehicle break-in driving — the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) The performance and long life of your ve- hicle are dependent on how you handle and care for your vehicle while it is new. Follow these instructions during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km): + Do not race the engine. And do not al- low engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm ex- cept in an emergency. + Do not drive at one constant engine or vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or slow. + Avoid starting suddenly and rapid accel- eration, except in an emergency. + Avoid hard braking, except in an emer- gency. The same break-in procedures should be applied to an overhauled engine, newly mounted engine or when brake pads or brake linings are replaced with new ones. Fuel economy hints The following suggestions will help to save your fuel. + Select the proper gear position for the speed and road conditions. + Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera- tion. Always accelerate gently until you reach the desired speed. Then try to main- tain that speed for as long as possible. + Do not pump the accelerator and avoid racing the engine. + Avoid unnecessary engine idling. + Keep the engine properly tuned. + Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure shown on the tire placard, which is located under the door latch on the driv- er's side. Low pressure will increase tire wear and fuel consumption. + Use the air conditioner only when nec- essary. + Keep the front and rear wheels in prop- er alignment. + Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or cargo. Engine exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide)

[ A WARNING + Never inhale engine exhaust gas. Engine exhaust gas contains car- bon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled. Always properly maintain the en- gine exhaust system to prevent engine exhaust gas from entering the vehicle. Never run the engine in a closed space, such as a garage, except for the brief time needed to drive the vehicle in or out ofit. Avoid remaining in a parked vehi- cle for a lengthy time while the en- gine is running. If that is unavoid- able, then use the ventilation fan to force fresh air into the vehicle. Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free from snow, leaves or other obstructions to ensure that the ventilation system always works properly.

KT AT90OBE-A book Page 3 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM e Ifat any time you suspect that ex- haust fumes are entering the vehi- cle, have the problem checked and corrected as soon as possi- ble. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with all win- dows fully open. Keep the trunk lid (Sedan) or rear gate (Wagon) closed while driving to prevent exhaust gas from en- tering the vehicle. NOTE Due to the expansion and contraction of the metals used in the manufacture of the exhaust system, you may hear a crackling sound coming from the ex- haust system for a short time after the engine has been shut off. This sound is normal. Catalytic converter

Driving tips 8-3 The catalytic converter is installed in the exhaust system. lt serves as catalyst to reduce HC, CO and NO%x in exhaust gas- es, thus providing cleaner exhaust. To avoid damage to the catalytic convert- er: + Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small amount of leaded fuel will damage the cat- alytic converter. + Never start the engine by pushing or pulling the vehicle. + Avoid racing the engine. + Never turn off the ignition switch while the vehicle is moving. + Keep your engine tuned-up. |f you feel the engine running rough (misfiring, back- firing or incomplete combustion), have your vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized SUBARU dealer. + Do not apply undercoating or rust pre- vention treatment to the heat shield of cat- alytic converter and the exhaust system. [ A WARNING + Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive or park the vehicle anywhere near flammable materials (e.g. grass, paper, rags or leaves), because the catalytic converter operates at very high temperatures. — CONTINUED —

1 à KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 4 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

8-4 priving tips + Keep everyone and flammable materials away from the exhaust pipe while the engine is running. The exhaust gas is very hot. Periodic inspections Driving in foreign countries To keep your vehicle in the best condition at all times, always have the recommend- ed maintenance services listed in the maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet” performed at the specified time or mileage intervals. When planning to use your vehicle in an- other country: + Confirm the availability of the correct fu- el. (Refer to the “Fuel requirements” sec- tion in chapter 7.) + Comply with all regulations and require- ments of each country.

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page $ Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

Driving tips for AWD vehicles

AlI-Wheel Drive distributes the engine power to all four wheels. AWD vehicles provide better traction when driving on slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. By shifting power between the front and rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also provide added traction during acceleration and added engine braking force during decel- eration. Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle may handle differently than an ordinary two wheel drive vehicle and it contains some features unique to AWD. For safety purposes as well as to avoid damaging the AWD system, you should keep the fol- lowing tips in mind: + An AWD vehicle is better able to climb steeper roads under snowy or slippery conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle. There is little difference in handling, how- ever, during extremely sharp turns or sud- den braking. Therefore, when driving down a slope or turning corners, be sure to reduce your speed and maintain an am- ple distance from other vehicles. + When replacing a tire, make sure you use only the same size, construction, brand, and load range as the original tires listed on the tire placard. Using other siz- es, circumference or construction may re- sult in severe mechanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle and may affect ride, handling, braking, speedometer/ odometer calibration, and clearance be- tween the body and tires. lt also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle con- trol. + If you use a temporary spare tire to re- place a flat tire, be sure to use the original temporary spare tire stored in the vehicle. Using other sizes may result in severe mechanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle. + Always check the cold tire pressure be- fore starting to drive. The recommended tire pressure is provided on the tire plac- ard, which is located under the door latch

Driving tips 8-5 on the driver’s side. « Tire chains should always be placed on the front wheels only. « There are some precautions that you must observe when towing your vehicle. For detail information, see the “Towing” section in chapter 9. A WARNING ° Always maintain a safe driving speed according to the road and weather conditions in order to avoid having an accident on a sharp turn, during sudden braking or under other similar conditions. Always use the utmost care in driving — overconfidence because you are driving an AII-Wheel Drive vehicle could easily lead to a seri- ous accident.

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 6 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 8-6 Driving tips Off road driving À WARNING

° Always maintain a safe driving speed according to the road and weather conditions in order to avoid having an accident on a sharp turn, during sudden braking or under other similar conditions. Always use the utmost care in driving — overconfidence because you are driving an AII-Wheel Drive vehicle could easily lead to a seri- ous accident. ACAUTION Do not drive on rough roads or over curbs in a vehicle that has 17-inch or other ultra-low-profile tires. The wheels and tires could be damaged by shock forces, leading to abnor- mal vibration or poor straight-line tracking. Driving would then be more difficult. ei+- H AII AWD models except OUTBACK SPORT and vehi- cles with 17 inch tires Your AWD vehicle is neither a convention al off-road vehicle nor an all terrain vehi- cle. It is a passenger vehicle designed pri- marily for on-road use. The AWD feature gives it some limited off-road capabilities in situations in which driving surfaces are relatively level, obstruction-free and other- wise similar to on-road driving conditions. Operating it under other than those condi- tions could subject the vehicle to exces- sive stress which might result in damage not eligible for repair under warranty. If you do take your SUBARU off road, you Should review the common sense precau- tions in the next section (applicable to the OUTBACK SPORT) for general guidance. But please keep in mind that your vehi- cle's off-road capabilities are more limited than those of the OUTBACK SPORT. Never attempt to drive through pools and puddies, or roads flooded with water. Wa- ter entering the engine air intake or the ex- haust pipe or water splashing onto electri- cal parts may damage your vehicle and may cause it to stall.

Your Subaru can be driven on ordinary

roads or off-road. But please keep in mind that an AWD SUBARU is a passenger ve- hicle and is neither a conventional off-road vehicle nor an all-terrain vehicle. If you do take your Subaru off-road, certain com- mon sense precautions such as the fol- lowing should be taken: + Make certain that you and all of your passengers are wearing seatbelts. + Carry some emergency equipment, such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel, wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or citizens band radio. + Drive carefully. Do not take unneces- sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or over rough terrain. + Slow down and employ extra caution at all times. When driving off-road, you will not have the benefit of marked traffic lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and the like. + Do not drive across steep slopes. In- stead, drive either straight up or straight down the slopes. À vehicle can much more easily tip over sideways than it can end over end. Avoid driving straight up or down slopes that are too steep. + Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe- cially at higher speeds. + Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering wheel. À bad bump could jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Instead drive

1 à 7 AIS00BE-A book Page 7 Friday, June 17, 2008 5:40 PM

with your fingers and thumbs on the out- side of the rim. + If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check the depth of the water and the bottom of the stream bed for firmness and ensure that the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly and completely through the stream. The water should be shallow enough that it does not reach the vehicle's undercar- riage. Water entering the engine air intake or the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto electrical parts may damage your ve- hicle and may cause it to stall. Never at- tempt to drive through rushing water; re- gardless of its depth, it can wash away the ground from under your tires, resulting in possible loss of traction and even vehicle rollover. + Always check your brakes for effective- ness immediately after driving in sand, mud or water. Do this by driving slowly and stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat that process several times to dry out the brake discs and brake pads. + Do not drive or park over or near flam- mable materials such as dry grass or fall- en leaves, as they may burn easily. The exhaust system is very hot while the en- gine is running and right after the engine stops. This could create a fire hazard. + After driving through tall grass, mud, rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones, sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the underbody. Clear off any such matter from the underbody. If the vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody, a mechanical breakdown or fire could occur. + Secure all cargo carried inside the vehi- cle and make certain that it is not piled higher than the seatbacks. During sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo could be thrown around in the vehicle and cause in- jury. Do not pile heavy loads on the roof. Those loads raise the vehicle’s center of gravity and make it more prone to tip over. + If you must rock the vehicle to free it from sand or mud, depress the accelera- tor pedal slightly and move the selector le- ver back and forth between “D” and ‘R” re- peatedly. Do not race the engine. For the best possible traction, avoid spinning the wheels when trying to free the vehicle. When the road surface is extremely slip- pery, you can obtain better traction by starting the vehicle with the transmission in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT). + Never equip your vehicle with tires larg- er than those specified in this manual. + Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle un- der hard-driving conditions such as rough roads or off roads will necessitate more

Driving tips 8-7 frequent replacement of engine oil, brake fluid and transmission oil than that speci- fied in the maintenance schedule de- scribed in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Remember that damage done to your Subaru while operating it off-road and not using common sense precautions such as those listed above is not eligible for war- ranty coverage. + Wash the vehicle's underbody after off- road driving. Suspension components are particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they need to be washed thoroughly.

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page 8 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

8-8 Driving tips Winter driving # 800259 H Operation during cold weath-

Carry some emergency equipment, such as tire chains, a window scraper, a bag of sand, flares, a small shovel, and jumper cables. Check the battery and cables. Cold tem- peratures reduce battery capacity. The battery must be in good condition to pro- vide enough power for cold winter starts. Use an engine oil of proper grade and vis- cosity for cold weather. Heavy summer oil will cause harder starting. Keep the door locks from freezing by squirting them with deicer or glycerin. Forcing a frozen door open may damage or separate the rubber weather strips around the door. If the door is frozen, use hot water to melt the ice, and afterwards thoroughly wipe the water away. Use a windshield washer fluid that con- tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use engine antifreeze or other substitutes be- cause they may damage the paint of the vehicle. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con- tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5% surfactant, by volume. lts freezing temper- ature varies according to how much it is di- luted, as indicated in the following table. Washer Fluid Freezing Concentration Temperature 30% 10.4°F (12°C) 50% —4F (-20°C) 100% —49°F (-45°C) In order to prevent freezing of washer flu- id, check the freezing temperatures in the table above when adjusting the fluid con- centration to the outside temperature. If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with a different concentration from the one used previously, purge the old fluid from

the piping between the reservoir tank and washer nozzles by operating the washer for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if the concentration of the fluid remaining in the piping is too low for the outside tem- perature, it may freeze and block the noz- zles. ÂÀCAUTION Adjust the washer fluid concentra- tion appropriately for the outside temperature. If the concentration is inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid may freeze on the windshield and obstruct your view, and the fluid may freeze in the reservoir tank. Y Before driving your vehicle Before entering the vehicle, remove any snow or ice from your shoes because that could make the pedals slippery and dan- gerous. While warming up the vehicle before driv- ing, check that the accelerator pedal, brake pedal, and all other controls operate smoothly. Clear away ice and snow that has accu- mulated under the fenders to avoid mak- ing steering difficult. During severe winter driving, stop when and where it is safe to

d di|æ KŸ7 A1900BE-A.book Page 9 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM n 41

do so and check under the fenders period- ically. Y Parking in cold weather Do not use the parking brake when park- ing for long periods in cold weather since it could freeze in that position. Instead, ob- serve the following.

1. Place the shift lever in “1” or “R” for

manual transmission vehicles, and in “P” for automatic transmission vehicles.

2. Use tire stops under the tires to prevent

the vehicle from moving. When the vehicle is parked in snow or when it snows, raise the wiper blades off the glass to prevent damage to them. When the vehicle has been left parked af- ter use on roads heavily covered with snow, or has been left parked during a snowstorm, icing may develop on the brake system, which could cause poor braking action. Check for snow or ice buildup on the suspension, disc brakes and brake hoses underneath the vehicle. If there is caked snow or ice, remove it, being careful not to damage the disc brakes and brake hoses and ABS har- ness. À WARNING Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle if you park the vehicle in snow with the engine running. Y Refueling in cold weather To help prevent moisture from forming in the fuel system and the risk of its freezing, use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel tank is recommended during cold weath- er. Use only additives that are specifically de- signed for this purpose. When an anti- freeze additive is used, its effect lasts longer if the tank is refilled whenever the fuel level reaches half empty. If your SUBARU is not going to be used for an extended period, it is best to have the fuel tank filled to capacity. B Driving on snowy and icy roads To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high- speed driving, and sharp turning when driving on snowy or icy roads. Always maintain ample distance between

Driving tips 8-9 your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you to avoid the need for sudden braking. To supplement the foot brake, use the en- gine brake effectively to control the vehi- cle speed. (Shift into a lower gear when necessary.) Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such behav- ior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly leading to loss of vehicle control. An anti-lock brake system (ABS) enhanc- es your vehicle's braking performance on snowy and icy roads. Refer to the “ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)” section in chap- ter 7 for information on braking on slippery surfaces. NOTE The following tires are summer tires. Compared with winter and all-season tires, summer tires give significantly less grip on snowy and icy road surfac- es. Avoid driving on snowy and icy road surface with summer tires. + 225/45R17 tires for WRX-STI À WARNING Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads such as snowy or icy roads. This may cause loss of vehi- cle control. — CONTINUED —

KP AI9OOBE-A book Page 10 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 8-10 Driving tips [ À CAUTION Avoid prolonged continuous driving in snowstorms. Snow will enter the engine’s intake system and may hinder the air flow, which could re- sult in engine shutdown or even breakdown. Y Wiper operation when snowing Before driving in cold weather, make sure the wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield or rear window. If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield or rear window, use the defroster with the airflow control dial in the “ 47 ” position and the temperature control dial set for maximum warmth until the wiper blades are com- pletely thawed out. If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper deicer, it is helpful to thaw the windshield wiper blades. To thaw out the rear wiper blade, use the rear window defogger. When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts to stick on the surface of the wind- shield despite wiper operation, use the de- froster with the airflow control dial in “ 47 ” and the temperature control dial set for maximum warmth. After the wind- shield gets warmed enough to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away using the

windshield washer. Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the wiper from working effectively. If snow is stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to a safe place, then remove it. If you stop the vehicle at road side, use the hazard warning flasher to alert other drivers. We recommend use of non-freezing type wiper blades (winter blades) during the seasons you could have snow and sub- zero temperatures. Blades of this type give superior wiping performance in snowy conditions. Be sure to use blades that are suitable for your vehicle. ÂCAUTION During high-speed driving, non- freezing type wiper blades may not perform as well as standard wiper blades. If this happens, reduce the vehicle speed. NOTE When the season requiring non-freez- ing type wiper blades is over, replace them with standard wiper blades. EH Corrosion protection Refer to the “Corrosion protection” section (chapter 10).

HE Snovw tires Y All models except WRX-STI A WARNING + When replacing original tires with winter (snow) tires, make sure you use only the same size, construc- tion and load range as the original tires listed on the tire placard. Us- ing other sizes and construction may affect speedometer/odome- ter calibration and clearance be- tween the body and tires. It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control. You must install four winter tires that are of the same size, con- struction, brand, and load range. Mixing other sizes or construc- tions may result in severe me- chanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle and may affect ride, handling, braking and speed- ometer/odometer calibration. lt also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control.

KP AT90OBE-A book Page 11 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM + Do not use a combination of radi- al, belted bias or bias tires since it Y WRX-STI may cause dangerous handling [ A WARNING characteristics and lead to an ac- cident. Your vehicle is equipped with “all season tires” as original equipment, which are de- signed to provide an adequate measure of traction, handling and braking perfor- mance in year-round driving. In winter, it may be possible to enhance performance through use of tires designed specifically for winter driving conditions. When you choose to install winter tires on your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire size and type. You must install four winter tres that are of the same size, construc- tion, brand and load range and you should never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires since this may result in dangerous han- dling characteristics. When you choose a tire, make sure that there is enough clear- ance between the tire and vehicle body. Remember to drive with care at all times regardless of the type of tires on your ve- hicle. When replacing original tires with winter (snow) tires, make sure you use only the same size, construc- tion and load range as the original tires listed on the tire placard. Us- ing other sizes and construction may affect speedometer/odome- ter calibration and clearance be- tween the body and tires. It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control. You must install four winter tires that are of the same size, con- struction, brand, and load range. Mixing other sizes or construc- tions may result in severe me- chanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle and may affect ride, handling, braking and speed- ometer/odometer calibration. lt also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control. Do not use a combination of rat al, belted bias or bias tires sinc may cause dangerous handling characteristics and lead to an ac- cident.

Driving tips 8-11 Your vehicle is equipped with “summer tires” as original equipment, which are in- adequate for driving on slippery roads such as on snow-covered or icy roads. Compared with winter and all-season tires, summer tires give significantly less grip on snowy and icy road surfaces. Therefore, use of winter tires is strongly recommended when driving with such road conditions. When you choose to install winter tires on your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire size and type. You must install four winter tres that are of the same size, construc- tion, brand and load range and you should never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires since this may result in dangerous han- dling characteristics. When you choose a tire, make sure that there is enough clear- ance between the tire and vehicle body. Remember to drive with care at all times regardless of the type of tires on your ve- hicle. B Tire chains Driving on snowy grades or icy roads may require the use of tire chains, in which case put the chains on the front wheels only. Use only SAE class S type chains that are of the correct size for your tires so as not to damage the vehicle body or sus- — CONTINUED —

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 12 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 8-12 Driving tips pension. When driving with tire chains, drive at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h). When a temporary spare tire is on a front wheel, replace the temporary spare tire with the rear tire on the same side of the vehicle, and then fit chains on the front tires. Always use the utmost care when driving with tire chains — overconfidence be- cause you are driving with tire chains could easily lead to a serious accident. ÂÀCAUTION Tire chains cannot be used on tires listed in the following because of lack of clearance between the tires and vehicle body. + 225/45R17 tires for WRX-STI + 215/45R17 tires for WRX H Rocking the vehicle If you must rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand, or mud, depress the acceler- ator pedal slightly and move the selector lever back and forth between “D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the best possible traction, avoid spinning the wheels when trying to free the vehicle. ei+- When the road surface is extremely slip- pery, you can obtain better traction by starting the vehicle with the transmission in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT). Refer to the “Automatic transmission” sec- tion in chapter 7 for information on holding the transmission in 2nd position. Loading your vehicle À WARNING Never allow passengers to ride on a folded rear seatback, in the trunk or in the cargo area. Doing so may result in serious injury. Never stack luggage or other car- go higher than the top of the seat- back because it could tumble for- ward and injure passengers in the event of a sudden stop or acci- dent. Keep luggage or cargo low, as close to the floor as possible. GO.

KP AT9OOBE-A book Page 13 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM À WARNING + When you carry something inside the vehicle, secur: whenever you can to prevent it from being thrown around inside the vehicle during sudden stops, sharp turns or in an accident. Do not pile heavy loads on the roof. These loads raise the vehi- cle’s center of gravity and make it more prone to tip over. Secure lengthy items properly to prevent them from shooting for- ward and causing seriou: Jury during a sudden stop. Never exceed the maximum load limit. If you do, some parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle han- dles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle. + Do not place anything on the rear shelf behind the rear seatback (for sedan) or the extended luggage cover (for wagon). Such items could tumble forward in the event of a sudden stop or a coll This could cause serious il ÂACAUTION Do not carry spray cans, containers with flammable or corrosive liquids or any other dangerous items inside the vehicle.

Driving tips 8-13 Vehicle capacity weight

CU) LA ) The load capacity of your vehicle is deter- mined by weight, not by available cargo space. The maximum load you can carry in your vehicle is shown on the vehicle B00164 — CONTINUED —

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page 14 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

8-14 Driving tips placard attached to the driver's side door pillar. It includes the total weight of the driver and all passengers and their be- longings, any optional equipment such as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier, etc., and the tongue load of a trailer. HE GVWR and GAWR (Gross Ve- hicle Weight Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating)

The certification plate attached to the driv- er's side door jamb shows GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating). The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the combined total of weight of the vehicle, fu- el, driver, all passengers, luggage, any optional equipment and trailer tongue load. Therefore, the GVW changes de- pending on the situation. The GVWR equals Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle — including standard equipment, fluids, emergency tools and spare tire as- sembly) plus the vehicle capacity weight. In addition, the total weight applied to each axle (GAW) must never exceed the GAWR. The front and rear GAWS can be adjusted by relocating luggage inside the vehicle. Even if the total weight of your luggage is lower than the vehicle capacity weight, ei- ther front or rear GAW may exceed the GAWR, depending on the distribution of the luggage. When possible, the load should be evenly distributed throughout the vehicle. If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you should confirm that GVW and front and rear GAWSs are within the GVWR and GAWR by putting your vehicle on a vehi- cle scale, found at a commercial weighing station. Do not use replacement tires with a lower load range than the originals because they may lower the GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a high- er load range than the originals do not in- crease the GVWR and GAWR limitations.

H Roof rail and crossbar (if equipped)

The roof rail is not designed to carry cargo by itself. Cargo can be carried after secur- ing the roof crossbar kit to the roof rail and installing the appropriate carrying attach- ment. When installing the roof crossbar kit, follow the manufacturer’s instructions. When you carry cargo on the roof using the roof crossbar kit and a carrying attach- ment, never exceed the maximum load limit explained in the following. You should also be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). See the “Loading

e||4… KŸ7 AI900BE-A.book Page 15 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

your vehicle” section in this chapter for in- formation on loading cargo into or onto your vehicle. The maximum load limit of the cargo, crossbars and carrying attach- ment must not exceed 100 lbs (45 kg). Place the heaviest load at the bottom, nearest the roof, and evenly distribute the cargo. Always properly secure all cargo. ÂÀCAUTION < For cargo carrying purposes, the roof rail must be used together with a roof crossbar kit and the appropriate carrying attachment. The roof rail must never be used alone to carry cargo. Otherwise, damage to the roof or paint or a dangerous road hazard due to loss of cargo could result. When using the roof crossbar kit, make sure that the total weight of the crossbars, carrying attach- ment and cargo does not exceed the maximum load limit. Overload- ing may cause damage to the ve- hicle and create a safety hazard. Y Installing carrying attachments on the crossbars When installing any carrying attachment such as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak carrier, cargo basket, etc. on the cross- bars, follow the manufacturer's instruc- tions and make sure that the attachment is securely fixed to the crossbars. Use only attachments designed specifically for the crossbars. À set of the crossbars is de- signed to carry loads (cargo and attach- ment) of not more than 100 Ibs (45 kg). Before operating the vehicle, make sure that the cargo is properly secured on the attachment. NOTE Remember that the vehicle’s center of gravity is altered with the weight of the load on the roof, thus affecting the driving characteristi Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind effects will be increased. Y Removal and installation of the crossbars The crossbars can be removed when you do not use the roof to carry cargo. V To remove the crossbar

1. Loosen and remove the T-30 torx®

head screw from the top of each crossbar end support.

2. Rotate the lower clamp on the bottom

of each end support downward approxi- mately 90°.

3. Carefully raise the crossbar from roof

rails. V To install the crossbar Front crossbar: Front crossbar has 100 LBS. Load Label on left-hand side.

1 à KP AT90OBE-A book Page 16 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

8-16 Driving tips F: Front of vehicle

6) Roof rail end support

1. Before placing the crossbar on the roof

rails, make sure that the T-30 torx® head screw is removed from the top of each crossbar end support.

2. Rotate the lower clamp on the bottom

of each end support downward approxi- mately 90°.

3. With the front direction arrow label on

the top right side of the crossbar pointing toward the front of the vehicle, carefully place the crossbar across the top of the vehicle so that the crossbar end supports rest on the top of the roof rails approxi- mately 3 inches (76 mm) rearward from the seam (joint) between the front roof rail support and the roof rail.

4. Rotate (raise) the lower clamp up to the

bottom of the roof rail and loosely tighten the T-30 torx® head screw with the torx® wrench provided, through the top of the end support and into the threaded insert in the lower clamp on each end of the cross- bar. NOTE It may be necessary to squeeze the lower clamp and the end support to- gether to compress the pads and gain a better alignment of the pieces while trying to start the screw. Use care not to crossthread the screw in the insert.

5. Adjust the alignment of the crossbar on

the roof rails, and if available, use a T-30 torx® bit and torque wrench and tighten the T-30 torx® head screws to 30 to 35 Ibf-in (3.4 to 4.0 Nm, 0.35 to 0.41 kgf-m) of torque (or tighten securely with the torx® wrench provided). Rear crossbar:

4) Roof rail end support

KP AT90OBE-A book Page 17 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

6) Front arrow label

a: Oinch (0 mm) Install the rear crossbar in the same man- ner as the front crossbar. NOTE The rear crossbar should be posi- tioned just in front of the rear seam (joint) between the rear roof rail sup- port and the roof rail. Trailer hitch (if equipped) The trailer hitch is designed to tow a Class 1 rated load. À maximum of 2,000 Ibs (9206 kg) gross trailer weight and a maxi- mum of 200 Ibs (90 kg) gross tongue weight are permissible for the trailer hitch. When you tow a trailer, follow the instruc- tions in the section “Trailer towing” in this chapter. [ À CAUTION ] [ Â WARNING Do not carry cargo on the roof when the crossbars are removed. Lug- gage on the roof will be thrown for- ward or backward in sudden stops or rapid accelerations, resulting in a dangerous road hazard. NOTE Before each use of the roof crossbar, make sure the four T-30 crossbar clamp screws have been checked, and retightened if necessary to 35 Ibf-in (4.0 N-m, 0.41 kgf:m), as outlined in Step #5 above. + Never exceed the maximum weight specified for the trailer hitch. Exceeding the maximum weight could cause an accident resulting in serious personal inju- ries. Permissible trailer weight changes depending on the situa- tion. Refer to the section “Trailer towing” in this chapter for pos: ble recommendations and limita- tions. —+1® Driving tips 8-17 - Trailer brakes are required when the towing load exceeds 1,000 Ibs (453 kg). Be sure your trailer has safety chains and that each chain will hold the trailers maximum gross weight. Towing trailers without safety chains could create a traffic safety hazard if the trailer separates from the hitch due to coupling damage or hitch ball damage. Be sure to check the hitch pin and placement before to If the ball mount comes off the hitch receiver, the trailer could get loose and create a traffic safety hazard. Use only the ball mount supplied with this hitch. Use the hitch only as a weight carrying hitch. Do not any type of weight dis- tributing hitch. H Connecting a trailer

1. Remove the receiver cover from the

hitch receiver tube. Then insert the ball mount into the hitch receiver tube. — CONTINUED —

1 à KP AT9OOBE-A book Page 18 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole on the

hitch receiver tube so that the pin passes through the ball mount.

3. Insert the safety pin securely into the

4. Pull the ball mount to make sure it does

not come off the hitch receiver.

2) Hooks for safety chains

5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate

for the ball mount and your trailer. The hitch ball must be securely installed on the ball mount.

6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.

7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with

safety chains that will hold the trailers maximum gross weight. The chains should cross under the trailer tongue to prevent the tongue from dropping onto the ground in case it should disconnect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the chains taking tight-turn situations into ac- count; however, be careful not to let them drag on the ground.

À WARNING Do not connect safety chains to part of the vehicle other than the safety chain hooks.

1 à KP AT90OBE-A book Page 19 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

four-pin wire connector to the towing trail- er's wire harness

9. Confirm proper function of the hitch

Wire harness by individually activating the brake, right turn signal, left turn signal, stop, and parking lights on the trailer. NOTE Always disconnect the trailer har- ness before launching or retrieving a watercraft. E When you do not tow a trailer + Remove the ball mount from the hitch receiver tube and insert the receiver cover onto the hitch receiver tube. + Place the dust cap over the four-pin connector of the hitch wire harness to pro- tect against possible damage. + Occasionally lubricate terminals of the four-pin connector using terminal grease.

Driving tips 8-19 Trailer towing Your vehicle is designed and intended to be used primarily as a passenger-carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional loads on your vehicle's engine, drivetrain, brakes, tires and suspension and has an adverse effect on fuel economy. If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safe- ty and satisfaction depend upon proper use of correct equipment and cautious op- eration of your vehicle. Seek the advice of your SUBARU dealer to assist you in pur- chasing a hitch and other necessary tow- ing equipment appropriate for your vehi- cle. In addition, be sure to follow the in- structions on correct installation and use provided by the trailer and other towing equipment manufacturers. SUBARU assumes no responsibility for in- juries or vehicle damage that result from trailer towing equipment, or from any er- rors or omissions in the instructions ac- companying such equipment or for your failure to follow the proper instructions. E Warranties and maintenance SUBARU warranties do not apply to vehi- cle damage or malfunction caused by trail- er towing. If you use your vehicle to tow a trailer, more frequent maintenance will be — CONTINUED — nil

KP AT90OBE-A book Page 20 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 8-20 Driving tips required due to the additional load. (Refer to “Maintenance schedule under severe driving conditions” in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.) Under no circumstances should a trailer be towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle with any new powertrain component (en- gine, transmission, differential, wheel bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of driving. EH Maximum load limits + Before towing a trailer, check the trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs and tongue load. Make sure the load and its distribution in your vehicle and trailer are acceptable. Y Total trailer weight 0 © [ A WARNING Never exceed the maximum load limits explained in the following. Ex- ceeding the maximum load limits could cause personal injury and/or vehicle damage. À CAUTION | + Adequate size trailer brakes are required when the trailer and its cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg) total weight.

Total trailer weight The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo load) must never exceed the maximum weight shown in the following table. Model Conditions | Maximum total trailer weight MT models | When towing a | 1,000 lbs trailer without (453 kg) brakes. When towing a | 2,000 lbs trailer with (206 kg) brakes. AT models | When towing a | 1,000 lbs trailer without (453 kg) brakes. When towing a | 2,000 lbs trailer with (206 kg) brakes. When towing a | 1,000 lbs trailer on along | (453 kg) uphill grade con- tinuously for over 5 miles (8 km) with an out- side tempera- ture of 104°F (40°C) or above.

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page 21 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

Y Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

Gross Vehicle Weight The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the com- bined total of the weight of the vehicle, driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment installed on your vehicle. Therefore, the GVW changes depending on the situation. Determine the GVW each time before going on a trip by putting your vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale. Certification label GWWR is shown on the certification plate located on the driver's side door jamb of your vehicle.

Driving tips 8-21 Y Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

Gross Axle Weight The total weight applied to each axle (GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear GAWS can be adjusted by relocating passengers and luggage inside the vehi- cle. The front and rear GAWR are also shown on the certification plate. — CONTINUED — nil

1 à KP AT9OOBE-A book Page 22 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

Certification label To check both GVWR and GAWR and to confirm that the total weight and weight distribution are within safe driving limits, you should have your vehicle and trailer weighed at a commercial weighing sta- tion. Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to prevent a change in weight distribution while driving. Y Tongue load

Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from 8 to 11 percent of the total trailer weight and does not exceed the maximum value of 200 lbs (90 kg).

The tongue load can be weighed with a bathroom scale as shown in the following illustration. When weighing the tongue load, be sure to position the towing cou- pler at the height at which it would be dur- ing actual towing, using a jack as shown.

F: Front of vehicle The tongue load can be adjusted by prop- er distribution of the load in the trailer. Never load the trailer with more weight in the back than in the front; approximately 60 percent of the trailer load should be in the front and approximately 40 percent in the rear. Also, distribute the load as even- ly as possible on both the left and right sides. Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to prevent a change in weight distribution while driving. À WARNING [ A WARNING | If the trailer is loaded with more weight in the back of trailer’s axle than in the front, the load is taken off the rear axle of the towing vehicle. This may cause the rear wheels to skid, especially during braking or when vehicle speed is reduced dur- ing cornering, resulting in over- steer, spin out and/or jackknifing. B Trailer hitches Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer. Never drill the frame or under-body of your vehicle to install a commer- cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger- ous exhaust gas, water or mud may enter the passenger compartment through the drilled hole. Exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled. Also, drilling the frame or under- body of your vehicle could cause deterioration of strength of your ve- hicle and cause corrosion around the drilled hole. ÂÀCAUTION + Do not modify the vehicle exhaust System, brake system, or other Systems when installing a hitch or other trailer towing equipment. Do not use axle-mounted hitches as they can cause damage to the axle housing, wheel bearings, wheels or tires. Y WAGON including OUTBACK SPORT The use of a genuine SUBARU trailer hitch is recommended. A genuine — CONTINUED —

KP AT90OBE-A book Page 24 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 8-24 Driving tips SUBARU hitch is available from your SUBARU dealer. If use of a non-genuine hitch is unavoid- able, be sure the hitch is suited to your ve- hicle and trailer. Consult with a profes- sional hitch supplier to assist you in choosing an appropriate hitch for your ve- hicle. Be sure to follow all of the hitch man- ufacturer’s instructions for installation and use. Never use a hitch that mounts only to the rear bumper. The bumper is not designed to handle that type of load. For all types of hitches, regularly check that the hitch mounting bolts and nuts are tight. Y SEDAN SUBARU does not offer accessory trailer hitches. Consult with a professional hitch supplier to assist you in choosing an ap- propriate hitch for your vehicle. Be sure to follow all of the hitch manufacturers in- structions for installation and use. Never use a hitch that mounts only to the rear bumper. The bumper is not designed to handle that type of load. Regularly check that the hitch mounting bolts and nuts are tight.

H Connecting a trailer Y Trailer brakes If your trailer's total weight (trailer weight plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 Ibs (453 kg), the trailer is required to be equipped with its own brake system. Elec- tric brakes or surge brakes are recom- mended, and must be installed properly. Check that your trailer's brakes conform with Federal, state/province and/or other applicable regulations. Your SUBARU's brake system is not designed to be tapped into the trailer's hydraulic brake system. Please ask your SUBARU dealer and pro- fessional trailer supplier for more informa- tion about the trailer's brake system. A WARNING | + Adequate size trailer brakes are required when the trailer and its cargo exceed 1,000 Ibs (453 kg) total weight. Do not directly connect your trail- er’s hydraulic brake system to the hydraulic brake system in your vehicle. Direct connection would cause the vehicle’s brake perfor- mance to deteriorate and could lead to an accident.

Y Trailer safety chains In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch ball should break or become disconnect- ed, the trailer could get loose and create a traffic safety hazard. For safety, always connect the towing ve- hicle and trailer with trailer safety chains. Pass the chains crossing each other un- der the trailer tongue to prevent the trailer from dropping onto the ground in case the trailer tongue should disconnect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the chains taking tight-turn situations into ac- count; however, be careful not to let them drag on the ground. For more information about the safety chain connection, refer to the instructions for your hitch and trailer. [ A WARNING Always use safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer. Towing a trailer without safety chains could create a traffic safety hazard if the trailer separates from the hitch due to coupling damage or hitch ball damage.

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 25 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM Y Side mirrors

After hitching a trailer to your vehicle, check that the standard side mirrors pro- vide a good rearward field of view without significant blind spots. lf significant blind spots occur with the vehicle's standard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that con- form with Federal, state/province and/or other applicable regulations. Y Trailer lights Connection of trailer lights to your vehi- cle's electrical system requires modifica- tions to the vehicle's lighting circuit to in- crease its capacity and accommodate wir- ing changes. To ensure the trailer lights are connected properly, please consult your SUBARU dealer. Check for proper operation of the turn signals, the brake lights and parking lights each time you hitch up. À CAUTION ] Direct splicing or other improper connection of trailer lights may damage your vehicle’s electrical system and cause a malfunction of your vehicle’s lighting system. Y Tires Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle are properly inflated to the pressure spec- ified on the tire placard located on the left center pillar of your vehicle. Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in ac- cordance with the trailer manufacturers specifications. In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire when towing a trailer, ask a commercial road service to repair the flat tire. If you carry a regular size spare tire in your vehicle or trailer as a precaution against getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare tire is firmly secured.

Driving tips 8-25 [ A WARNING | Never tow a trailer when the tempo- rary spare tire is used. The tempo- rary spare tire is not designed to sustain the towing load. Use of the temporary spare tire when towing can result in failure of the spare tire and/or less stability of the vehicle. B Trailer towing tips ÂÀCAUTION + Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) when towing a trailer in hilly coun- try on hot days. When towing a trailer, steering, stability, stopping distance and braking performance will be dif- ferent from normal operation. For safety’s sake, you should employ extra caution when towing a trail- er and you should never speed. You should also keep the follow- ing tips in mind: Y Before starting out on a trip + Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to- hitch mounting are in good condition. If any problems are apparent, do not tow the — CONTINUED —

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page 26 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

8-26 Driving tips trailer. + Check that the vehicle sits horizontally with the trailer attached. If the vehicle is tipped sharply up at the front and down at the rear, check the total trailer weight, GVW, GAWSs and tongue load again, then confirm that the load and its distribution are acceptable. + Check that the tire pressures are cor- rect. + Check that the vehicle and trailer are connected properly. Confirm that — the trailer tongue is connected prop- erly to the hitch ball. — the trailer lights connector is connect- ed properly and trailer's brake lights illu- minate when the vehicle's brake pedal is pressed, and that the trailer's turn sig- nal lights flash when the vehicle's turn signal lever is operated. — the safety chains are connected prop- erly. — all cargo in the trailer is secured safe- ty in position. — the side mirrors provide a good rear- ward field of view without a significant blind spot. + Sufficient time should be taken to learn the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combination before starting out on a trip. In an area free of traffic, practice turning, stopping and backing up. Y Driving with a trailer + You should allow for considerably more stopping distance when towing a trailer. Avoid sudden braking because it may re- sult in skidding or jackknifing and loss of control. + Avoid abrupt starts and sudden acceler- ations. If your vehicle has a manual trans- mission, always start out in first gear and release the clutch at moderate engine rev- olution. + Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and rapid lane changes. + Slow down before turning. Make a long- er than normal turning radius because the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehi- cle wheels to the inside of the turn. In a tight turn, the trailer could hit your vehicle. + Crosswinds will adversely affect the handling of your vehicle and trailer, caus- ing sway. Crosswinds can be due to weather conditions or the passing of large tracks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly grip the steering wheel and slow down im- mediately but gradually. + When passing other vehicles, consider- able distance is required because of the added weight and length caused by at- taching the trailer to your vehicle.

+ Backing up with a trailer is difficult and takes practice. When backing up with a trailer, never accelerate or steer rapidly. When turning back, grip the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand and turn it to the left for a left turn, and turn it to the right for a right turn. + lf the ABS warning light illuminates while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing the trailer and have repairs performed im- mediately by the nearest SUBARU dealer. Y Driving on grades + Before going down a steep hill, slow down and shift into lower gear (if neces- sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the engine braking effect and prevent over-

1 à KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 27 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

heating of your vehicle's brakes. Do not make sudden downshifts. + When driving uphill in hot weather, the air conditioner may turn off automatically to protect the engine from overheating. + When driving uphill in hot weather, pay attention to the water temperature gauge pointer (for all vehicles) and AT OIL TEMP warning light (for AT vehicles) since the engine and transmission are relatively prone to overheating under these condi- tions. If the water temperature gauge pointer approaches the OVERHEAT zone or the AT OIL TEMP warning light illumi- nates, immediately switch off the air con- ditioner and stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place. Refer to the “Engine overheat- ing” section in chapter 9, and “Warning and indicator lights” section in chapter 3. + If your vehicle has an automatic trans- mission, avoid using the accelerator pedal to stay stationary on an uphill slope in- stead of using the parking brake or foot brake. That may cause the transmission fluid to overheat. + If your vehicle has an automatic trans- mission, place the selector lever as fol- lows: Uphill slopes: “D” position Downhill slopes: A low-speed gear posi- tion to use engine braking Y Parking on a grade Always block the wheels under both vehi- cle and trailer when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly. You should not park on a hill or slope. But if parking on a hill or slope cannot be avoided, you should take the following steps:

1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal

2. Have someone place wheel blocks un-

der both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel blocks are in place, re-

lease the regular brakes slowly until the blocks absorb the load.

4. Apply the regular brakes and then ap-

ply the parking brake; slowly release the regular brakes.

5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (manual

transmission) or “P" (automatic transmis- sion) and shut off the engine. —+1® Driving tips 8-27

KP AT90OBE-A book Page 1 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM —+1® In case ofemergency | If you park your vehicle in case of an emergency … 9-2 Temporary spare tire 9-2 Flat tires 9-4 Changing a flat tire 9-4 Jump starting …… 9-9 How to jump start 9-9 Engine overheating …. 9-11 If steam is coming from the engine compartment . 9-11 If no steam is coming from the en compartment . Towing … Towing and tie-down hooks Using a flat-bed truck … Towing with all wheels on the ground Rear gate -— if the rear gate cannot be unlocked Moonroof - if the moonroof cannot be closed . me 9-15 Maintenance tools 9-16 Jack and jack handle 9-16

1 à KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 2 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

9-2 In case of emergency If you park your vehicle in case of an emergency

The hazard warning flasher should be used in day or night to warn other drivers when you have to park your vehicle under emergency conditions. Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to safely pull off the road if a problem occurs. The hazard warning flasher can be acti- vated regardiess of the ignition switch po- sition. Turn on the hazard warning by pushing the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it off by pushing the switch again. NOTE When the hazard warning flasher is on, the turn signals do not work. Temporary spare tire The temporary spare tire is smaller and lighter than a conventional tire and is de- signed for emergency use only. Remove the temporary spare tire and re-install the conventional tire as soon as possible be- cause the spare tire is designed only for temporary use. Check the inflation pressure of the tempo- rary spare tire periodically to keep the tire ready for use. The correct pressure is 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kg/cm?). When using the temporary spare tire, note the following. + Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). + Do not put a tire chain on the temporary spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size, a tire chain will not fit properly. + Do not use two or more temporary spare tires at the same time. + Do not drive over obstacles. This tire has a smaller diameter, so road clearance is reduced.

d di|æ KŸ7 A1900BE-A.book Page 3 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM n 41 In case of emergency 9-3 [ A WARNING | Never tow a trailer when the tempo- used. The tempo- 2 rary spare tire is not designed to sustain the towing load. Use of the temporary spare tire when towing can result in failure of the spare and/or less stability of the vehicle and may lead to an accident. 800281 [ À CAUTION

1) Tread wear indicator bar 1) Spare fuse Never use any temporary spare tire

EN 2) Indicator location mark 2) FWD connector other than the original. Using other NS 22 sizes may result in severe mechani-

• When the wear indicator appears on the NOTE cal damage to the drive train of your tread, replace the tire. {If your vehicle is AWD with automatic vehicle. + The temporary spare tire must be used | transmission, except Turbo models) only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire | Before driving your vehicle with the gets punctured, replace the wheel with a temporary spare tire, put a spare fuse rear wheel and install the temporary spare | inside the FWD connector in the main tire in place of the removed rear wheel. fuse box located in the engine com- partment and confirm that the Front- wheel drive warning light “AWD” in the combination meter comes on. The All- Wheel Drive capability of the vehicle has now deactivated. After re-installing the conventional tire, remove the spare fuse from the FWD connector in order to reactivate AII-Wheel Drive. > PS SA SA et. + “til

e||4… _4lle (#7 A1900BE-A.book Page 4 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM n Ï £ EN Lù ù 9-4 In case of emergency Flat tires + Always turn off the engine before raising the flat tire off the ground If you have a flat tire while driving, never using the jack. Never swing or brake suddenly; keep driving straight push the vehicle supported with ahead while gradually reducing speed. the jack. The jack can come out of Then slowly pull off the road to a safe the jacking point due to a jolt and place. this can result in a severe acci- dent. M Changing a flat tire 1. Park on a hard, level surface, whenev- er possible, then stop the engine. A WARNING 2. Set the parking brake securely and ñ E shift a manual transmission vehicle in re-

• Do not jack up the vehicle on an verse or an automatic transmission vehi- Sed. incline or a loose road surface. cle in the “P” (Park) position edan En The jack can come out of the jack- p ir 1) Jack 7 Le) IT part j 3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher and 2) Jack handle < ing point or sink into the ground have everyone get out of the vehicle. 3) Spare tire and this can result in a severe ac- cident. Use only the jack provided with your vehicle. The jack supplied With the vehicle is designed only for changing a tire. Never get un- der the vehicle while supporting the vehicle with this jack. D 200000

4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear

of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire. N $

1 à 77 AIS00BE-A book Page 5 Friday, June 17, 2008 5:40 PM —+1® In case of emergency 9-5

5. Take out the spare tire, jack, and wheel

nut wrench. The spare tire is stored under the floor of the trunk or cargo area. To remove the spare tire, proceed as fol- lows: Sedan: Remove the floor cover from the trunk. Remove the storage compartment (if so equipped).Turn the attaching bolt counterclockwise, then take the spare tire out.

Wagon: Open the lid. Remove the storage compartment (if so equipped). Turn the attaching boit coun- terclockwise, then take spare tire out. Ifthe spare tire provided in your vehicle is a temporary spare tire, carefully read the — CONTINUED — nil

| à & WP AID0OBE-A.book Page 6 Friday, June 17, 200$ 5:40 PM 9-6 In case of emergency section “Temporary spare tire” in this chapter and strictly follow the instructions. counterclockwise to loosen it, then re- move the jack.

The jack is stored on the left side of the trunk or cargo area. To take out the jack: Remove the cover, turn the jackscrew

If the jackscrew is too tight to be loosened by hand, loosen it using a screwdriver or the jack handle.

The jack handle is stored under the spare tire cover. NOTE Make sure the jack is well lubricated before using it.

Jack-up points (Vehicle with side sill skirt)

1 à KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 7 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

In case of emergency 9-7

Jack-up points (Others)

7. Place the jack under the side sill at the

front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat tire. Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack head engages firmly into the jack-up point.

8. Insert the jack handle into the jack-

screw, and turn the handle until the tire clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle higher than necessary.

9. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat

10.Before putting the spare tire on, clean the mounting surface of the wheel and hub with a cloth. 11.Put on the spare tire. Replace the wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand. À WARNING Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts when the spare tire is installed. This could cause the nuts to become loose and lead to an accident. 12.Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the vehicle. — CONTINUED — nil

KT AT90OBE-A book Page 8 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 9-8 In case of emergency

13.Use the wheel nut wrench to securely tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque, following the tightening order in the illustration. The torque for tightening the nuts is 58 to 72 lbf:ft (80 to 100 N-m, 8 to 10 kgf-m). This torque is equivalent to applying ap- proximately 88 to 110 lbs (40 to 50 kg) at the top of the wheel nut wrench. Never use your foot on the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension on the wrench because you may exceed the specified torque. Have the wheel nut torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility.

14.Store the flat tire in the spare tire com- partment. Put the spacer and tighten the attaching boit firmly. Also store the jack and wheel nut wrench in their storage locations.

After placing the jack in its storage loca- tion, turn the jackscrew clockwise by hand until it becomes too hard to turn. Then, tighten it by an additional 1/4 — 1/3 of a turn using a screwdriver or the jack han- die. Unless the jack is properly secured, it may rattle while the vehicle is moving. [ A WARNING Never place a tire or tire changing tools in the passenger compartment after changing wheels. In a sudden stop or collisions, loose equipment could strike occupants and cause injury. Store the tire and all tools in the proper place.

KP AT9OOBE-A book Page 9 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM Jump starting [ A WARNING

• Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID. Do not let it come in contact with the hooks, skin, clothing or the vehicle. If battery fluid gets on you, thor- oughly flush the exposed area with water immediately. Get medi- cal help if the fluid has entered your hooks. If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, immediately drink a large amount of milk or water, and obtain immediate medical help. Keep everyone including children away from the battery. The gas generated by a battery ex- plodes if a flame or spark is brought near it. Do not smoke or light a match while jump starting. Never attempt jump starting if the discharged battery is frozen. It could cause the battery to burst or explode. + Whenever working on or around a battery, always wear suitable- hookprotectors, and remove met- al objects such as rings, bands or other metal jewelry. Be sure the jumper cables and clamps on them do not have loose or missing insulation. Do not jump start unless cables in suitable condition are available. À running engine can be danger- ous. Keep your fingers, hands, clothing, hair and tools away from the cooling fan, belts and any oth- er moving engine parts. Remov- ing rings, watches and ties is ad- visable. Jump starting is dangerous if it done incorrectly. If you are unsure about the proper procedure for jump starting, consult a compe- tent mechanic. When your vehicle does not start due to a run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle may be jump started by connecting your battery to another battery (called the booster battery) with jumper cables. Æ How to jump start

1. Make sure the booster battery is 12

—+1® In case of emergency 9-9 volts and the negative terminal is ground- ed.

2. fthe booster battery is in another vehi-

cle, do not let the two vehicles touch.

3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and ac-

4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in

the sequence illustrated. — CONTINUED —

1 à KP AI9OOBE-A book Page 10 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

9-10 /n case of emergency

1) Connect one jumper cable to the pos-

itive (+) terminal on the discharged bat- tery. 2)Connect the other end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery.

3) Connect one end of the other cable to

the negative (-) terminal of the booster battery. 4)Connect the other end of the cable to the engine lifting bracket. Make sure that the cables are not near any moving parts and that the cable clamps are not in contact with any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the

booster battery and run it at moderate speed. Then start the engine of the vehi- cle that has the discharged battery.

6. When finished, carefully disconnect

the cables in exactly the reverse order.

KP AT90OBE-A book Page 11 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM Engine overheating [ A WARNING Never attempt to remove the radia- tor cap until the engine has been shut off and has fully cooled down. When the engine is hot, the coolant is under pressure. Removing the cap while the engine is still hot could release a spray of boiling hot coolant, which could burn you very seriously. If the engine overheats, safely pull off the road and stop the vehicle in a safe place. Hif steam is coming from the engine compartment Turn off the engine and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down. M if no steam is coming from the engine compartment

1. Keep the engine running at idling

2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine

compartment. Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If the fan is not turning, immediately turn off the engine and contact your authorized dealer for repair.

3. After the engine coolant temperature

has dropped, turn off the engine. If the temperature gauge stays at the overheated zone, turn off the engine.

4. After the engine has fully cooled down,

check the coolant level in the reserve tank. If the coolant level is below the “LOW” mark, add coolant up to the “FULL” mark.

5. lf there is no coolant in the reserve

tank, add coolant to the reserve tank. Then remove the radiator cap and fill the radiator with coolant. If you remove the radiator cap from a hot radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the radiator cap, then turn the cap counter- clockwise slowly without pressing down until it stops. Release the pressure from the radiator. After the pressure has been fully released, remove the cap by pressing down and turning it.

In case of emergency 9-11 Towing If towing is necessary, it is best done by your SUBARU dealer or a commercial towing service. Observe the following pro- cedures for safety.

[ A WARNING | Never tow AWD vehicles (both AT and MT) with the front wheels raised off the ground while the rear wheels are on the ground, or with the rear wheels raised off the ground while the front wheels are on the ground. This will cause the vehicle to spin away due to the operation or deteri- oration of the center differential. — CONTINUED —

1 à KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 12 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

9-12 1n case of emergency HE Towing and tie-down hooks The towing hooks should be used only in an emergency (e.g., to free a stuck vehicle from mud, sand or snow). Front towing hook:

1. Take the towing hook and screwdriver

out of the tool bag. Take the jack handle out of the trunk (Sedan) or cargo area (Wagon).

2. Pry off the cover on the front bumper

using a screwdriver, and you will find a threaded hole for attaching the towing hook.

3. Screw the towing hook into the thread

hole until its thread can no longer be seen.

4. Tighten the towing hook securely using

the jack handle. After towing, remove the towing hook from

the vehicle and stow it in the tool bag. Fit the fog light cover on the bumper. —+1® [ A WARNING ° Do not use the towing hook ex- cept when towing your vehicle.

• Be sure to remove the towing hook after towing. Leaving the towing hook mounted on the vehi- cle could interfere with proper op- eration of the SRS airbag system in a frontal collision. Rear towing hook:

e||4… KŸ7 AI900BE-A.book Page 13 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

ÂCAUTION To prevent deformation to the front bumper and the towing hook, do not apply excessive lateral load to the towing hook. Tie-down hooks:

—+1® In case of emergency 9-13 [ À CAUTION | + Use only the specified towing hook and tie-down hook. Never use suspension parts or other parts of the body for towing or tie- down purposes. + Never use the tie-down hook on the underside of the vehicle clos- est to the muffler for towing pur- poses. H Using a flat-bed truck

This is the best way to transport your vehi- cle. Use the following procedures to en- sure safe transportation.

1. Shift the selector lever into the “P” po-

sition for automatic transmission vehicles — CONTINUED — nil

d di|æ KŸ7 A1900BE-A.book Page 14 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM n 41 9-14 in case of emergency or “st” for manual transmission vehicles. 1. Check the transmission and differential + Do not run the engine while being 2. Pull up the parking brake lever firmly. oil levels and add oil to bring it to the upper towed using this method. Trans-

3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier | level if necessary. mission damage could result if

properly with safety chains. Each safety | 2. Release the parking brake and put the the vehicle is towed with the en- chain should be equally tightened and transmission in neutral. gine running. care must be taken not to pull the chains 3. The ignition switch should be in the so tightly that the suspension bottoms out. | “ACC” position while the vehicle is being towed. ACAUTION | 4. Take up slack in the towline slowly to prevent damage to the vehicle. For vehicles with automatic trans- mission, the traveling speed must be limited to less than 20 mph (30 km/h) and the traveling distance If your vehicle has a front under- to ls than a miss (50 km For spoiler and rear underspoiler (both greater speeds an istances, optional), be careful not to scrape | AWARNING transport your vehicle on a flat- them when placing the vehicle on + Never turn the ignition switch to bed truck. the carrier and when removing the the “LOCK” position while the ve- e > vehicle from the carrier. hicle is being towed because the Î steering wheel and the direction B Towing with all wheels on the of the wheels will be locked. ground + Remember that the brake booster and power steering do not func- tion when the engine is not run- ning. Because the engine is turned off, it will take greater ef- fort to operate the brake pedal and steering wheel. ÂÀCAUTION + If transmission failure occurs, transport your vehicle on a flat- bed truck. > PS LA SA et. + “til

e||4… KŸ7 AI900BE-A.book Page 15 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

Rear gate -— if the rear gate cannot be unlocked In the event that you cannot unlock the rear gate by operating the power door locking switches or the remote keyless en- try system, you can unlock it from inside the cargo area.

1. Remove the access cover at the bot-

tom-center of the rear gate trim.

2. Locate the rear gate lock release lever

behind the rear gate trim panel. —+1® In case of emergency 9-15 Moonroof - if the moonroof cannot be closed If the moonroof cannot be closed with the moonroof switch, you can close the moon- roof manually.

1. Take out the hex-headed wrench from

the glove compartment and screwdriver

3. Unlock the rear gate by pressing the le-

ver inside the trim to the left.

4. Open the rear gate from outside by

raising the rear gate handle. from the tool bag. QUES

2. Remove the map light lens by prying

the edge of the lens using a flat-head screwdriver.

3. Remove the two screws that retain the

1 à KP AT90OBE-A book Page 16 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

9-16 /n case of emergency

4. Insert the wrench in the end of the mo-

tor shaft. To lower the moonroof, turn the wrench clockwise. To close the moonroof, turn the wrench counterclockwise. Have your vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized SUBARU dealer. Maintenance tools

Your vehicle is equipped with the following maintenance tools: Screwdriver Towing hook (eye bolt) Wheel nut wrench Hex-headed wrench (vehicles with moonroof) H Jack and jack handle

The jack is stored on the left side of the trunk (Sedan) or cargo area (Wagon). To take out the jack, turn the jackscrew counterclockwise to loosen it, then re-

1 à KP AT90OBE-A book Page 17 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

The jack handle is stored under the spare tire cover. For how to use the jack, refer to “Flat tires” section in this chapter.

In case of emergency 9-17

d di|æ KŸ7 A1900BE-A.book Page 1 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM n 41 Appearance care | Exterior care 10-2 Washing . 10-2 Waxing and polishing 10-3 Cleaning aluminum wheels 10-3 Corrosion protection 10-4 Most common causes of corrosion 10-4 To help prevent corrosion … 10-4 Cleaning the interior 10-5 Seat fabric … 10-5 Leather seat materials . 10-5 Synthetic leather upholstery 10-5 Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument A panel, console panel, and switches …. 10-6

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 2 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 10-2 Appearance care Exterior care EH Washing [ ÂCAUTION + When washing the vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a result, the brake stopping distance will be longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes. Do not wash the engine compart- ment and area adjacent to it. If wa- ter enters the engine air intake, electrical parts or the power steer- ing fluid reservoir, it will cause en- gine trouble or faulty power steer- ing respectively. + Since your vehicle is equipped with a rear wiper, automatic car- wash brushes could become tan- gled around it, damaging the wip- er arm and other components. Ask the automatic car-wash oper- ator not to let the brushes touch the wiper arm or to fix the wiper arm on the rear window glass with adhesive tape before operating the machine (Wagon models only).

[ À CAUTION (WRX-STI) Do not hold the roof vane such as when washing the vehicle roof or trying to move the vehicle. Doing so could break the roof vane. NOTE When having your vehicle washed in an automatic car wash, make sure be- forehand that the car wash is of suit- able type. The best way to preserve your vehicle's beauty is frequent washing. Wash the ve- hicle at least once a month to avoid con- tamination by road grime. Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash the vehicle with hot water and in direct sunlight. Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree sap, and bird droppings should be washed off by using a light detergent, as required. If you use a light detergent, make certain that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use strong soap or chemical detergents. All cleaning agents should be promptly flushed from the surface and not allowed to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page 3 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the remaining water off with a chamois or soft cloth. Y Washing the underbody Chemicals, salts and gravel used for deic- ing road surfaces are extremely corrosive, accelerating the corrosion of underbody components, such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders, and suspension. Thoroughly flush the underbody and in- side of the fenders with lukewarm or cold water at frequent intervals to reduce the harmiul effects of such agents. Mud and sand adhering to the underbody components may accelerate their corro- sion. After driving off-road or on muddy or sandy roads, wash the mud and sand off the underbody. Carefully flush the sus- pension and axle parts, as they are partic- ularly prone to mud and sand buildup. Do not use a sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud. NOTE Be careful not to damage brake hoses, sensor harnesses, and other parts when washing suspension compo- nents. Y Using a warm water washer + Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm) or more between the washer nozzle and the vehicle. + Do not wash the same area continuous- ly. + If a stain will not come out easily, wash by hand. Some warm water washers are of the high temperature, high pressure type, and they can damage or deform the resin parts such as mouldings, or cause water to leak into the vehicle. E Waxing and polishing Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing and polishing. Use a good quality polish and wax and ap- ply them according to the manufacturers instructions. Wax or polish when the paint- ed surface is cool. Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim, as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of Wax on a painted surface leads to loss of the original luster and also quickens the deterioration of the surface. It is recom- mended that a coat of wax be applied at least once a month, or whenever the sur- face no longer repels water. If the appearance of the paint has dimin- ished to the point where the luster or tone

Appearance care 10-3 cannot be restored, lightly polish the sur- face with a fine-grained compound. Never polish just the affected area, but include the surrounding area as well. Always pol- ish in only one direction. A No. 2000 grain compound is recommended. Never use a coarse-grained compound. Coarser grained compounds have a smaller grain- size number and could damage the paint. After polishing with a compound, coat with wax to restore the original luster. Frequent polishing with a compound or an incorrect polishing technique will result in removing the paint layer and exposing the under- coat. When in doubt, it is always best to contact your SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specialist. NOTE Be careful not to block the windshield washer nozzles with wax when waxing the vehicle. E Cleaning aluminum wheels ° Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels clean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt is left on too long, it may be difficult to clean off. + Do not use soap containing grit to clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral clean- ing agent, and later rinse thoroughly with water. Do not clean the wheels with a stiff — CONTINUED — nil

| à & 97 AID0OBE-A.book Page 4 Friday, June 17, 200$ 5:40 PM 10-4 Appearance care brush or expose them to a high-speed washing device. + Clean the vehicle (including the alumi- num wheels) with water as soon as possi- ble when it has been splashed with sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or driven on roads treated with salt or other agents. Corrosion protection Your SUBARU has been designed and built to resist corrosion. Special materials and protective finishes have been used on most parts of the vehicle to help maintain fine appearance, strength, and reliable operation. HE Most common causes of cor- rosion The most common causes of corrosion are:

1. The accumulation of moisture retaining

dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas.

2. Damage to paint and other protective

coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor accidents. Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle when:

1. Itis exposed to road salt or dust control

chemicals, or used in coastal areas where there is more salt in the air, or in areas where there is considerable industrial pol- lution.

2. Itis driven in areas of high humidity, es-

pecially when temperatures range just above freezing.

3. Dampness in certain parts of the vehi-

cle remains for a long time, even though

other parts of the vehicle may be dry.

4. High temperatures will cause corrosion

to parts of the vehicle which cannot dry quickly due to lack of proper ventilation. A To help prevent corrosion Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent cor- rosion of the body and suspension com- ponents. Also, wash the vehicle promptly after driving on any of the following surfac- es: + roads that have been salted to prevent them from freezing in winter + mud, sand, or gravel + coastal roads After the winter has ended, it is recom- mended that the underbody be given a very thorough washing. Before the beginning of winter, check the condition of underbody components, such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, suspension, steering system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of them are found to be rusted, they should be given an appropriate rust prevention treatment or should be replaced. Contact your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind of maintenance and treatment if you need assistance. Repair chips and scratches in the paint as

| à & 97 AID0OBE-A.book Page 5 Friday, June 17, 200$ 5:40 PM

a P7 soon as you find them. Check the interior of the vehicle for water and dirt accumulation under the floor mats because that could cause corrosion. Oc- casionally check under the mats to make sure the area is dry. Keep your garage dry. Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated ga- rage. In such a garage, corrosion can be caused by dampness. If you wash the ve- hicle in the garage or put the vehicle into the garage when wet or covered with snow, that can cause dampness. If your vehicle is operated in cold weather and/or in areas where road salts and other corrosive materials are used, the door hinges and locks, trunk lid lock, and hood latch should be inspected and lubricated periodically. Cleaning the interior Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate control panel, audio equipment, instru- ment panel, center console, combination meter panel, and switches. (Do not use or- ganic solvents.) Seat fabric Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a vacuum cleaner. lf the dirt is caked on the fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum cleaner, use a soft blush then vacuum it. Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric thor- oughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe using a solution of mild soap and lukewarm wa- ter then dry thoroughly. If the stain does not come out, try a com- mercially-available fabric cleaner. Use the cleaner on a hidden place and make sure it does not affect the fabric adversely. Use the cleaner according to its instructions. NOTE When cleaning the seat, do not use benzine, paint thinner, or any similar materials. B Leather seat materials The leather used by SUBARU is a high

Appearance care 10-5 quality natural product which will retain its distinctive appearance and feel for many years with proper care. Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the surface can cause the material to become brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber cloth should be performed monthly, taking care not to soak the leather or allow water to penetrate the stitched seams. A mild detergent suitable for cleaning woolen fabrics may be used to remove dif- ficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If your SUBARU is to be parked for a long time in bright sunlight, it is recommended that the seats and headrests be covered, or the windows shaded, to prevent fading or shrinkage. Minor surface blemishes or bald patches may be treated with a commercial leather spray lacquer. You will discover that each leather seat section will develop soft folds or wrinkles, which is characteristic of gen- uine leather. EH Synthetic leather upholstery The synthetic leather material used on the SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap or detergent and water, after first vacuum- ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe — CONTINUED — nil

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 6 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 10-6 Appearance care

off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic leather materials may be used when nec- essary. NOTE Strong cleaning agents such as sol- vents, paint thinners, window cleaner or gasoline must never be used on leather or synthetic interior materials. H Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument panel, con- sole panel, and switches Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate control panel, audio equipment, instru- ment panel, center console, combination meter panel, and switches. NOTE Do not use organic solvents such as paint thinners or gasoline, or strong cleaning agents that contain those sol- vents.

KP AT90OBE-A book Page 1 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM Maintenance schedule 11-33 Maintenance precautions . 11-33 Before checking or servicing in the engine compartment … . 114 When you do checking or servicing in the engine compartment while the engine is running ….…… 11-4 Engine hood 11-4 Engine compartment overview . 11-6 Non-turbo models . 11-6 Turbo models 1-7 Engine oil .… 11-8 Checking the 11-8 FF SS Changing the oil and oi 11-8 bé Recommended grade and viscosity 11-10 Recommended grade and viscosity under severe driving conditions 11-11 Synthetic oi 11-11 Cooling system 11-12 Cooling fan, hose and connections . 11-12 Engine coolant … 11-12 Air cleaner element 11-15 Replacing the air cleaner element . 11-15 Spark plugs …. . 11-17 Recommended spark plugs . . 11-17 Drive belts … Manual transm Checking the oil level Recommended grade and viscosity

Maintenance and service Automatic transmission fluid . Checking the fluid level Recommended fluid Front differential gear oil (AT vehicles) Checking the oil level .. Recommended grade and viscosity Rear differential gear oil … Checking the gear oil level Recommended grade and viscosity Power steering fluid . Checking the fluid level Recommended fluid Brake fluid … Checking the fluid level Recommended brake fluid Clutch fluid (MT vehicles) . Checking the fluid level … Recommended clutch fluid Brake booster Brake pedal . Checking the brake pedal free play . Checking the brake pedal reserve distance Clutch pedal (MT vehicles) Checking the clutch function Checking the clutch pedal free play Replacement of brake pad and li Breaking-in of new brake pads an Parking brake stroke eit- + 11-20 . 11-20 . 11-21 . 11-21 . 11-21 . 11-22 . 11-22 . 11-22 . 11-23 . 11-24 . 11-24 . 11-24 . 11-25 . 11-25 . 11-25 . 11-26 . 11-26 . 11-26 . 11-27 . 11-27 . 11-27 . 11-27 . 11-28 . 11-28 . 11-28 . 11-28 . 11-29 . 11-29

d di|æ KŸ7 A1900BE-A.book Page 2 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM n 41 Maintenance and service Tires and wheels . Trunk light …… . 11-51 Types of tires High mount stop light . . 11-51 Tire inspection Tire pressures and wear Wheel balance Wear indicators Tire rotation Tire replacement Wheel replacement Aluminum wheels Intercooler water spray (WRX-STI) . Windshield washer fluid … Replacement of wiper blades . Windshield wiper blades assembly PSS Windshield wiper blade rubber bé Rear window wiper blade assembly . Rear window wiper blade rubber … 11-39 Battery Fuses Main fuse Installation of accessories Replacing bulbs … Headlights (WRX-STI) Headlights (Except WRX-STI) Front turn signal light bulbs . 11-48 Parking light . 11-48 Front fog light . 11-48 Rear combination lights . 11-48 License plate light 11-50 Dome light, map light and cargo area light 11-50

KT AT90OBE-A book Page 3 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM Maintenance schedule Maintenance precautions The scheduled maintenance items re- quired to be serviced at regular intervals are shown in the “Warranty and Mainte- nance Booklet”. For details of your maintenance schedule, read the separate “Warranty and Mainte- nance Booklet”. When maintenance and service are re- quired, it is recommended that all work be done by an authorized SUBARU dealer. If you perform maintenance and service by yourself, you should familiarize your- self with the information provided in this section on general maintenance and ser- vice for your SUBARU. Incorrect or incomplete service could cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera- tion. Any problems caused by improper maintenance and service performed by you are not eligible for warranty coverage. À WARNING « Testing of an AIl-Wheel Drive ve- hicle must NEVER be performed on a single two-wheel dynamome- ter or similar apparatus. Attempt- ing to do so will result in transmis- sion damage and in uncontrolled vehicle movement and may cause an accident or injuries to persons nearby. Always select a safe area when performing maintenance on your vehicle.

—+1® Maintenance andservice 11-3 Always be very careful to avoi jury when working on the vehicle. Remember that some of the mate- rials in the vehicle may be hazard- ous if improperly used or handled, for example, battery acid. Your vehicle should only be ser- viced by persons fully competent to do so. Serious personal injury may result to persons not experi- enced in servicing vehicles. Always use the proper tools and make certain that they are well maintained. Never get under the vehicle sup- ported only by a jack. Always use a safety stands to support the ve- hicle. Never keep the engine running in a poorly ventilated area, such as a garage or other closed areas. Do not smoke or allow open flames around the fuel or battery. This will cause a fire. Because the fuel system is under pressure, replacement of the fuel filter should be performed only by your SUBARU dealer. — CONTINUED —

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 4 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 11-4 maintenance and service + Wear adequate eye protection to guard against getting oil or fluids in your eyes. If something does get in your eyes, thoroughly wash them out with clean water. Do not tamper with the ng of the SRS airbag system or seatbelt pretensioner system, or attempt to take its connectors apart, as that may activate the system or it can render it inoperative. The wir- ing and connectors of these sy: tems are yellow for eas) cation. NEVER use a ci for these wiring If your SRS T2 or seatbelt pre- tensioner needs service, consult your nearest SUBARU dealer. + Always let the engine cool down. Engine parts become very hot when the engine is running and remain hot for some time after the engine is stopped. Do not spill engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid or any other fluid on hot engine components. This may cause a fire. Always remove the key from the switch is in the “ON” position, the cooling fan may operate suddenly even when the engine is stopped. Engine hood

B Before checking or servicing in the engine compartment HE When you do checking or ser- vicing in the engine compart- ment while the engine is run- ning A WARNING À WARNING + Always stop the engine and set the parking brake firmly to pre- vent the vehicle from moving.

A running engine can be dangerous. Keep your fingers, hands, clothing, hair and tools away from the cooling fan, belts and any other moving en- gine parts. Removing rings, watch- es and ties is advisable.

1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the

windshield, return them to their original positions.

2. Pull the hood release knob under the

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page $ Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM ZT 800447

3. Release the secondary hood release

located under the front grille by moving the lever toward the left. hood prop into the slot in the hood. To close the hood':

1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the

hood prop from the slot in the hood and re- turn the prop to its retainer.

2. Lower the hood until it approaches ap-

proximately 12 in (30 cm) from the closed position and let it drop. After closing the hood, be sure the hood is securely locked. If this does not close the hood, release it from a slightly higher position. Do not push the hood forcibly to close it. It could deform the metal. Lift up the hood, release the hood prop from its retainer and put the end of the À WARNING Always check that the hood is prop- erly locked before you start driving. Ifitis not, it might fly open while the vehicle is moving and block your view, which may cause an accident and serious bodily injury.

e||4… _4lle 7-AISOOBE-A.book Page 6 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM & Ï £ EN Lù ù 11-6 maintenance and service Engine compartment overview 1) Air cleaner element (page 11-15)

2) Manual transmission oil level gauge

E Non-turbo models (MT) (page 11-18) or Differential gear oil level gauge (AT) (page 11-21)

3) Ciutch fluid reservoir (page 11-26)

2) Manual transmission oil level gauge

| à & WP AIDOOBE-A.book Page 8 Friday, June 17, 200$ 5:40 PM

11-8 maintenance and service Engine oil EH Checking the oil level Check the engine oil level at each fuel stop.

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and

3. Be sure the dipstick is correctly insert-

ed until it stops with the graphic symbol & on its top appearing as shown in the illustration.

4. Pull out the dipstick again and check

the oil level on it. If it is below the lower level, add oil to bring the level up to the up- per level. [ Â CAUTION + Use only engine oil with the rec- ommended grade and viscosity.

• Be careful not to spill engine oil when adding it. If oil touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If en- gine oil gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

If you check the oil level just after stopping the engine, wait a few minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan before checking the level. Just after driving or while the engine is warm, the engine oil level reading may be in a range between the upper level and the notch mark. This is caused by thermal expansion of the engine oil. To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do not add any additional oil above the upper lev- el when the engine is cold. E Changing the oil and oil filter Change the oil and oil filter according to the maintenance schedule in the “Warran- ty and Maintenance Booklet”. The engine oil and oil filter must be changed more frequently than listed in the maintenance schedule when driving on dusty roads, when short trips are frequent- ly made, or when driving in extremely cold whether.

1. Warm up the engine by letting the en-

gine idle for approximately 10 minutes to ease draining the engine oil.

2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

3. Remove the oil filler cap.

e||4… _4lle 7-AISOOBE-A.book Page 9 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM & Ï £ EN Lù ù Maintenance and-service 11-9 warm. The used oil should be drained into an appropriate container and disposed of f EC) properly. Va SK [ A WARNING | À Ÿ an : Be careful not to burn yourself with hot engine oil.

5. Wipe the seating surface of the drain

plug with a clean cloth and tighten it se- curely with a new sealing washer after the oil has completely drained out.

6. Remove under cover.

7. Remove the oil filter with an oil filter

8. Before installing a new oil filter, apply a

thin coat of engine oil to the seal.

9. Clean the rubber seal seating area of

the bottom of engine and install the oil fil- ter by hand turning. Be careful not to twist or damage the seal. 10.Tighten the oil filter by the amount indi- cated in the following table after the seal makes contact with the bottom of engine. | A | ù (ei _ IX PAIE Turbo models Non-turbo models

4. Drain out the engine oil by removing

the drain plug while the engine is still — CONTINUED — + nil

KP AI9OOBE-A book Page 10 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 11-10-maintenance and service Amount of ro- Oil fier color | Part number | AMount o Black | 15208AA100 | 1 rotation White | 15208Aa09a | 2/5 — $/4 rota- tion À CAUTION | Never over tighten the oil filter be- cause that can result in an oil leak. Thoroughly wipe off any engine oil that has spilled over the ex- haust pipe and/or under-cover. If left unremoved, the oil could catch fire. refilling the engine with oil, therefore, you must the dipstick to confirm that the level is correct. 13.Start the engine and make sure that no oil leaks appear around the filter's rubber seal and drain plug. 14.Run the engine until it reaches the nor- mal operating temperature. Then stop the engine and wait a few minutes to allow the oil drain back. Check the oil level again and if necessary, add more engine oil. [ À CAUTION Be careful not to spill engine oil when adding it. If oil touches the ex- haust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. 11.Reinstall under cover. 12.Pour engine oil through the filler neck. Oil capacity (guideline):

4.2 US at (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)

The oil quantity indicated above is only guideline. The necessary quantity of oil depends on the quantity of oil that has been drained. The quantity of drained oil differs slightly depending on the temperature of the oil and the time the oil is left flowing out. After

H Recommended grade and viscosity Oil grade: ILSAC GF-4, which can be identified with the ILSAC certification mark (Starburst mark) or API classification SM with the words “ENERGY CONSERVING” These recommended oil grades can be identified by looking for either or both of the following marks displayed on the oil

1) Indicates the oil quality by API designa-

2) Indicates the SAE oil viscosity grade

3) Indicates that the oil has fuel saving ca-

Maintenance and service 11-11 eas with very high temperatures, or used for heavy-duty applications such as tow- ing a trailer, use of oil with the following grade and viscosities is recommended. 7 ‘F-20 0 20 40 60 80 100 5W-30* API classification SM (or SL): SAE viscosity No.: 30, 40, 10W-50, 20W-40, 20W-50 B00522 ILSAC Certification Mark (Starburst Mark) In choosing an oil, you want the proper quality and viscosity, as well as one that will add to fuel economy. The following ta- ble lists the recommended viscosities and applicable temperatures. When adding oil, different brands may be used together as long as they are the same API classification and SAË viscosity as those recommended by SUBARU. SAE viscosity No. and applicable tem- perature “:_ 5W-30 is recommended. Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity provide better fuel economy. However, in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is required to properly lubricate the engine. À CAUTION Use only engine oil with the recom- mended grade and viscosity. H Recommended grade and viscosity under severe driv- ing conditions Ifthe vehicle is used in desert areas, in ar-

HE Synthetic oil You can use synthetic engine oil that meets the same requirements given for conventional engine oil. When using syn- thetic oil, you must use oil of the same classification, viscosity and grade shown in this owners manual, and must follow the oil and filter changing intervals shown in the maintenance schedule.

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 12 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 11-12-Maintenance and service

Cooling system * Do not splash the engine coolant | | M Engine coolant over painted parts. The alcohol contained in the engine coolant may damage the paint surface. Y Checking the coolant level [ A WARNING Never attempt to remove the radia- tor cap until the engine has been [1 Cooling fan, hose and con- shut off and has cooled down com- nections pletely. Since the coolant is under pressure, you may suffer serious burns from a spray of boiling hot coolant when the cap is removed. Your vehicle employs an electric cooling fan which is thermostatically controlled to operate when the engine coolant reaches a specific temperature. Ifthe radiator cooling fan does not operate ÂCAUTION even when the engine coolant empera The cooling system has been ture gauge exceeds the normal operating 800468 filled at the factory a high range, the cooling fan circuit may be de- quality, corrosion-inhibiting, year- fective. Check the fuse and replace it if 1) “FULL” level mark around coolant which provides necessary. If the fuse is not blown, have 2) “LOW" level mark protection against freezing down | | As Song sjstem checked by Jour | Ca he coolant level at each fuel stop. to -33°F (-36°C). For adding, use ° 1. Check the coolant level on the outside genuine SUBARU coolant or an If frequent addition of coolant is neces- | of the reservoir while the engine is cool. equivalent: a mixture of 50% soft sary, there may be a leak in the engine | 2. If the level is close to or lower than the water and 50% ethylene-glycol ba- | | cooling system. It is recommended that | “LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the sis coolant. Use of improper cool- the cooling system and connections be | “FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is ants may result in corrosion in the checked for leaks, damage, or looseness. | empty, remove the radiator cap and refill cooling system. It is important to as required. maintain protection against freez- ing and corrosion, even if freezing temperatures are not expected. Never mix different kinds of cool- ant. > PS LA SA et +

1 à KP AT9OOBE-A book Page 13 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

3. After refilling the reserve tank and the

radiator, reinstall the caps and check that the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap are in the proper position. ÂCAUTION + Be careful not to spill engine cool- ant when adding it. If coolant touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If engine coolant gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off. Do not splash the engine coolant over painted parts. The alcohol contained in the engine coolant may damage the paint surface. Y Changing the coolant B00019 Always add genuine Subaru cooling sys- tem conditioner whenever the coolant is replaced. Change the engine coolant and add gen- uine Subaru cooling system conditioner using the following procedures according to the maintenance schedule.

1. Remove the under cover.

2. Place a proper container under the

drain plug and loosen the drain plug.

3. Loosen the radiator cap to drain the

coolant from the radiator. Then drain the coolant from the reserve tank. Tighten the drain plug securely. NOTE (Turbo model only) The cap (without tabs) on top of the ra- diator does not need to be removed. To

Maintenance and service 11-13 add coolant, remove the cap (with tabs) on the coolant tank on top of the en- gine. [ A WARNING | Never attempt to remove the radia- tor cap until the engine has been shut off and has cooled down com- pletely. Since the coolant is under pressure, you may suffer serious burns from a spray of boiling hot coolant when the cap is removed.

4. Install the under cover.

B00453 Non-turbo models

2) Fill up to this level

e||4… _4lle KŸ7 A1900BE-A.book Page 14 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM n Ï £ EN Lù ù 11-14 maintenance and service Guideline of coolant quantity (including cool- ÂCAUTION ant in reservoir tank): Non-turbo models: - Be careful not to spill engine cool- MT. 7.4 US qt (7.0 liters, 6.2 Imp at) ant when adding it. If coolant AT. 7.3 US at (6.9 liters, 6.1 Imp qt) touches the exhaust pipe, it may Turbo models: cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or MT. 8.1 US qt (7.7 liters, 6.8 Imp at) a fire. If engine coolant gets on the AT. 8.0 US qt (7.6 liters, 6.7 Imp qt) snaust pipe, be sure to wipe it Do not splash the engine coolant over painted parts. The alcohol contained in the engine coolant may damage the paint surface. Turbo models

> 2) Fill up to this level

6. Pour the coolant and fill to the reservoir As

tank's “FULL” level mark. Ÿ

5. Slowly pour the coolant and fill up to

just below the filler neck, allowing enough room to add genuine Subaru cooling sys- tem conditioner in the radiator. Add genu- ine Subaru cooling system conditioner un- til the coolant level reaches the filler neck. Do not pour the coolant too quickly, as this 1) “FULL” level mark may lead to insufficient air bleeding and 2) “LOW” level mark trapped air in the system.

7. Put the radiator cap back on and tight-

e||4… KŸ7 AI900BE-A.book Page 15 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

en firmly. At this time, make sure that the rubber gasket in the radiator cap is cor- rectly in place.

8. Start and run the engine for more than

five minutes at 2,000 to 3,000 rpm.

9. Stop the engine and wait until the cool-

ant cools down (122 to 140°F [50 to 60°C]). If there is any loss of coolant, add coolant to the radiator's filler neck and to the reserve tank's “FULL” level. 10.Put the radiator cap and reservoir cap back on and tighten firmly. Air cleaner element The air cleaner element functions as a fil- ter screen. When the element is perforat- ed or removed, engine wear will be exces- sive and engine life shortened. The air cleaner element is a viscous type. It is unnecessary to clean or wash the ele- ment. —+1® Maintenance andservice 11-15 Y Turbo models [ A WARNING Do not operate the engine with the air cleaner element removed. The air cleaner element not only filters in- take air but also stops flames if the engine backfires. If the air cleaner element is not installed when the en- gine backfires, you could be burned. BE Replacing the air cleaner ele- ment Replace the air cleaner element according to the maintenance schedule in the “War- ranty and Maintenance Booklet’. Under extremely dusty conditions, replace it more frequently. It is recommended that you always use genuine SUBARU parts.

1. Unsnap the two clamps holding the air

2. Open the air cleaner case cover and

1 à KP AT90OBE-A book Page 16 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 11-16 maintenance and service

3. Clean the inside of the air cleaner cov-

er and case with a damp cloth and install a new air cleaner element.

4. Toinstall the air cleaner case cover, in-

sert the two projections on the air cleaner case cover into the slits on the air cleaner case and then snap the two clamps on the air cleaner case cover. Y Non-turbo models

1. Unsnap the two clamps holding the air

2. Push the air cleaner case cover in the

direction of the arrow shown in the draw-

1) Alr cleaner case cover

2) Air cleaner element

3. Open the air cleaner case cover and

remove the air cleaner element.

4. Clean the inside of the air cleaner cov-

er and case with a damp cloth and install a new air cleaner element.

5. Toinstall the air cleaner case cover, in-

sert the three projections on the air clean- er case into the slits on the air cleaner case cover and then snap the two clamps on the air cleaner case cover. Spark plugs B00027 It may be difficult to replace the spark plugs. It is recommended that you have the spark plugs replaced by your SUBARU dealer. The spark plugs should be replaced ac- cording to the maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. ÂCAUTION + When disconnecting the spark plug cables, always grasp the spark plug cap, not the cables. + Make sure the cables are replaced in the correct order.

5-speed transmission (Non-turbo model)

The alternator, power steering pump, and air conditioner compressor depend on drive belts. Satisfactory performance re- quires that belt tension be correct. To check belt tension, place a straight- edge (ruler) across two adjacent pulleys and apply a force of 22 Ibs (98 N, 10 kg) midway between the pulleys by using a spring scale. Belt deflection should be the amount specified. If a belt is loose, cracked, or worn, contact your SUBARU dealer.

1 à KP AT90OBE-A book Page 19 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM SC:

6-speed transmission

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and

3. Pull out the dipstick again and check

the oil level on it. If it is below the lower level, add oil through the dipstick hole to bring the level up to the upper level. [ À CAUTION ] Be careful not to spill manual trans- mission oil when adding it. If oil touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

—+1® Maintenance and service 11-19 H Recommended grade and viscosity Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and additives. Never use different brands together. Oil grade: API classification GL-5 ‘C-30-20 10 0 10 20 30 40 ‘FJD 0 20 40 Go 80! 100

SAE viscosity No. and applicable tem- perature

1 à KT AISOOBE-A-G11 fm Page 20 Wednesday, June 22, 2005 9:45 AM

11-20 maintenance and service Automatic transmission fluid H Checking the fluid level The automatic transmission fluid expands largely as its temperature rises; the fluid level differs according to fluid tempera- ture. Therefore, there are two different scales for checking the level of hot fluid and cold fluid on the dipstick. Though the fluid level can be checked without warming up the fluid on the “COLD” range, we recommend checking the fluid level when the fluid is at operating temperature. Y Checking the fluid level when the fluid is hot

1. Drive the vehicle several miles to raise

the temperature of the transmission fluid up to normal operating temperature; 158 to 176°F (70 to 80°C) is normal.

2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

set the parking brake.

3. First shift the selector lever in each po-

sition. Then shift it in the “P” position, and run the engine at idling speed. e 2

4. Pull out the dipstick and check the fluid

level on the gauge. [fit is below the lower level on the “HOT” range, add the recom- mended automatic transmission fluid up to the upper level. Y Checking the fluid level when the fluid is cold When the fluid level has to be checked without time to warm up the automatic transmission, check to see that the fluid level is between the lower level and upper level on the “COLD” range. If it is below that range, add fluid up to the upper level. Be careful not to overfill. Â CAUTION Be careful not to spill automatic transmission fluid when adding it. If automatic transmission fluid touch- es the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If au- tomatic transmission fluid gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off. 3 —kà | 1 a —k a 3 2| El Ê 4 LV B00370 A) HOT range B) COLD range

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page 21 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

H Recommended fluid Use one of the following types of automat- ic transmission fluid. Genuine Subaru Automatic Transmis- sion Fluid Type-HP

Castrol Transmax J Pennzoil ATF-J*

• Available only in the USA (except Alaska and Hawaïi) NOTE Using any non-specified type of auto- matic transmission fluid could result in damage inside the transmission. When replacing the automatic transmission fluid, be sure to use a fluid of the types specified above. Front differential gear oil (AT vehicles) Æ Checking the oil level

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and

Maintenance and service 11-21 B00372

3. Pull out the dipstick again and check

the oil level on it. If it is below the lower level, add oil to bring the level up to the up- per level. ÂÀCAUTION Be careful not to spill front differen- tial gear oil when adding it. If oil touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off. — CONTINUED — nil

1 à KP AT9OOBE-A book Page 22 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

11-22-Maintenance and service H Recommended grade and viscosity Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and additives. Never use different brands together. Oil grade: API classification GL-5 ‘30-20 10 OO 10 20 30 40

SAE viscosity No. and applicable tem- perature Rear differential gear oil EH Checking the gear oil level Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear differential protector. The differential pro- tector provides protection to the rear dif- ferential assembly during off-road use. Removal of the rear differential protector is not required when checking the oil level.

Remove the plug from the filler hole and check the oil level. The oil level should be kept even with the bottom of the filler hole. If the oil level is below the bottom edge of the hole, add oil through the filler hole to raise the level.

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 23 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM A CAUTION ]

Maintenance and service 11-23 ‘C-30-20 10 0 10 20 30 40 F 1 - Be careful not to spill rear differ- ential gear oil when adding it. If rear differential gear oil touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If rear differential gear oil gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off. Ifthe vehicle requires frequent re- filling, there may be an oil leak. If you suspect a problem, have the vehicle checked at your SUBARU dealer. H Recommended grade and viscosity Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and additives. Never use different brands together. Oil grade: API classification GL-5 “F-JD O0 20 40 60 80! 100 ‘c-30-20 10 O0 10 20 30 40 85w

SAE viscosity No. and applicable tem- perature Except STI version SAE viscosity No. and applicable tem- perature STI version

1 à KP AT90OBE-A book Page 24 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

11-24 maintenance and service Power steering fluid H Checking the fluid level

The power steering fluid expands greatly as its temperature rises; the fluid level dif- fers according to fluid temperature. There- fore, the reservoir tank has two different checking ranges for hot and cold fluids. Check the power steering fluid level monthly.

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and

2. Check the fluid level of the reservoir

tank. When the fluid is hot after the vehicle has been run: Check that the oil level is be- tween “HOT MIN” and “HOT MAX" on the surface of the reservoir tank. When the fluid is cool before the vehicle is run: Check that the oil level is between “COLD MIN” and “COLD MAX" on the sur- face of the reservoir tank.

3. lfthe fluid level is lower than the appli-

cable “MIN” line, add the recommended fluid as necessary to bring the level be- tween the “MIN” and “MAX” line. Ifthe fluid level is extreme low, it may indi- cate possible leakage. Consult your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

[ A WARNING Be careful not to burn yourself be- cause the fluid may be hot. [ ÂCAUTION + When power steering fluid is be- ing added, use only clean fluid, and be careful not to allow any dirt into the tank. And never use dif- ferent brands together. + Avoid spilling fluid when adding it in the tank. Be careful not to spill power steer- ing fluid when adding it. If power steering fluid touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If power steering fluid gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off. HE Recommended fluid “Dexron Ill” Type Automatic Transmis- sion Fluid

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 25 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 4||e

Check the fluid level monthly. + Never let brake fluid contact your eyes because brake fluid can be harmful to your eyes. If brake fluid gets in your eyes, immediately flush them thoroughly with clean water. For safety, when perform- ing this work, wearing eye protec- tion is advisable. Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air. Any absorbed moisture can cause a dangerous loss of braking performance. If the vehicle requires frequent re- filling, there may be a leak. If you suspect a problem, have the vehi- cle checked at your SUBARU dealer. + Never splash the brake fluid over painted surfaces or rubber parts. Alcohol contained in the brake flu- id may damage them. Be careful not to spill brake fluid when adding it. If brake fluid touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If brake fluid gets on the ex- haust pipe, be sure to wipe it off. H Recommended brake fluid FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or 4 brake flu-

Check the fluid level on the outside of the reservoir. If the level is below “MIN”, add A CAUTION the recommended brake fluid to “MAX”. Use only brake fluid from a sealed con- tainer. Never use different brands of brake fluid together. Also, avoid mixing DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake flu- ids even if they are of the same brand. When adding brake fluid, be care- ful not to allow any dirt into the reservoir.

KT AT90OBE-A book Page 26 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 11-26 maintenance and service Clutch fluid (MT vehicles) H Checking the fluid level

/ Y 800126 Check the fluid level on the outside of the reservoir. If the level is below “MIN” level mark, add the recommended cluich fluid to “MAX” level mark. Use only clutch fluid from a sealed con- tainer. À WARNING Never let clutch fluid contact your eyes because clutch fluid can be harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid gets in your eyes, immediately flush them thoroughly with clean water. For safety, when performing this work, wearing eye protection is ad- visable. + Never splash the clutch fluid over painted surfaces or rubber parts. Alcohol contained in the clutch fluid may damage them.

• Be careful not to spill clutch fluid when adding it. If clutch fluid touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If clutch fluid gets on the ex- haust pipe, be sure to wipe it off. ACAUTION + Clutch fluid absorbs moisture from the air. Any absorbed mois- ture can cause improper clutch operation. If the vehicle requires frequent re- filling, there may be a leak. If you suspect a problem, have the vehi- cle checked at your SUBARU dealer. Never use different brands of clutch fluid together. When clutch fluid is added, be careful not to allow any dirt into the tank. HE Recommended clutch fluid FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or 4 brake flu-

ÂCAUTION Avoid mixing DOT 3 and DOT 4 clutch fluids even if they are of the same brand.

e||4… KŸ7 AI900BE-A.book Page 27 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

Brake booster Brake pedal If the brake booster does not operate as described in the following, have it checked by your SUBARU dealer.

1. With the engine off, depress the brake

pedal several times, applying the same pedal force each time. The distance the pedal travels should not vary.

2. With the brake pedal depressed, start

the engine. The pedal should move slight- ly down to the floor.

3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop

the engine and keep the pedal depressed for 30 seconds. The pedal height should not change.

4. Start the engine again and run for ap-

proximately one minute then turn it off. Depress the brake pedal several times to check the brake booster. The brake boost- er operates properly if the pedal stroke de- creases with each depression. Check the brake pedal free play and re- serve distance according to the mainte- nance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Æ Checking the brake pedal free play —___— 800377

1) 0.04 — 0.12 in (1.0 — 3.0 mm)

Stop the engine and firmly depress the brake pedal several times. Lightly press the brake pedal down with one finger to check the free play with a force of less than 2 lbs (10 N, 1 kg). Ifthe free play is not within proper specifi- cation, contact your SUBARU dealer.

Maintenance and'service 11-27 HE Checking the brake pedal re- serve distance _ 800378

1) More than 2.56 in (65 mm)

Depress the pedal with a force of approxi- mately 66 Ibs (294 N, 30 kg) and measure the distance between the upper surface of the pedal pad and the floor. When the measurement is smaller than the specification, or when the pedal does not operate smoothly, contact with your SUBARU dealer.

e||4… KŸ7 AI900BE-A.book Page 28 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

11-28 maintenance and service Clutch pedal (MT vehicles) Check the clutch pedal free play and re- serve distance according to the mainte- nance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. H Checking the clutch function Check the clutch engagement and disen- gagement.

1. With the engine idling, check that there

are no abnormal noises when the clutch pedal is depressed, and that shifting into 1st or reverse feels smooth.

2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal

slowly to check that the engine and trans- mission smoothly couple without any sign of slippage. H Checking the clutch pedal free play

Lightly press the clutch pedal down with your finger until you feel resistance, and check the free play. If the free play is not within proper specifi- cation, contact your SUBARU dealer. Replacement of brake pad and lining

The right front disc brake and the right rear disc brake have audible wear indicators on the brake pads. If the brake pads wear close to their service limit, the wear indica- tor makes a very audible scraping noise when the brake pedal is applied. If you hear this scraping noise each time you apply the brake pedal, have the brake pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

KP AT9OOBE-A book Page 29 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM ÂCAUTION If you continue to drive despite the scraping noise from the audible brake pad wear indicator, it will re- sult in the need for costly brake ro- tor repair or replacement. BBreaking-in of new brake pads and linings When replacing the brake pad or lining, use only genuine SUBARU parts. After re- placement, the new parts must be broken in as follows: Y Brake pad and lining While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40 mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more times. Y Parking brake lining

1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of approx-

imately 22 mph (35 km/h).

2. With the parking brake release button

pushed in, pull the parking brake lever SLOWLY and GENTLY. (Pulling with a force of approximately 33 Ibs [147 N, 15 kg].)

3. Drive the vehicle for approximately 220

yards (200 meters) in this condition.

4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking

brake to cool down. Repeat this proce- dure.

5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the

parking brake stroke is out of the specified range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut located on the parking brake lever. Parking brake stroke: 7-8 notches / 44 Ibs (196 N, 20 kg) [ A WARNING | A safe location and situation should be selected for break-in dri —+1® Maintenance and service 11-29 Parking brake stroke B00379 [ À CAUTION ] Pulling the parking brake lever too forcefully may cause the rear wheels to lock. To avoid this, be cer- tain to pull the lever up slowly and gently. Check the parking brake stroke according to the maintenance schedule in the “War- ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. When the parking brake is properly adjusted, braking power is fully applied by pulling the lever up seven to eight notches gently but firmly (approximately 44 Ibs [196 N, 20 kg]). Ifthe parking brake lever stroke is not Within the specified range, have the brake system checked and adjusted at your SUBARU dealer.

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page 30 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

11-30-maintenance and service Tires and wheels HE Types of tires You should be familiar with type of tires present on your vehicle. The factory-fitted 17-inch tires on the WRX-STI are summer tires. The factory- fitted tires on other versions are all-sea- son tires. Y All season tires All season tires are designed to provide an adequate measure of traction, handling and braking performance in year-round driving including snowy and icy road con- ditions. However all season tires do not of- fer as much traction performance as win- ter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow or on icy roads. All season tires are identified by “ALL SEASON' and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on the tire sidewall. Y Summer tires Summer tires are high-speed capability tires best suited for highway driving under dry conditions. Summer tires are inadequate for driving on slippery roads such as on snow-cov- ered or icy roads. If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered or icy roads, we strongly recommend the use of winter (snow) tires. When installing winter tires, be sure to re- place all four tires. Y Winter (snow) tires Winter tires are best suited for driving on snow-covered and icy roads. However winter tires do not perform as well as sum- mer tires and all season tires on roads oth- er than snow-covered and icy roads. A Tire inspection Check on a daily basis that the tires are free from serious damage, nails, and stones. At the same time, check the tires for abnormal wear. Contact your SUBARU dealer immediate- ly if you find any problem. NOTE + When the wheels and tires strike curbs or are subjected to harsh treat- ment as when the vehicle is driven on a rough surface, they can suffer damage that cannot be seen with the naked eye. This type of damage does not become evident until time has passed. Try not to drive over curbs, potholes or on oth- er rough surfaces. If doing so is un- avoidable, keep the vehicle’s speed down to a walking pace or less, and ap- proach the curbs as squarely as possi-

ble. Also, make sure the tires are not pressed against the curb when you park the vehicle. + If you feel unusual vibration while driving or find ult to steer the ve- hicle in a straight line, one of the tires and/or wheels may be damaged. Drive slowly to the nearest authorized SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle inspected. A Tire pressures and wear Maintaining the correct tire pressures helps to maximize the tires’ service lives and is essential for good running perfor- mance. Check and, if necessary, adjust the pressure of each tire (including the spare) at least once a month (for example, during a fuel stop) and before any long journey.

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page 31 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM B00164 Check the tire pressures when the tires are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the values shown on the tire placard. The tire placard is located on the door pillar on the driver's side. Driving even a short distance warms up the tires and increases the tire pressures. Also, the tire pressures are affected by the outside temperature. Itis best to check tire pressure outdoors before driving the vehi- cle. When a tire becomes warm, the air inside itexpands, causing the tire pressure to in- crease. Be careful not to mistakenly re- lease air from a warm tire to reduce its pressure. NOTE + The air pressure in a tire increases by approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm2) when the tire becomes warm.

• The tires are considered cold when the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or has been driven less than one mile (1.6 km). A WARNING Do not let air out of warm tires to ad- just pressure. Doing so will result in low tire pressure. incorrect tire pressures detract from con- trollability and ride comfort, and they cause the tires to wear abnormally. —+1®

Maintenance and service 11-31 + Correct tire pressure (tread worn evenly) Roadholding is good, and steering is re- À sponsive. Rolling resistance is low, so fuel consumption is also lower. — CONTINUED — nil

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page 32 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 11-32-maintenance and service + Abnormally low tire pressure (tread worn at shoulders) + Abnormally high tire pressure (tread worn in center)

Rolling resistance is high, so fuel con- sumption is also higher. Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire magni- fies the effects of road-surface bumps and dips, possibly resulting in vehicle damage. If the tire placard shows tire pressures for the vehicle when fully loaded and for the vehicle when towing a trailer, adjust the tire pressures to the values that match current loading conditions. [ A WARNING Driving at high speeds with exces- sively low tire pressures can cause the tires to deform severely and to rapidly become hot. A sharp in- crease in temperature could cause tread separation, and destruction of the tires. The resulting loss of vehi: cle control could lead to an acci- dent. EH Wheel balance Each wheel was correctly balanced when your vehicle was new, but the wheels will become unbalanced as the tires become worn during use. Wheel imbalance caus- es the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at certain vehicle speeds and detracts from the vehicle's straight-line stability. It can also cause steering and suspension sys- tem problems and abnormal tire wear. lf you suspect that the wheels are not cor- rectly balanced, have them checked and adjusted by your SUBARU dealer. Also have them adjusted after tire repairs and after tire rotation. NOTE Loss of correct wheel alignment* caus- es the tires to wear on one side and re- duces the vehicle’s running stability. nil

1 à KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 33 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM Contact your SUBARU dealer if you no- tice abnormal tire wear. *: The suspension system is designed to hold each wheel at a certain alignment (relative to the other wheels and to the road) for optimum straight-line stability and cornering perfor- mance. EH Wear indicators B00327

3) Tread wear indicator

Each tire incorporates a tread wear indica- tor, which becomes visible when the depth of the tread grooves decreases to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A tire must be replaced when the tread wear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread. A WARNING | e’s tread wear indicator le, the tire is worn be- yond the acceptable limit and must be replaced immediately. With a tire in this condition, driving at high speeds in wet weather can cause the vehicle to hydroplane. The re- sulting loss of vehicle control can lead to an accident. NOTE For safety, inspect tire tread regularly and replace the tires before their tread wear indicators become visible. Tire rotation B00054 —+1® Maintenance and'service 11-33 Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel. To maximize the life of each tire and ensure that the tires wear uniformly, it is best to rotate the tires every 7,500 miles (12,500 km). Rotating the tires involves switching the front and rear tires on the right-hand side of the vehicle and similarly switching the front and rear tires on the left-hand side of the vehicle. (Each tire must be kept on its original side of the vehicle.) Replace any damaged or unevenly worn tire at the time of rotation. After tire rota- tion, adjust the tire pressures and make sure the wheel nuts are correctly tight- ened. After driving approximately 600 miles (1,000 km), check the wheel nuts again and retighten any nut that has become loose. A Tire replacement The wheels and tires are important and in- tegral parts of your vehicle's design; they cannot be changed arbitrarily. The tires fit- ted as standard equipment are optimally matched to the characteristics of the vehi- cle and were selected to give the best pos- sible combination of running performance, ride comfort, and service life. It is essential for every tire to have a size and construc- tion matching those shown on the tire — CONTINUED — nil

d di|æ KŸ7 A1900BE-A.book Page 34 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM n 41 11-34 maintenance and service placard and to have a speed symbol and load index matching those shown on the [ A WARNING | A WARNING tire placard. ° All four tires must be the same in Use only those wheels that are Using tires of a non-specified size detracts terms of manufacturer, brand specil d for your vehicle. Wheels from controllability, ride comfort, braking (tread pattern), construction, de- not meeting specifications could performance, speedometer accuracy and gree of wear, speed symbol, load terfere with brake caliper operation odometer accuracy. It also creates incor- index and size. Mixing tires of dif- and may cause the tires to rub rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro- ferent types, sizes or degrees of against the wheel well housing dur- priately changes the vehicle's ground wear can result in damage to vehi- ing turns. The resulting loss of vel clearance. cle’s power train. Use of different cle control could lead to an acci- types or sizes of tires can also dent. All four tires must be the same in terms of dangerously reduce controllabili- manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con- ty and braking performance and NOTE struction, and size. You are advised to re- can lead to an accident. When any of the wheels is removed N place the tires with new ones that are bal ti and replaced for tire rotation or to & identical to those ftted as standard equip | | * Se only radial tires. Do not use | | à flat tire, always check the t radial tires together with belted tight f the wheel nuts after dri ment. bias tires and/or bias-ply tires. Do- ing approximately “600 miles (1 000 For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU rec- ing so can dangerously reduce | | an, nut is loose, tighten it to the ommends replacing all four tires at the controllability, resulting in an ac- | | à cified torque. same time. cident. P que: HE Wheel replacement When replacing wheels due, for example, to damage, make sure the replacement wheels match the specifications of the wheels that are fitted as standard equip- ment. Replacement wheels are available from SUBARU dealers. > PS LA SA et. + “til

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page 35 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

Aluminum wheels Aluminum wheels can be scratched and damaged easily. Handle them carefully to maintain their appearance, performance, and safety. + When any ofthe wheels is removed and replaced for tire rotation or to change a flat, always check the tightness of the wheel nuts after driving approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose, tight- en it to the specified torque. + Never apply oil to the threaded parts, wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the wheel. + Never let the wheel rub against sharp protrusions or curbs. + Be sure to fit tire chains on uniformly and completely around the tire, otherwise the chains may scratch the wheel. + When wheel nuts, balance weights, or the center cap is replaced, be sure to re- place them with genuine SUBARU parts designed for aluminum wheels. Intercooler water spray (WRX-STI) B00462 Add water to the intercooler water spray tank when the intercooler water spray warning light in the combination meter comes on. The warning light comes on when the water in the tank has decreased to approximately 0.4 liters (0.4 US at, 0.4 Imp qt).

Maintenance and'service 11-35 B00169 The tank is located on the right-hand side ofthe trunk. NOTE + Use only pure water for refilling. + In cold weather (when you do not use the intercooler water spray), keep the tank half-empty in case the water freez- es. À larger amount of water could break the tank if it froze.

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page 36 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

11-36 maintenance and service Windshield washer fluid

Washer fluid level gauge If you spray washer fluid on the windshield but the supply of washer fluid appears to diminish, check the level of washer fluid in the tank. Remove the washer tank filler cap, then check the fluid level indicated by the level gauge (attached to the inside of the cap). If the level is near the “Low” mark, add flu-

id until it reaches the “Hi” level on the level gauge or the “Full” mark on the tank. Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield washer fluid is unavailable use clean wa- ter. In areas where water freezes in winter, use an anti-freeze type windshield washer fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5% surfactant, by volume. Its freezing temper- ature varies according to how much it is di- luted, as indicated in the following table. Washer Fluid Con- Freezing Tempera- centration ture 30% 10.4°F (-12°C) 50% —4°F (-20°C) 100% —49°F (-45°C) [ À CAUTION Never use engine coolant as washer fluid because it could cause paint damage. In order to prevent freezing of washer flu- id, check the freezing temperatures in the table above when adjusting the fluid con- centration to the outside temperature. If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with a different concentration from the one

1 à KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 37 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

used previously, purge the old fluid from the piping between the reservoir tank and washer nozzles by operating the washer for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if the concentration of the fluid remaining in the piping is too low for the outside tem- perature, it may freeze and block the noz- zles. ÂÀCAUTION Adjust the washer fluid concentra- tion appropriately for the outside temperature. If the concentration is inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid may freeze on the windshield and obstruct your view, and the fluid may freeze in the reservoir tank. Replacement of wiper blades Grease, wax, insects, or other material on the windshield or the wiper blade results in jerky wiper operation and streaking on the glass. If you cannot remove the streaks af- ter operating the windshield washer or if the wiper operation is jerky, clean the out- er surface of the windshield (or rear win- dow) and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield with water. À CAUTION Do not clean the wiper blades with gasoline or a solvent, such as paint thinner or benzene. This will cause deterioration of the wiper blades. If you cannot eliminate the streaking even after following this method, replace the wiper blades using the following proce- dures: E Windshield wiper blades as- sembly

2. Remove the wiper blade assembly by

holding its pivot area and pushing it in the direction shown by the arrow while de- pressing the wiper blade stopper.

3. Install the wiper blade assembly to the

wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.

4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly

lower it in position. — CONTINUED — nil

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page 38 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 11-38-maintenance and service EH Windshield wiper blade rub- ber

1. Grasp the locked end of the blade rub-

ber assembly and pull it firmly until the stoppers on the rubber are free of the met- al support.

2. Ifthe new blade rubber is not provided

with two metal spines, remove the metal spines from the old blade rubber and in- stall them in the new blade rubber.

3. Align the claws of the metal support

with the grooves in the rubber and slide the blade rubber assembly into the metal support until it locks.

4. Be sure to position the claws at the end

ofthe metal support between the stoppers on the rubber as shown. If the rubber is not retained properly, the wiper blade may scratch the windshield. H Rear window wiper blade as- sembly

1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear win-

1 à KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 39 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM B00061

3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward

you to remove it from the wiper arm. HE Rear window wiper blade rub- ber

1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber as-

sembly to unlock it from the plastic sup- port. B00064 —+1® Maintenance and service 11-39

2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of

the plastic support.

3. Ifthe new blade rubber is not provided

with two metal spines, remove the metal spines from the old blade rubber and in- stall them in the new blade rubber. — CONTINUED — nil

KT AT90OBE-A book Page 40 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 11-40 maintenance and service

4. Align the claws of the plastic support

with the grooves in the blade rubber as- sembly, then slide the blade rubber as- sembly into place.

Securely retain both ends of the rubber with the stoppers on the plastic support

ends. If the rubber is not retained properly, the wiper may scratch the rear window glass.

5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the

wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.

6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly

lower it in position. Battery À WARNING « Before beginning work on or near any battery, be sure to extinguish all cigarettes, matches, and light- ers. Never expose a battery to an open flame or electric sparks. Bat- teries give off a gas which is high- ly flammable and explosive. For safety, in case an explosion does occur, wear eye protection or shield your eyes when working near any battery. Never lean over a battery. Do not let battery fluid contact eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be- cause battery fluid is a corrosive acid. If battery fl gets on your skin or in your eyes, immediately flush the area with water thor- oughly. Seek medical help imme- diately if acid has entered the eyes. If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, immediately drink a large amount of milk or water, and seek medical attention immediate- ly.

Maintenance and service 11-41 « To lessen the risk of sparks, re- Fuses move rings, metal watchbands, and other metal jewelry. Never al- low metal tools to contact the pos- ÂCAUTION | itive battery terminal and anything 1 Never replace a fuse with one hav- connected to it WHILE you are at the same tim contact with any other metallic portion of the vehi- cle because a short circuit will re- ing a higher rating or with material other than a fuse because serious damage or a fire could result. sult. The fuses are designed to melt during an ° Keep everyone including children overload to prevent damage to the wiring a us battei g 800382 harness and electrical equipment. The y y: fuses are located in two fuse boxes. + Charge the battery in a well-venti- 1) Cap À lated area. 2) Upper level 22 * Battery posts, terminals and relat- 3) Lower level ed accessories contain lead and It is unnecessary to periodically check the lead compounds, chemicals battery fluid level or periodically refill with known to the State of California to distilled water. cause cancer and reproductive However, if the battery fluid level is below harm. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. Wash the lower level, remove the cap. Fill to the upper level with distilled water. hands after handling. — 1 CAUTION À | A oo Never use more than 10 amperes when charging the battery because One is located under the instrument panel it will shorten battery life. behind the coin tray on the driver's seat side. eit- +

e||4… _4lle #7 A1900BE-A.book Page 42 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM n Ï £ EN Lù ù 11-42 maintenance and service The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse box in the engine compartment.

To remove the coin tray, open the cover 1) Fuse puller 800328 A and pull the coin tray out. 2) Spare fuse À 7 . . 1) Good < The spare fuses are stored in the main 2) Blown fuse box cover in the engine compart- ment. If any lights, accessories or other electri- cal controls do not operate, inspect the corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown, replace it.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”

position and turn off all electrical accesso- ries.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Determine which fuse may be blown.

The back side of each fuse box cover and the “Fuses and circuits” section in chapter 12 in this manual show the circuit for each fuse. L mous The other one is housed in the engine compartment.

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page 43 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.

5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown, re-

place it with a spare fuse of the same rat- ing.

6. If the same fuse blows again, this indi-

cates that its system has a problem. Con- tact your SUBARU dealer for repairs. Main fuse —+1® Maintenance and service 11-43 Installation of accessories Main fuse box The main fuses are designed to melt dur- ing an overload to prevent damage to the Wiring harness and electrical equipment. Check the main fuses if any electrical component fails to operate (except the starter motor) and other fuses are good. A melted main fuse must be replaced. Use only replacements with the same speci- fied rating as the melted main fuse. If a main fuse blows after it is replaced, have the electrical system checked by your nearest SUBARU dealer.

Always consult your SUBARU dealer be- fore installing fog lights or any other elec- trical equipment in your vehicle. Such ac- cessories may cause the electronic sys- tem to malfunction if they are incorrectly installed or if they are not suited for the ve- hicle.

e||4… _4lle #7 A1900BE-A.book Page 44 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM n Ï Fr s\ 11-44 maintenance and service Replacing bulbs

Maintenance and service 11-45 Wattage Bulb No. À CAUTION |

1) Parking light 12V-5W 168 ”

2) Front turn signal light 12V-21W _- Replace any pub only with a new

3) Front sid ker light 12V-5W bulb of the specified wattage. Using

) Front side marker lig h T a bulb of different wattage could re-

5) Room light 12V-8W _-

6) High beam head light 12V-60W 9005 (HB3) : :

7) Front fog light 12V-55W H3 M'Headlights (WRX-STI)

8) Low beam head light

WRX-STI 12V-35W D2S A WARNING | Except WRX-STI 12V-55W H7 High-intensity-discharge (HID)

9) Trunk room light 12V-5W _- bulbs are used for the low beams of

10) High mount stop light the headlights on the WRX-STI.

Le) Sedan These HID bulbs use an extremely bé in compartment) 42V-21W _ pigh votage. To avoid me risk of an (in rear spoiler) 12V-1.2W . e lectric Shock and resulting serious Wagon 12 912 injury, you should not attempt to re- place them. Neither should you at-

11) Brake/tail light 12V-21/5W 7443 tempt to replace the high-beam

14) Backup light 12V-21W 7440 assembly components. For replace-

15) License plate light 12V-5W 168 ment of the headlight bulbs (low-

16) Cargo area light 12V-5W _ beam and high-beam), removal and

installation of the headlight assem- blies, and removal of headlight-as- sembly components, contact your SUBARU dealer. | - CONTINUED - d SA 7

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page 46 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 11-46 maintenance and service M Headlights (Except WRX-STI) Before replacing the left-hand (battery- side) high-beam light bulb, remove the screw that retains the windshield washer nozzle and tip the windshield washer noz- zle sideways. Turbo models Before replacing the right-hand low- or high-beam light bulb, remove the bolts

and remove the air intake duct. [ À CAUTION Halogen headlight bulbs become very hot while in use. If you touch the bulb surface with bare hands or greasy gloves, finger prints or grease on the bulb surface will de- velop into hot spots and cause the bulb to break. If there are finger prints or grease on the bulb surface, wipe them away with a soft cloth moistened with alcohol. NOTE + If headlight aiming is required, con- sult your SUBARU dealer for proper adjustment of the headlight aim. + it may be difficult to replace the bulbs. Have your SUBARU dealer re- place the bulbs if necessary.

1 à KP AT9OOBE-A book Page 47 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

1. Remove the bulb cover, by turning it

2. Disconnect the electrical connector.

3. Remove the retainer spring.

4. Replace the bulb with a new one.

5. Set the retainer spring securely.

6. Reconnect the electrical connector.

7. Install the bulb cover.

Y Left-hand low beam light bulb [ A WARNING Replacement of the left-hand low beam light bulb requires removal of the battery and is thus dangerous. It must be performed by a SUBARU dealer.

Maintenance and service 11-47 Y High beam light bulbs

1. Disconnect the electrical connector A

2. Remove the bulb from the headlight

assembly by turning it counterclockwise. — CONTINUED — nil

1 à KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 48 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

11-48 maintenance and service

3. Replace the bulb with new one.

4. Reconnect the electrical connector. At

this time, use care not to touch the bulb surface.

5. To install the bulb to the headlight as-

sembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks. Front turn signal light bulbs It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. Have your SUBARU dealer replace the bulbs if necessary. B Parking light It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. Have your SUBARU dealer replace the bulbs if necessary. Front fog light It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. Have your SUBARU dealer replace the bulbs if necessary. H Rear combination lights Y Sedan

1. Remove the clip from the rear trunk

trim with a screwdriver.

3) Rear turn signal light

2. Open the rear portion of the side trunk

3. Remove the bulb socket from the rear

combination light assembly by turning it counterclockwise.

4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and

replace it with a new one.

5. Set the bulb socket into the rear combi-

nation light assembly and turn it clockwise until it locks.

6. Secure the rear trunk trim panel with

1 à KP AT9OOBE-A book Page 49 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

1. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove

the upper and lower clips that secure the side cover of the rear combination light as- sembly. B00529

2. Remove the side cover.

3. Remove the upper and lower bolts.

Then, slide the rear combination lamp as- sembly to the rear and remove it from the vehicle.

Maintenance and service 11-49

2) Rear turn signal light

4. Remove the bulb socket from the rear

combination light assembly by turning it counterclockwise.

5. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and

replace it with a new one.

6. Set the bulb socket into the rear combi-

nation light assembly and turn it clockwise until it locks. — CONTINUED — nil

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page 50 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

11-50-maintenance and service

7. Put the rear combination light assem-

bly into place while aligning the clip with the guide on the vehicle and fasten the bolts.

8. Install the side cover and secure it with

the clips. License plate light

1. Remove the mounting screws using a

Phillips screwdriver.

3. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a

5. Tighten the mounting screws.

H Dome light, map light and cargo area light

1 à KP AT90OBE-A book Page 51 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM B00461

1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of

the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.

2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a

1. Remove the cover by squeezing its

sides and pulling it.

2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a

3. Reinstall the cover.

1. Remove the high mount stop light cov-

er by prying the edge with a screwdriver.

2. Remove the bulb socket from the high

mount stop light assembly by turning it counterclockwise.

3. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a

4. Reinstall the cover.

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page 52 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

11-52-Maintenance and service Y Wagon

1. Remove the mounting screws using a

Philips screwdriver and then remove the high mount stop light cover.

2. Remove the bulbs from the socket by

pushing it and turning counterclockwise. Install a new bulb.

3. Reinstall the cover.

4. Tighten the mounting screws.

NOTE Other bulbs may be difficult to replace. Have your SUBARU dealer replace these bulbs if necessary.

KP AT90OBE-A book Page 1 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM —+1® Specifications Specifications 12-2 Dimensions 12-2 Engine 12-3 Electrical system 12-3 Capacities . 12-4 Tires … 12-4 Wheel al 12-5 Fuses and circuits 12-6 Fuse panel located behind the coin tray 12-6 Fuse panel located in the engine compartment 12-8 Bulb chart. 12-9 Vehicle ide 12-10

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 2 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 12-2 Specifications

Specifications These specifications are subject to change without notice. EH Dimensions in (mm) Item Sedan Wagon 2.5-liter 2.5-liter turbo 2.5-liter non-turbo 2.5-liter turbo non-turbo

25 WRX WRX-STI 25 OUTBACK WRX

SPORT Drive system AWD Transmission type AT I MT I AT I MT I MT I AT I MT I AT I MT I AT I MT Overall length 175.8 (4,465) Overall Sedan 68.5 (1,740) = width Wagon = 66.7 (1,695) 67.3 (1,710) 66.7 (1,695) Overall Without 56.7 (1,440) 56.3 (1,430) 57.7 (1,465) 58.1 (1,475) 57.7 (1,465) height roofrail With roofrail = 58.5 (1,485) 58.9 (1,495) 58.5 (1.485) Wheel base 99.4 (2,525) 100 (2,540) 99.4 (2,525) Tread Front 58.5 (1,485) 58.7 (1,490) 577(1465) | 575(1460) | 57.7(1,465) Rear 58.1 (1,475) 58.3 (1,480) 58.9 (1,495) 57.3 (1,455) Ground clearance"1 6.3 (160) 6.3 (160) 5.7 (145) 63(160) [| 67(170) | 6.3(160) “1: Measured with vehicle empty AT: Automatic transmission MT: Manual transmission ) de) > #7 et +

d di|æ #7 A1900BE-A-G12.fm Page 3 Wednesday, June 22, 2005 9:44 AM 7 Specifications 12-3 H Engine Engine model EJ253 EJ255 EJ257 (2.5-liter, SOHC, non-turbo) (2.5-liter, DOHC, turbo, WRX) (2.5-liter, DOHC, turbo, WRX-STI) Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4-stroke gasoline engine Displacement cc (cu-in) 2,457 (150) Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.9 x 3.1 (99.5 x 79.0) Compression ratio 10.0 :1 84:1 I 82:1 Firing order 1-3-2-4 Electrical system Battery type and capacity (SHR) MT T2V-A8AH (55D23L) AT 12V-52AH (75D23L) Alternator WRX 12V-110A Except WRX 12V-90A Spark plugs Non-turbo engine FRSAP-11 (NGK) Turbo engine ILFR6B (NGK) AT: Automatic transmission MT: Manual transmission

12-4 Specifications H Capacities

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 4 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM Fuel tank

4.2 US at (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)

Transmission oil (MT) | 5-speed 3.7 US at (3.5 liters, 3.1 Imp qt) 6-speed 4.3 US at (4.1 liters, 3.6 Imp qt) AT differential gear oil T3 US qt (1.2 liters, 1.1 Imp qt) Rear differential gear oil WRX-STI TT US qt (1.0 liters, 0.9 Imp qt) Others 0.8 US at (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt) Transmission oil (AT) 10.0 US at (9.5 liters, 8.4 Imp qt) Power steering fluid 0.7 US at (0.7 liter, 0.6 Imp at) Engine coolant Non-turbo engine MT 7.4 US at (7.0 liters, 6.2 Imp at) AT 7.3 US at (6.9 liters, 6.1 Imp at) Turbo engine MT 8.1 US at (7.7 liters, 6.8 Imp qt) AT: Automatic transmission MT: Manual transmission BTires Item 2.5i, OUTBACK SPORT WRX WRX-STI Tire size P205/55R16 89V 215/45R17 91W 225/45R17 90W Wheel size 16x 617 JJ 17 X7 JJ 17 x 8 JJ Pressure Front 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgflcm2) | 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgflcm2) | 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgflcm2) Rear 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgflcm2) | 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgflcm2) | 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgflcm2) Temporary spare tire Size T135/70 D16 T135/70 D17 Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgflcm2) ei+-

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 6 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 12-6 Specifications Fuses and circuits Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit B Fuse panel located behind the coin tray 1 15A + Heater fan 2 15A + Heater fan 3 15A + Power door lock + Remote keyless entry 4 20A + Cigarette lighter +_ Remote controlled rear view mirrors 5 10A °_Taillight + Parking light 6 15A + _SRS airbag 7 15A + Foglight 8 20A + _ ABS solenoid 9 15A + Radio 10 Empty 11 15A Engine ignition system + _SRS airbag + AT control system 12 10A +_lllumination brightness control 13 10A + Combination meter 09000 °_SRS lamp 14 10A + Rear window wiper and washer ) de) > #7

7 AIS0OBE-A book Page 7 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit 15 30A Windshield wiper and washer 16 20A Brake light 17 15A Air conditioner 18 15A Backup light Cruise control 19 20A Mirror heater 20 Empty 21 15A Ignition coil (Non-turbo model only) 22 10A ABS ignition 23 20A Accessory power outlet (cargo) Seat heater

Specifications 12-7 — CONTINUED —

KT AT90OBE-A book Page 8 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 12-8 Specifications H Fuse panel located in the engine compartment — — Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit 1 20A + Radiator cooling fan (Main) À L 2 20A + Radiator cooling fan (Sub) TELE 3 30A + ABS motor qui U ) 4 20A + Rear window defogger 8 5 15A + Hazard warning flasher Œ ° Hom — E 6 15A + Tum signal lights [ 5 7 10A + Automatic transmission control unit L — N 24 | 8 10A + Alternator 9 15A + Headiight (right side) =— 10 15A + Headiight (left side) TS 12 11 20A *_ Lighting switch [ 12 20A Clock = +_ Interior light 13 10A + Secondary air combination valve Coot07 (Turbo models only) A) FWD socket (AT models except Turbo) B) Main fuse C) Engine sensor (Non-turbo models) ù FN <&7 #7 eit- +

| à & WP AIDOOBE-A.book Page 9 Friday, June 17, 200$ 5:40 PM

e||4… _4lle (#7 A1900BE-A.book Page 10 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM n Ï £ EN Lù ù 12-10 Specifications Vehicle identification Vehicle identification number Vacuum hose connections label/ Emission control label Tire inflation pressure label Certification plate Bar cord label (U.S. only) Vehicle identification number plate Model number plate Radio noise label (Canada only) Fuel label

d di|æ KŸ7 A1900BE-A.book Page 1 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM n 41 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects Eu Tire information 13-2 Tire labeling 13-2 Recommended tire inflation pressure 13-5 Glossary of tire terminology … . 13-6 Tire care - maintenance and safety practices …. 13-7 Vehicle load limit — how to determine . 13-8 Determining compatibility of and vehicle load capacities … …… 13-10 Adverse safety consequences of overloading on handling and stopping and on tires . . 13-11 Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit . 13-11 Uniform tire quality grading standards 13-12 Treadwear . . 13-12 Traction AA, A, B, . 13-12 rs Temperature A, B, C . 13-12 LE Reporting safety defects (USA) 13-13

1 à KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 2 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

13-2 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects For U.S.A. The following information has been com- piled according to Code of Federal Regu- lations “Title 49, Part 575”. Tire information A Tire labeling Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire Identification Number or TIN) are placed on the sidewall of a tire by tire manufacturers. These marking can provide you with useful information on the tire. y Tire size Your vehicle comes equipped with P- Metric tire size. lt is important to un- derstand the sizing system in select- ing the proper tire for your vehicles. Here is a brief review of the tire sizing system with a breakdown of its indi- vidual elements. V P Metric With the P-Metric system, Section Width is measured in millimeters. To convert millimeters into inches, divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio (Section Height divided by Section Width) helps provide more dimensional infor- mation about the tire size.

Example: P 205/55 R 16 (1) (2) @) (4) (5) (1) P = Certain tire type used on light duty vehicles such as passenger cars (2) Section Width in millimeters (3) Aspect Ratio (= section height + section width). (4) R = Radial Construction (5) Rim diameter in inches V Load and Speed Rating Descrip- tions The load and speed rating descrip- tions will appear following the size designation. They provide two important facts about the tire. First, the number des- ignation is its load index. Second, the letter designation indicates the tire’s speed rating. Example: P_205/55 R 16 89 V Size designation (6) (7) (6) Load Index: À numerical code

KT AT90OBE-A book Page 3 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM which specifies the maximum load a tire can carry at the speed indicated by its speed symbol, at maximum in- flation pressure. For example, “90” means 1,323 lbs (600 kg), “89” means 1,278 Ibs (580 kg). [ A WARNING | Load indices apply only to the tire, not to the vehicle. Putting a load rated tire on any vehicle does not mean the vehicle can be loaded up to the tire’s rated load. (7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical system describing a tire’s capability to travel at established and predeter- mined speeds. For example, “V” means 149 mph (240 km/h) —+1® Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-3 A WARNING | + Speed ratings apply only to the tire, not to the vehicle. Put- ting a speed rated tire on any vehicle does not mean the ve- hicle can be operated at the tire’s rated speed. The speed rating is void if the tires are worn out, damaged, repaired, retreaded, or other- wise altered from their original condition. If tires are repaired, retreaded, or otherwise al- tered, they may not be suitable for original equipment tire de- signed loads and speeds. Y Tire Identification Number (TIN) Tire Identification Number (TIN) is marked on the intended outboard sidewall. The TIN is composed of four groups. Here is a brief review of the TIN with a breakdown of its individual elements.

(1) (2) (3) (4) (1) Manufacturer's Identification Mark (2) Tire Size (3) Tire Type Code (4) Date of Manufacture The first two figures identify the week, starting with “01” to represent the first full week of the calendar year; the second two figures represent the year. For example, 0101 means the 1st week of 2001. Y Other markings The following makings are also placed on the sidewall. V Maximum permissible inflation pressure The maximum cold inflation pressure to which this tire may be inflated. For example, “300 kpa (44 PSI) MAX. PRESS” V Maximum load rating The load rating at the maximum per- missible weight load for this tire. For example, “MAX. LOAD 580 kg (1279 LBS) @ 300 kpa (44 PSI) MAX. PRESS.” — CONTINUED —

d di|æ (#7 A1900BE-A.book Page 4 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM n 41

13-4 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects [ A WARNING Maximum load rating applies only to the tire, not to the vehi- cle. Putting a load rated tire on any vehicle does not mean the vehicle can be loaded up to the tire’s rated load. V Construction type Applicable construction of this tire. For example, “TUBELESS STEEL BELTED RADIAL” V Construction rs The generic name of each cord mate- | rial used in the plies (both sidewall and tread area) of this tire. For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2

STEEL + 2 POLYESTER SIDEWALL

2 POLYESTER" V Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG) For details, refer to “Uniform tire qual- ity grading standards” in this chapter.

æ à ui 77 AIS00BE-A book Page 5 Friday, June 17, 2008 5:40 PM

a > H Recommended tire inflation pressure Y Recommended cold tire inflation pressure Recommended cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle’s tires is as follows,

1 à KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 6 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

13-6 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects Y Vehicle placard B00164 The vehicle placard is affixed to the driver's side B-pillar. Example:

ÉÉ) CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2! REAR 3

‘The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 4084 or SD0s. COLDTIRE PRESSURE TRE| SZE Fronr| P20585R16 |230kPa.33P51 ANS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

RER | P205/58R16 |210KPA 30PSI

(GPARE| 7135770016 |420kPA 60PSI D00126 The vehicle placard shows original tire size, recommended cold tire infla- tion pressure on each tire at maxi- mum loaded vehicle weight, seating capacity and loading information. Y Adverse safety consequences of under-inflation Driving at high speeds with exces- sively low tire pressures can cause the tires to flex severely and to rapidly become hot. À sharp increase in tem- perature could cause tread separa- tion, and failure of the tire(s). Possi- ble resulting loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident. Y Measuring and adjusting air pressure to achieve proper infla- tion Check and, if necessary, adjust the pressure of each tire (including the spare) at least once a month and be- fore any long journey. Check the tire pressures when the tires are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the specific values. Driving even a short distance warms up the tires and increases the tire pressures. Also, the tire pressures

are affected by the outside tempera- ture. It is best to check tire pressure outdoors before driving the vehicle. When a tire becomes warm, the air in- side it expands, causing the tire pres- sure to increase. Be careful not to mistakenly release air from a warm tire to reduce its pressure. EH Glossary of tire terminology + Cold tire pressure The pressure in a tire that has been driven less than 1 mile or has been standing for three hours or more. + Maximum inflation pressure The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated. + Recommended inflation pres- sure The cold inflation pressure recom- mended by a vehicle manufacturer. + Intended outboard sidewall 1)The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or 2)The outward facing sidewall of an

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 7 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM asymmetrical tire that has a particu- lar side that must always face out- ward when mounting on a vehicle. - Accessory weight The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of floor mats, leather seats and cross bars to the extent that these items are available as factory-in- stalled equipment (whether installed or not). ° Curb weight The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant and air conditioning. + Maximum loaded vehicle weight The sum of curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity weight and production options weight. - Normal occupant weight 150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of occupants (3 occupants).

• Occupant distribution Distribution of occupants in a vehicle, 2 in front, 1 in rear seat. + Production options weight The combined weight of those in- stalled regular production options

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-7 weighing over 5.1 Ibs (2.3 kg) in ex- cess of those standards items which they replace, not previously consid- ered in curb weight or accessory weight. ° Vehicle capacity weight The total weight of cargo, luggage and occupants that can be added to the vehicle. + Vehicle maximum load on a tire Load on an individual tire that is deter- mined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two. + Vehicle normal load on a tire Load on an individual tire that is deter- mined by distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight and dividing by two. B Tire care - maintenance and safety practices - Check on a daily basis that the tires are free from serious damage, nails, and stones. At the same time, check the tires for abnormal wear. °_Inspect the tire tread regularly and replace the tires before their tread

wear indicators become visible. When a tire’s tread wear indicator becomes visible, the tire is worn beyond the ac- ceptable limit and must be replaced immediately. With a tire in this condi- tion, driving at even low speeds in wet weather can cause the vehicle to hy- droplane. Possible resulting loss of vehicle control can lead to an acci- dent. + To maximize the life of each tire and ensure that the tires wear uniformly, it is best to rotate the tires every 7,500 miles (12,500 km). Rotating the tires involves switching the front and rear tires on the right-hand side of the ve- hicle and similarly switching the front and rear tires on the left-hand side of the vehicle. (Each tire must be kept on its original side of the vehicle.) Re- place any damaged or unevenly worn tire at the time of rotation. After tire ro- tation, adjust the tire pressures and make sure the wheel nuts are correct- ly tightened. A tightening torque spec- ification and a tightening sequence specification for the wheel nuts can be found “Flat tires” section in chapter 9. — CONTINUED —

1 à KT AT90OBE-A book Page 8 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

13-8 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects E Vehicle load limit - how to de- termine The load capacity of your vehicle is determined by weight, not by avail- able cargo space. The load limit of your vehicle is shown on the vehicle placard attached to the drivers side B-pillar. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs” on your vehicle’s placard. The vehicle placard also shows seat- ing capacity of your vehicle. The total load capacity includes the total weight of driver and all passen- gers and their belongings, any cargo, any optional equipment such as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier, etc., and the tongue load of a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity can be cal- culated by the following method. Cargo capacity = Load limit — (total weight of occupants + total weight of optional equipment + tongue load of a trailer (if applicable)) For towing capacity information and weight limits, refer to “Trailer towing” section in chapter 8.

Y Calculating total and load capac- ities varying seating configura- tions Calculate the available load capacity as shown in the following examples: Example 1A D00117 Vehicle capacity weight of the vehicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which is indicated on the vehicle placard with the state- ment “The combined weight of occu- pants and cargo should never exceed 900 lbs or 408 kg”. For example, if the vehicle has one occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg) plus cargo weighing 662 lbs (300 kg).

1. Calculate the total weight.

Total weight = 154 Ibs (70 kg) + 662 Ibs (300 kg) (Occupant) (Cargo) = 816 lbs (370 kg)

2. Calculate the available load capac-

ity by subtracting the total weight from the vehicle capacity weight of 900 Ibs (408 kg). Available Load Capacity = 900 lbs (408 kg) — 816 bs (370 kg) (Vehicle (Total weight) capacity weight) = 84 lbs (38 kg)

3. The result of step 2 shows that a

further 84 Ibs (38 kg) of cargo can be carried.

| à & WP AIDOOBE-A.book Page 9 Friday, June 17, 200$ 5:40 PM

For example, if a person weighing 176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the same vehi- cle (bringing the number of occupants to two), the calculations are as fol- lows:

1. Calculate the total weight.

Total weight = 154 Ibs (70 kg) + 176 lbs (80 kg) (Occupant) + 662 Ibs (300 kg) (Cargo) = 992 Ibs (450 kg)

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-9

2. Calculate the available load capac-

ity. Available Load Capacity = 900 lbs (408 kg) - 992 lbs (450 kg) (Vehicle (Total weight) capacity weight) = -92 Ibs (-42 kg)

3. The total weight now exceeds the

capacity weight by 92 Ibs (42 kg), so the cargo weight must be reduced by 92 lbs (42 kg) or more. Example 2A © © D D00118 Vehicle capacity weight of the vehicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which is indicated

on the vehicle placard with the state- ment “The combined weight of occu- pants and cargo should never exceed 408 kg or 900 Ibs”. For example, the vehicle has one oc- cupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg) plus cargo weighing 375 lbs (170 kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted with a trailer hitch weighing 22 Ibs (10 kg), to which is attached a trailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg). 10% of the trailer weight is applied to the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue load = 176 Ibs (80 kg)).

1. Calculate the total weight.

Total weight = 165 lbs (75 kg) + 375 lbs (170 kg) (Occupant) (Cargo) + 22 lbs (10 kg) + 176 lbs (80 kg) (Trailer hitch) (Tongue load) = 738 lbs (335 kg)

2. Calculate the available load capac-

ity. — CONTINUED — nil

1 à KP AI9OOBE-A book Page 10 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM

13-10 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects Available Load Capacity = 900 lbs (408 kg) — 738 lbs (335 kg) (Vehicle (Total weight) capacity weight) = 162 Ibs (73 kg)

3. The result of step 2 shows that a

further 162 Ibs (73 kg) of cargo can be carried. Example 2B LS) Do0119 ee. For example, if a person weighing 143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing 40 Ibs (18 kg) now enter the same vehicle (bringing the number of occupants to three), and a child restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5 kg) is installed in eùt- the vehicle for the child to use, the cal- culations are as follows:

1. Calculate the total weight.

Total weight = 165 lbs (75 kg) + 143 Ibs (65 kg) (Occupant) + 401bs (18 kg) (Occupant) + 11Ibs(5kg) + 375 lbs (170 kg) (Child restraint) (Cargo) + 221bs (10 kg) + 176 lbs (80 kg) (Trailer hitch) (Tongue load) = 932 Ibs (423 kg)

2. Calculate the available load capac-

ity. Available Load Capacity = 900 Ibs (408 kg) - 932 lbs (423 kg) (Vehicle (Total weight) capacity weight) = -32 lbs (15 kg)

3. The total weight now exceeds the

capacity weight by 32 Ibs (15 kg), so the cargo weight must be reduced by 32 lbs (15 kg) or more. H Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle load capaci- ties The sum of four tires’ maximum load ratings must exceed the maximum loaded vehicle weight (“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the maximum load ratings of two front tires and of two rear tires must exceed each axle’s maximum loaded capacity (*“GAWR”). Original equipment tires are designed to fulfill those conditions. The maximum loaded vehicle weight is referred to Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). And each axle’s maximum loaded capacity is referred to Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The GVWR and each axle's GAWR are shown on the vehicle cer- tification label affixed to the drivers door. The GVWR and front and rear GAWRS are determined by not only the maximum load rating of tires but also loaded capacities of the vehicle’s

KP AT90OBE-A book Page 11 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM suspension, axles and other parts of the body. Therefore, this means that the vehicle cannot necessarily be loaded up to the tire’s maximum load rating on the tire sidewall. M Adverse safety consequenc- es of overloading on handling and stopping and ontires Overloading could affect vehicle han- dling, stopping distance, vehicle and tire as shown in the following. This could lead to an accident and possibly result in severe personal injury. - Vehicle stability will deteriorate. + Heavy and/or high-mounted loads could increase the risk of rollover. + Stopping distance will increase. + Brakes could overheat and fail.

• Suspension, bearings, axles and other body parts could break or expe- rience accelerated wear that will shorten vehicle life. - Tires could fail. - Tread separation could occur. . Tire could separate from its rim. Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-11 HE Steps for Determining Cor- rect Load Limit

1. Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and lug- gage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 Ibs (635 kg) and there will be five- 150 Ibs (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 — 750 (5 x 150) = 650 Ibs.)

5. Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safe- ly exceed the available cargo and lug- gage load capacity calculated in Step

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail-

er, load from your trailer will be trans-

—+||e ferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduc- es the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

KT AT9OOBE-A book Page 12 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM 13-12 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects Uniform tire quality grading standards This information indicates the relative performance of passenger car tires in the area of treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance. This is to aid the consumer in making an informed choice in the purchase of tires. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall be- tween tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tem- perature A The quality grades apply to new pneu- matic tires for use on passenger cars. However, they do not apply to deep tread, winter type snow tires, space- saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 12 inches or less, or to some limited pro- duction tires. All passenger car tires must confirm to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. EH Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con- ditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1-1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative perfor- mance of tires depends upon the ac- tual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving hab- its, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. E Traction AA, À, B, C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, À, B and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on speci- fied government test surfaces of as- phalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

À WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight- ahead braking traction tests, and does not include accelera- tion, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. HE Temperature À, B, C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled condi- tions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tempera- ture can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre- sponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of per- formance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

œ|i4 &||e as 7 AIDOOBE-A.book Page 13 Friday, June 17, 2005 5:40 PM NA & A D) @ Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-13 A WARNING ] Reporting safety defects tain other information about motor (USA) vehicle safety from the Hoiline. The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that | | If you believe that your vehicle has is properly inflated and not over- a defect which could cause a loaded. Excessive speed, under- inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combina- tion, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately in- form the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Subaru of America, Inc. If NHTSA receives similar com- plaints, it may open an investiga- À tion, and if it finds that a safety de- Ÿ fect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA can- not become involved in individual problems between you, your deal- er, or Subaru of America, Inc. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll- free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366- 0123 in the Washington D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Depart- ment of Transportation, Washing- ton, D.C. 20590. You can also ob-

œ||4 AIL ui 7 AIS00BE-A book Page 1 Friday, June 17, 2008 6:38 PM NA

1 à 77 AIS00BE-A book Page 2 Friday, June 17, 2008 6:38 PM

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) 7-22 Warning light . 3-17, 7-23 Accessories …. . 5-2, 11-43 Accessory power outlet Active head restraint . Air cleaner element Air conditioner operation . Air filtration system Air flow selection Alarm system All-Wheel Drive warning light (AWD AT vehicles) Aluminum wheels Antenna system . 5-2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) 7-22 Arming the system …. 2-14 Armrest Ashtray AT OIL TEMPerature warning light . Audio set ….. 5-3 Auto-dimming mirror/compass 3-32 Automatic climate control system . 4-7 Automatic transmission 7-16 Capacities Fluid … Selector lever . Shift lock release Temperature warning light Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR) . Battery 11-40 Jump starting …. Replacement (Remote keyless entry system) Brake Booster … Fluid Pad and lining Pedal … Brake pedal Free play . Reserve distance . Brake system Warning light Braking Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings Tips … Bulb Chart … Replacing …

1 à 77 AIS00BE-A book Page 3 Friday, June 17, 2008 6:38 PM

Daytime running light system ….. Differential gear oil Front . Rear Dimensions Disarming the system Disc brake pad wear warning indicators Dome light Door locks Door open warning light Drive belts Driver’s control center differential Drivers control center differential Auto indicator light Indicator lights … Driving Car phone/cell phone . Drinking Drugs Foreign countries . Pets ….. 7-10, 7-12,

1 à 77 AIS00BE-A book Page 4 Friday, June 17, 2008 6:38 PM

14-4 index Tired or sleepy

EBD (Electronic brake force distribution) system Electrical system … Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system . Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) Engine Compartment overview Coolant … Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) Hood . Oil . Overheating Starting … Stopping . Exterior care

GAMR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) . Glove box …. GWMR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

Hazard warning flasher . Head restraint adjustment (Front) . Head restraint adjustment (Wagon) . Headlight beam leveler . Headlight flasher . Headlight indicator ligl Headlights . Heater operation . High beam indicator light . High mount stop light Horn … Hose and connections

1 à 7 AIS00BE-A book Page 5 Friday, June 17, 2008 6:38 PM

Ignition switch . Illuminated entry Illumination brightness control Immobilizer Indicator light High beam …. Selector lever position Turn signal . Inside mirror Intercooler water spray Switch . Warning ligl Interior light Internal trunk lid release handle

Jack and jack handle Jump starting

Index 14-5 Dome Map .… Light control switch Limited slip differential (LSD) . Loading your vehicle …… LSD (Limited slip differential) .

Main fuse Maintenance Precautions Schedule . Seatbelt Tools Malfunction indicator lamp (Check Engine light) . Manual climate control system … Manual transmission 5 speeds . 6 speeds . Map light Maximum load limits. Meters and gauges Mirrors … Moonroof New vehicle break-in driving the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) …

1 à 7 AIS00BE-A book Page 6 Friday, June 17, 2008 6:38 PM 14-6 index Off road driving Oil filter Oil level Engine … Front differential (AT vehicles) . Manual transmission Rear differential … Oil pressure warning light Outside mirrors Outside temperature indicator Overheating engine …

Rear Combination lights Differential gear oil 3-17 2-23 Differential oil temperature warning light Gate Seats . 1-6 Rear seat Folding down (Wagon) … … 1-8 Rear window Defogger button … 3-29 Wiper and washer switch 3-28 Recommended Automatic transmission fluid . 11-21 Brake fluid 11-25 Clutch fluid . 11-26 Oil grade and viscosity 11-10, 11-11, 11-19, 11-22, 11-23 Power steering fluid . 11-24 Spark plugs … 11-17 Remote keyless entry system 2-7 Replacement Brake pad and lining 11-28 Wiper blades 11-37 Replacing Air cleaner element 11-15 Battery (Remote keyless entry system) 2-9 Lost transmitters (keyless entry system) 2-10 Replacing bulbs 11-44 Cargo area light 11-50 Dome light 11-50 Front fog light . 11-48 Front turn signal light 11-48 Headlights 11-45 High mount stop light 11-51 License plate light … 11-50

1 à 77 AIS00BE-A book Page 7 Friday, June 17, 2008 6:38 PM Map light . Parking light Rear combination lights . Trunk light REV indicator light and buzzer . Rocking the vehicle .… Roof rail and crossbar .

Index 14-7 . 1-57 . 3-15 . 1-51 7-7 7-5 7-8 6-4 SRS airbag system servicing …. SRS airbag system warning light . SRS side airbag . Starting the engine . State emission testing (U.S. only) Stopping the engine Storage compartments Sun shades Sun visors Supplemental Restraint System airbag ( Synthetic leather Upholstery

Tachometer Temperature gauge Temporary spare tire Tilt steering wheel . Tire Chains . Inspection 11-30 Pressures and wear 11-30 Replacement . 11-33 Rotation Tires … Types … Tires and wheels Top tether anchorages . Towing …. All wheels on the ground Flat-bed truck … Trailer Hitch …

1 à 7 AIS00BE-A book Page 8 Friday, June 17, 2008 6:38 PM

Under-floor storage compartment … … 6-12

Warning and indicator lights Warning lights Al-Wheel Drive . Anti-lock Brake System . AT OIL TEMPerature Brake system . Charge …… CHECK ENGINE . Door open Oil pressure R.Diff TEMPerature . Seatbelt … SRS airbag system Warranties and maintenance . Washing … Waxing and polishing Wear indicators … Wheel Alignment Balance Replacement Windows Windshield Windshield washer fluid …. Wiper and washer switches Wiper deicer Winter driving Wiper and washer . 1-11, 3-14

1 à KT AI90OBE-A-GASREF fm Page 2 Wednesday, June 22, 2005 9:44 AM

Fuel: Y 2.5-liter non-turbo models Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI or higher. Y WRX Use premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI or higher. If premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AK is not available, regular unleaded gasoline with octane rating of 87 AKI or higher may be temporarily used. For optimum engine performance and driveability, it is required that you use premium grade unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI or higher. Y WRX-STI Use super-premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 93 AK or higher. If super-premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 93 AKI is not available, premium unleaded gasoline with octane rating of 91 AKI or higher may be temporarily used. For op- timum engine performance and driveability, it is required that you use super-premium grade unleaded gasoline with an octane rating Cold tire pressure: of 93 AKI or higher. M Fuel octane rating This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and Mo- tor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti Knock Index (AKI). Refer to “Fuel” section in this manual. Fuel capacity:

15.9 US gal (60 liters, 13.2 Imp gal)

Engine o Use only API classification SM with the words “ENERGY CON- SERVING” and the ILSAC certification mark (starburst mark) dis- played on the container. Engine oil capacity: